KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual (Field Service)

Service Manual
[Field Service]
CF5001
Dual references may be used on the following: Official Options name AFR-20 C-208 FN-120 FN-9 Cover Inserter D PK-5 TMG-3 In-System Writer : : : : : : : : Popular Options name RADF, DF LT FNS FNS PI PU TU ISW
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 IMPORTANT NOTICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-1 SAFETY WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-2 SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 3.1 3.2 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 Replacing the dust filter /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Replacing the toner collection box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Angle adjustment of the operation board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Removing and reinstalling the main board unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Removing and reinstalling the platen glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11 Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14 Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Removing the scanner wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18 Reinstalling the scanner wire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20 Screw that must not be removed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Removing and reinstalling the write unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24 Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
2. SCANNER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
3. WRITING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
4. PROCESS UNIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27 Cleaning the charging corona unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling the charging wire assy /the charging control plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Pulling out the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-31 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32 Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35 Replacing the belt cleaning blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36 Replacing the toner collection sheet /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37 Replacing the belt separation claw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-38
4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41 4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
VI DIAGRAMS
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39
V CODE LIST
IV SERVICE
III SERVICE TOOL
II ADJUSTMENT
IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.15 Replacing the developing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-46 4.16 Replacing the developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-48 4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50 4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51 4.19 Removing and reinstalling the image correction unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-52 5. TONER SUPPLY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 5.1 5.2 Opening and closing the toner supply section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53 Replacing the charging dust filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-54 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-58 Replacing the double feed prevention rubber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-61
II ADJUSTMENT
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5
6.6 Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62 7. BY-PASS TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
III SERVICE TOOL
7.1 7.2
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69 8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 8.1 8.2 Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-71 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
9. FIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75 9.1 Screws that must not be removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75 9.2 9.3 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76 Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77 Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79 Replacing the fixing roller /U, ball bearing /U and the heat insulating sleeve /U . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82 Replacing the fixing roller /L, ball bearing /L and the heat insulating sleeve /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-84 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /1 and the thermostat /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86 Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /2 and the thermostat /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-91
IV SERVICE
9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8
9.9 Replacing the fixing drive gear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96 9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-98
V CODE LIST
9.11 Replacing the fixing torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-100 10. REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102 10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-102 10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-104 10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-105 10.4 Replacing the transfer ground plate unit and the 2nd transfer roller /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-106 10.5 Replacing the registration roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-107 10.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 and /3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-109
VI DIAGRAMS
10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110 10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111 10.9 Replacing the decurler roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-112
ii
CONTENTS
11. OTHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114 11.1 Installation of the Key Counter Socket (OPTION) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114 11.2 Installation / Remove of the Memory Unit (OPTION). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115
AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117 1.1 RADF hinge opening/closing angle adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117 1.2 1.3 Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119 Removing and reinstalling the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121 2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 3.1 3.2 3.3 4.1 Cleaning the no paper sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-122 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127 Cleaning the registration roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
3. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 Cleaning the paper exit roller/the paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 4.2 Cleaning the reverse roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133 5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135 1.2 1.3 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 Removing and reinstalling the clutch replacement cover and the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed pick-up cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141 Replacing the double feed prevention roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
3. TRAY UP/DOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145 3.1 Removing and reinstalling the rear drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-145 3.2 Removing and reinstalling the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. EXTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet tray (FN-9 only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160 Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160 Removing and reinstalling of the side cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161 Removing and reinstalling of the finisher door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161 iii
VI DIAGRAMS
V CODE LIST
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144
IV SERVICE
1.1
Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135
III SERVICE TOOL
Cleaning the registration sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130 Removing and reinstalling the conveyance belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
II ADJUSTMENT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS 1.6
Removing and reinstalling of the rear cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162 Removing and reinstalling of the main tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-163 Removing and reinstalling of the main paper exit opening cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.7 1.8
1.9 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet paper exit opening cover (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-164 2. CONVEYANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165 2.1 2.2 Replacing the paper exit roller /A (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-165 Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-167
2.3 Removing and reinstalling of the paper exit opening unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-168 3. MAIN TRAY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
II ADJUSTMENT
3.1 3.2
Replacing the tray up/down motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170 Removing and reinstalling of the up/down wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
4. STACKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175 4.1 Replacing the stacking assist roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175 4.2 4.3 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-175 Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
5. STAPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179 5.1 Removing and reinstalling of the stapler unit cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-179
III SERVICE TOOL
5.2 5.3
Replacing the clincher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180 Replacing the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182
PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. PUNCH SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185 1.1 Replacing the Punch unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-185 1.2 Cleaning the Punch Edges and Punch Scraps Full PS (PS802) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-188
Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

IV SERVICE
1. External Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189 1.1 Removing / Re-installing the External covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-189 2. Paper feed unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191 2.1 2.2 Replacing the Paper feed roller and Feed roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-191 Replacing the Double feed prevent roller and Torque limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-192
TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
V CODE LIST
1. TRIMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193 1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-193
II
ADJUSTMENT
1.1 Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 4. MODE CHANGE MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
VI DIAGRAMS
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4
Setting method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Display transition of 36 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Display transition of 25 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Display transition of Key Operation modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 iv
CONTENTS
5. CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 5.1 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Checking method of the P function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 List of adjustment items for 25 mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Setting software DIPSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Paper size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 6.4.1 6.4.2 6.4.3 6.5 6.5.1 6.5.2 6.6 6.7 Standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 Non-standard size setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25 6. 25 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
PM count setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Count reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26 Change setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27 Parts counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 6.7.1 6.7.2 Count of special parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Count of each parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
6.9
Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
6.10 M/C serial number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 6.11 Indication of ROM version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 6.12 ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 6.13 Setting date input. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 6.14 Board change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 7. 36 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 7.1 7.2 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Process adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.2.3 7.2.4 High voltage adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Drum peculiarity adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Sensor output check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58 Exclusive paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
7.2.5 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-59 7.3 Image adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.3.4 7.3.5 7.3.6 7.4 Magnification adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Timing adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66 RADF adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74 Centring adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76 Non-image area erase check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79 Recall standard data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Image quality adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-81 7.4.2 7.4.3 7.4.4 7.4.5 7.4.6 7.4.7 Printer gamma adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-82 Sharpness adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87
ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 Density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 v
VI DIAGRAMS
Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88
V CODE LIST
IV SERVICE
III SERVICE TOOL
6.8
Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
II ADJUSTMENT
Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS 7.4.8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Tone adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-93 Recall standard data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-94
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7.4.9 7.5
Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95
7.5.1 Setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95 7.6 Test pattern output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-96 7.7 7.8 Test pattern density setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100 Finisher adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-100 7.8.1 7.8.2 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-101 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover Inserter D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-102 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105 2 positions staple pitch adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
II ADJUSTMENT
7.8.3 7.8.4 7.8.5 7.8.6 7.8.7 7.9
List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106
8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107 8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107
III SERVICE TOOL
8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5
Adjustment data display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108 Hard disk check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-108 Input check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-109 Output check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-121 Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131 Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-132 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-134 Paper feed tray /1 to /3 mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-135 Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-136 FNS adjustment of the by-pass conveyance guide plate magnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-138 FNS adjustment of the by-pass gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-139 FNS adjustment of the shift position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-141 FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-142
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131
IV SERVICE
9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-144 9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-146 9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-148 9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-150
V CODE LIST
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-152 9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-156 9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FN-9). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-158 9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-160 9.18 FNS adjustment of the three-holding position (only for FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-161 9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-162 9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-166 9.21 LCT tray mis-centering adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-167
VI DIAGRAMS
9.22 LCT skew adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-169 9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-171 9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-172 9.25 LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-173 vi
CONTENTS
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-174 9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-176 9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-178 9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-179 9.30 PI Centering Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-180 9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch is used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-181
III SERVICE TOOL

1. ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1.1 1.2 1.3 Description of the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.3.4 1.3.5 Board used for the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Data flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 ISW transfer type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Instances of ISW transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Setup procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.3 2.4
Installing the application program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 Setting up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 ISW Trns Main Window Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 Parallel port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Copying Transfer Data (Update Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14 Connecting the CF5001. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 2.4.1 Update operation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.4.9 Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Preparing the copier to transfer.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Running ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 Selecting a version of transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 Verifying transfer files (update data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Transmitting transfer files (update data). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Exiting ISW Trns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 2.5 2.6 ISW Trns Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Troubleshooting ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 2.6.2 2.6.3 2.6.4 2.6.5 2.7 2.7.1 Send file is not displayed when a combo box item is selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 NG produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 ?? produced by a file check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Unsuccessful file transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22 Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Connecting to the ISW connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
3 INTERNET ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 3.1 What is the Internet ISW? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 vii
VI DIAGRAMS
V CODE LIST
IV SERVICE
III SERVICE TOOL
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
II ADJUSTMENT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
CONTENTS 3.2
Operating environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3.4.1 3.4.2 Setting on Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Setting on Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.3 3.4
3.5
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3.5.1
3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 3.6 Internet ISW using Web utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
II ADJUSTMENT
3.6.1 3.6.2 3.7
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
Precautions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 3.7.1 Prior announcement to administrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 3.7.2 3.7.3 If power failure occurs during data rewriting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 ISW of multiple programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
3.8
3.7.4 If ISW fails in low power mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 3.8.1 3.8.2 3.8.3 3.8.4 What is a proxy server? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Authentication of proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43
III SERVICE TOOL
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 What is the Mail remote notification system?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Operation environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 Initial setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 How to use the Mail remote notification system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 Disabling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-59
IV SERVICE
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1.1 Service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Periodic check items (main body) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8 Periodic check items (AFR-20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 Periodic check items (C-208). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Periodic check items (TMG-3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Replacement parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
V CODE LIST
1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9
1.10 Important maintenance parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18 2. COPY MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 2.1 2.2 Product. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 PM parts kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
VI DIAGRAMS
2.3
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
viii
CONTENTS
1. JAM CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 2. ERROR CODE LIST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 1.3 1.4 1.5 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 C-208 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23 FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24 TMG-3 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28 Main Body connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30 AFR-20 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 C-208 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39 FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40 TMG-3 connector layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
3. TIMING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 3.1 Main Body timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-42 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 AFR-20 timing chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44 C-208 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51 FN-120/FN-9 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 TMG-3 timing chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56 AFR-20 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
TMG-3 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 Cover Inserter D Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
4.6 PK-5 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 5. APPENDIX 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 5.8 CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (1/8) CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (2/8)
CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (5/8) CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (6/8) CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (7/8) CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (8/8)
ix
VI DIAGRAMS
V CODE LIST
CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (3/8) CF5001 Overall Wiring Diagram (4/8)
IV SERVICE
C-208 Overall Wiring Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61 FN-120/FN-9 Overall Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
III SERVICE TOOL
II ADJUSTMENT
1.2
AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
V CODE LIST
VI DIAGRAMS
CONTENTS
V CODE LIST
IV SERVICE
III SERVICE TOOL II ADJUSTMENT I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the Safety and Important Warning Items described below to understand them before doing service work.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this copier as well as the risk of damage to the copier, Minolta Corporation strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by Minolta-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this copier to improve its performance after this Service manual was printed. Accordingly, Minolta Corporation does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this Service manual is complete and accurate. The user of this Service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the copier while servicing the copier for which this Service manual is intended. Therefore, this Service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the copier properly. Keep this Service manual also for future service.
DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

In this Service manual, each of three expressions DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the copier, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER :Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING:Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION :Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and
property damage
Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
:Precaution when using the copier. :Prohibition when using the copier. :Direction when using the copier.
General precaution
Electric hazard
High temperature
General prohibition
Do not touch with wet hand
Do not disassemble
General instruction
Unplug
Ground/Earth
S-1
SAFETY WARNINGS
1. MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY MINOLTA
Minolta copiers are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Copier design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.
DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Using any cables or power cord not specified by Minolta.
Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by Minolta. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object.
Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)
Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury.
Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Minolta.
Using parts not specified by Minolta.
S-2
2.
CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
Minolta copiers are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks. 2.1 Power Supply
WARNING: Wall Outlet

Check that mains voltage is as specified. Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result.
kw
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire. Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock. When using the power cord (inlet type) that came with this copier, be sure to observe the following precautions: a. Make sure the copier-side power plug is securely inserted in the socket on the rear panel of the copier. Secure the cord with a fixture properly. b. If the power cord or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plugs on both ends) specified by Minolta. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the copier securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
S-3
WARNING: Power Plug and Cord

Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.
Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists.
When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.
WARNING: Wiring
Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists. When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result.
WARNING: Ground Lead

Check whether the copier is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded copier, you may suffer electric shock while operating the copier. Connect the ground lead to one of the following points: a. Ground terminal of wall outlet b. Ground terminal for which Class D work has been done
S-4
WARNING: Ground Lead

Pay attention to the point to which the ground lead is connected. Connecting the ground lead to an improper point such as the points listed below results in a risk of explosion and electric shock: a. Gas pipe (A risk of explosion or fire exists.) b. Lightning rod (A risk of electric shock or fire exists.) c. Telephone line ground (A risk of electric shock or fire exists in the case of lightning.) d. Water pipe or faucet (It may include a plastic portion.) 2.2. Installation Requirements
WARNING: Prohibited Installation Place

Do not place the copier near flammable materials such as curtains or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. Do not place the copier in a place exposed to water such as rain water. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
WARNING: Nonoperational Handling

When the copier is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.
CAUTION: Temperature and Humidity

Do not place the copier in a place exposed to direct sunlight or near a heat source such as a heater. A risk of degradation in copier performance or deformation exists. Do not place the copier in a place exposed to cool wind. Recommended temperature and humidity are as follows: Temperature: 10 C to 30 C Humidity: 10 % to 80 % (no dew condensation) Avoid other environments as much as possible.
CAUTION: Ventilation
Do not place the copier in a place where there is much dust, cigarette smoke, or ammonia gas. Place the copier in a well ventilated place to prevent machine problems and image faults.
S-5
CAUTION: Ventilation
The copier generates ozone gas during operation, but it is not sufficient to be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the copier is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple copiers at the same time
CAUTION: Vibration
When installing the copier, read the Installation Guide thoroughly. Be sure to install the copier in a level and sturdy place. Constant vibration will cause problems. Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the copier may slide, leading to a injury.
CAUTION: Inspection before Servicing

Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (Service manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the copier may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the copier and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists.
The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burnt.
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the copier powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury.
S-6
DANGER: Work Performed with the Copier Powered

Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damages. The user or CE may be injured. Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the copier. They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire. Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. When disconnecting connectors, grasp the connector, not the cable. (Specifically, connectors of the AC line and high-voltage parts) Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of copier trouble or fire.
Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority. Improper replacement can cause explosion.
S-7
WARNING: Safety Checkpoints

After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the copier (e.g., for clearing paper jam).
Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.
Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of copier trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.
DANGER: HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician.
Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists.
S-8
DANGER : HANDLING OF SERVICE MATERIALS

Do not replace the cover or turn the copier ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists. Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists.
When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.
3.

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and Minolta Corporation must be notified. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by Minolta Corporation. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations given in Serious Accident Report/Follow-up Procedures.
4.
CONCLUSION
Safety of users and customer engineers depends highly on accurate maintenance and administration. Therefore, safety can be maintained by the appropriate daily service work conducted by the customer engineer. When performing service, each copier on the site must be tested for safety. The customer engineer must verify the safety of parts and ensure appropriate management of the equipment.
S-9
SAFETY INFORMATION
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. This copier is certified as a Class 1 laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside this copier is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
S-10
SAFETY CIRCUITS
This machine is provided with the following safety circuits to prevent machine faults from resulting in serious accidents. Overall protection circuit Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit them in order to prevent servicing errors that may impair their functions.
These safety circuits are described below to provide the service engineer with a renewed awareness of
1.
Overall protection circuit

CBR1
NF CBR2 8050sf001
1.1 Protection by circuit breaker /1 (CBR1) and circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) CBR1 and CBR2 interrupt the AC line instantaneously when an excessive current flows due to a short in the AC line. CAUTION: The CBR1 and CBR2 functions must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
S-11
2.
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2), Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3), Fixing lower lamp (L4) overheating prevention circuit
PRCB TH1 TH3 Control section
ACDB L2 AC driver section L3 TS1
FHCB
TH2 TH4
TS2 L4 RL1
RL1
8050sf002e
2.1 Protection by software The output voltage from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) and fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) is read by the CPU. If this voltage is abnormal, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening main relay (RL1). CAUTION: The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the specified clearances. The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.2 Protection by the hardware circuit The output voltages from fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1), fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2), fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3), and fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) are compared with the abnormality judgment reference value in the comparator circuit. If the output voltage from TH1, TH2, TH3, or TH4 exceeds the reference value, L2, L3, and L4 are turned OFF by opening RL1. CAUTION: The clearance between the fixing upper roller and TH1 and the clearance between the fixing lower roller and TH2 must not be changed. When replacing them, make sure to comply with the specified clearances. Periodically check the contact between the fixing upper roller and TH3 and the contact between the fixing lower roller and TH4, and replace them if any abnormality is detected. The RL1 function must not be deactivated under any circumstances.
2.3 Protection by thermostat /1 (TS1) and thermostat /2 (TS2) When the temperature of the fixing upper roller exceeds the specified value, TS1 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L2 and L3 directly. When the temperature of the fixing lower roller exceeds the specified value, TS2 is turned OFF, thus interrupting the power to L4 directly. CAUTION: Do not use any other electrical conductor in place of TS1 and TS2.
S-12
INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown below are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
8050sf003e
CAUTION
Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
S-13
8050sf004e
CAUTION Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury.
S-14
8050sf005e
S-15
8050sf006e
S-16
8050sf007e
CAUTION Please adhere to all caution labels to avoid burns or injury..
S-17
PS
Unplug the machine before removing platen glass. Debrancher le copieur avant de retirer la vitre d'exposition. Desenchufe la maquina antes de quitar el vidrio.
~ Desconecte a unidade da tomada antes de remover o vidro de exposicao.
8050sf008e
S-18
EXTERIOR
Caution: Make sure the power cord of the copier is unplugged from the power outlet before disassembly or assembly.
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Dust filter /2: Every 100,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the filter cover [2].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3001
2. Pull out the dust filter /2 [2] from the filter cover [1]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3002
1-1
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.2
Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Dust filter /1: Every 100,000 copies Ozone filter /1: Every 100,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover / 2 [2].
[1]
[2]
2. Pull out the filter replacement duct [1].
[1]
8050ma3004
[1]
8050ma3005
1-2
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. Remove the 2 dust filters /1 [2] and the ozone filter /3 [3] from the filter replacement duct [1]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the ozone filter /1, be careful not snap and fracture it. When reinstalling the dust filter /1, be sure to press it against the stopper section [4] of the filter replacement duct.
EXTERIOR
[4]
8050ma3006
1-3
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[3]
[2]
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.3
Replacing the toner collection box
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Toner collection box: Every 50,000 copies (to be replaced by the user) B. Procedure 1. Open the toner collection door [1] and pull out the toner collection box [2].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3007
1-4
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2. Peel the label [2] off the toner collection box [1] and plug the entrance of the toner collection box [1]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
EXTERIOR
[2]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3008
1-5
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.4
Angle adjustment operation board
of
the
Note: The operation board can be set at the two steps of 7 and 18 degrees depending on the front cover /2 provided or not provided. When the front cover /2 provided: 7 degrees When the front cover /2 not provided: 18 degrees A. Procedure 1. Open the front door [1] and the toner supply door [2]. 2. Remove 2 screws [3] and release the fixing of the operation board [4]. 3. With the operation board raised up, remove the front cover /2 [5] (when the angle is changed from 7 to 18 degrees). 4. Fasten the operation board [4] with 2 screws [3]. 5. Close the front door [1] and the toner supply door [2].
[3]
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2]
Note: When changing the angle of the operation board from 18 to 7 degrees, install the front cover /2 by following Step 3.
[1]
8050ma3009
1-6
EXTERIOR
A. Procedure 1. Remove the platen cover. 2. Remove the filter cover. (See "1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2.") 3. Loosen 2 screws [1], remove 13 screws [2], and then remove the rear cover [3]. 4. Remove the side cover /2. (See "1.2 Replacing the dust filter /1 and the ozone filter /1.") 5. Remove the screws [5], one for each, and then remove the 2 original cover supports [6]. 6. Remove 2 caps [4]. 7. Remove 4 screws [7] and then remove the scanner cover /R [8].
[8]
[6] [5] [7]
[6] [5]
[4]
[4] [2] [2] [2]
[3]
8. Remove the special screw [1]. 9. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the board seal plate /2 [3].
[1]
8050ma3010
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3011
1-7
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.5
Removing and reinstalling the main board unit
EXTERIOR 10. Remove 5 connectors [1].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11. With the lock lever [2] brought down this side, release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable [3].
[1]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3012
Note: Move the lock lever [1] forward, then insert the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector while ensuring that the conductive face of the ribbon cable [3] is positioned on the opposite side of the lock lever.
[2]
[1]
[3]
1-8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Then with the lock lever [1] brought back to its original position, lock the ribbon cable [2].
EXTERIOR
[1]
12. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the board seal plate /4 [2].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3013
1-9
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
EXTERIOR 13. Remove a bracket cable clamp [1].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
14. Remove 2 connectors [2]. 15. Remove 4 screws [3] and then remove the main board unit [4]. 16. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When removing or reinstalling the main board unit, be careful that the battery on the memory board (MB) does not touch with the frame.
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3014
1-10
SCANNER
2.1
Note:
Screws that must not be removed
Screws that have been paint-locked are not allowed to be removed. So, be careful not to remove them.
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
8050ma3015
2.2
Removing and reinstalling the platen glass
A. Procedure 1. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the original positioning plate /R [2]. 2. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the original positioning plate /L [4]. 3. Remove 2 screws [5] and the remove the scanner cover /M [6]. 4. Remove the platen glass [7]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to reinstall the platen glass with its white reference plate [8] up.
[4]
[2]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[8]
[7]
8050ma3016
1-11
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. SCANNER
SCANNER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.3
Removing and reinstalling the CCD unit
A. Procedure for removal 1. Remove the platen glass. (See "2.2 Removing and reinstalling the platen glass.") 2. Remove the connector [1]. 3. Remove 9 screws [2] and then remove the CCD cover [3]. 4. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the ribbon cable cover [5].
[4]
[5] [3]
[1]
5. With the lock lever [1] brought down, release the lock and pull out the ribbon cable [2]. Note: Move the lock lever [1] downward, then insert the ribbon cable [2] firmly into the connector while ensuring that the conductive face of the ribbon cable is positioned on the opposite side of the lock lever. Then bring the lock lever back to its original position, lock the ribbon cable.
[2]
8050ma3141
[1]
[2]
8050ma3142
1-12
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD unit [2]. Note: Be careful not to remove screws other than those mentioned above. Otherwise, it becomes necessary to make all sort of optical adjustments which cannot be handled in the field. Be careful not to touch the lens. This may result in poor images. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
SCANNER
[1]
8050ma3143
1-13
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
SCANNER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.4
Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit
A. Procedure for removal 1. Remove the slit glass. (See "2.2 Removing and reinstalling the slit glass.") 2. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing of the toner supply section.") 3. Remove 2 caps [2]. 4. Remove 6 screws [1]. 5. After removing the relay connector [4] with the scanner cover /F [3] shifted to the front side once, remove the scanner cover /F [3].
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[1]
8050ma3017
1-14
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and release the fixing of the exposure unit [2]. 7. Rotate the exposure unit [2] while holding it horizontally, pull it up and place it upon the scanner room [6].
SCANNER
[3] [6]
8. Remove the connector [1]. 9. Remove the screw [2] and release the cable [4] from the cable holder [3]. 10. Remove the exposure unit [5].
[5]
[1]
8050ma3018
[2]
[1] [3]
[5]
[4]
8050ma3019
1-15
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
SCANNER B. Procedure for reinstallation
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1. Set the exposure unit [1] into the main body. 2. Move the V-mirror unit [2] to the paper exit side, and pass an optical positioning jig [3] through each of the exposure unit [1] and the V-mirror unit [2] from the front side. Note: When reinstalling the exposure unit, be sure to use the optical positioning jig. 3. Fasten the exposure unit [1] with 2 screws [4]. 4. Remove 2 optical positioning jigs [3]. 5. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[4]
[1]
[4] [3]
8050ma3020
1-16
SCANNER
A. Procedure 1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit.") 2. Cut the binding band [1] and release the fixing of the cable [2]. 3. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the HP detection plate [4]. 4. Remove 2 screws [5] and then remove L1 (exposure lamp) [6]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[3]
[6]
[2]
[4]
[5]
8050ma3021
1-17
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.5
Removing and reinstalling the exposure lamp
SCANNER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.6
Removing the scanner wire
A. Procedure 1. Remove the exposure unit. (See "2.4 Removing and reinstalling the exposure unit.") 2. Remove 2 caps [1]. 3. Remove the screw [2] and remove the scanner cover /R [3]. 4. Remove the screw [4] and remove the scanner cover /L [5].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
5. Loosen the screws [1], one for each, and release the fixing of two spring fixing plates [2].
8050ma3022
[2]
[1]
8050ma3023
1-18
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Remove the wire terminal [3] of the scanner wire /R [2] from the spring fixing plate [1], and then remove the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of the pulley /3 [4], the outside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /2 [6]. 7. Remove the metal bead [8] of the scanner wire / R [2] from the wire stopper [7], and then remove the scanner wire /R [2] in the order of the inside of the V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /1 [9].
SCANNER 8. Remove the scanner wire /R [2] from the drive pulley [10]. 9. Remove the scanner wire /F [11] by following Steps 5 to 7. Note: The scanner wires /F and /R are installed symmetrically.
[9] [5] [10] [2]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[2]
[3] [1] [11]
[2]
[7] [8]
8050ma3024
1-19
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.7
Reinstalling the scanner wire
A. Procedure 1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the paper exit side, and pass the optical positioning jig [2] through the V-mirror unit [1] from the front side. Note: Be careful not to damage the mirror with the jig. When reinstalling the scanner wire, be sure to fasten the V-mirror with the optical positioning jig.
[1]
[2]
2. Drop into the fitting hole of the drive pulley [4] a metal bead [3] provided at the center of each of the scanner wires /F [1] and /R [2], and starting from this hole, wind the scanner wire 2.5 turns [5] outwards and 3.5 turns [6] inwards.
8050ma3025
[6] [5]
[1] [4] [8]
[7]
Note: For the scanner wires /F and /R, common wires are used. Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that the wire terminal is on the outside and the metal bead [7] on the inside. Be sure to wind each of scanner wires so that both ends of the wire come out under the drive pulley. Be sure to wind each of the scanner wires closely around the drive pully with no wire running on another wire. 3. After winding the scanner wires /F and R/, be sure to fasten each wire end with a tape [8] so that it will not come off.
[3]
[8] [4]
[2] [4]
[5] [6]
[3]
[7]
8050ma3026
1-20
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the metal bead [3] side (inside) which is wound around the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /1 [4] and the V-mirror pulley [5] in this order, and then hook the metal bead [3] onto the wire stopper [6]. 5. Pass the scanner wire /R [2] on the wire terminal [7] side (outside) which is wound around the drive pulley [1] through the pulley /2 [8] and the outside of V-mirror pulley [5] and the pulley /3 [9] in this order, and then hook the wire terminal [7] onto the spring fixing plate [10].
SCANNER 6. Reinstall the scanner wire /F [11] by following Steps 4 and 5.
[9] [5] [10] [2]
[4]
[6]
[3]
FRONT [2]
[3] [1] [11]
[2]
[7] [8]
8050ma3027
1-21
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
SCANNER 7. Tighten the screws [1], one for each, and fasten
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
the 2 spring fixing plates [2]. 8. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3140
1-22
WRITING
3.1
Note:
Screw that removed
must
not
be
The screws [1] of each unit of the YMCK are not allowed to be removed. So, be careful not to remove them.
[1]
8050ma3028
1-23
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. WRITING
WRITING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.2
Removing and reinstalling the write unit
Warning: Be sure that the write unit should not be powered with it slid from its normal installation position. Be sure not to remove the write unit cover while being supplied with power. Otherwise, laser beams get into your eyes and you may lose your sight.
Note: Be sure not to remove the write unit cover. Do not loosen the screws, either. When removing the write unit, be careful not to touch the dust glass (to prevent the mirror from being stained). Be sure not to remove the write unit for at least two minutes after the main power switch is turned off. When replacing the side cover /1, insert the prong [1] on the side cover /1 into the notch on the main body.
[1]
A. Procedure 1. Open the by-pass tray [1]. 2. Loosen 4 screws [2] and remove the side cover / 2 [3]. 3. Loosen 5 screws [4] and remove the side cover / 1 [5].
8050ma3175
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3] [1]
8050ma3029
1-24
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Remove 5 relay connectors [1]. 5. Remove 10 screws [2] and then remove the fan holder /R [3].
WRITING
[2]
Note: Check the direction where the fan is assembled. [1] Turn the label side inside. [2] Turn the label side outside.
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3030
[1]
[2]
5001ma3030
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the write pressing board [2] while pressing it downward. 7. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove 2 write cooling ducts [4]. Note: Be sure to hold the upper half of the write pressing board when removing it.
[3]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
8050ma3031
1-25
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[2]
WRITING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
8. Remove the connectors [1], 2 each, and then remove the write unit /Y [2], write unit /M [3], write unit /C [4] and the write unit /K [5]. 9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1] [1]
[3]
[4]
[5] [1]
Note: The write units /C, /M and /Y are all common. The bottom of the write units /C, /M and /Y is provided with a wire tension spring [1] which differentiates these three write units from the write unit /K. Be careful not install any other write unit in the installation place for the write unit /K.
[1]
8050ma3032
[1]
8050ma3034
1-26
PROCESS UNIT
4.1
Flow of the disassembly of the process unit section

Open the toner supply section
Open the front fan cover
Pull out the process unit
Remove the charging corona unit
Pull out the transfer belt unit
Remove the drum cartridge
Remove the developing unit
Remove the process unit
Remove the image correction unit
1-27
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. PROCESS UNIT
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.2
Cleaning the charging corona unit
A. Procedure Note: The charging corona units are provided for the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black. These units are common. Do not reuse a charging corona unit that was once used for a color since it has been stuck with the toner of the color. 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. With the lever [2] of the charging corona unit [1] pressed down once to the lower right side, pull out the charging corona unit this side for removal.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3037
1-28
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. Remove a charging cleaning block [3] from the charging suction assembly [2] provided on the outside of the toner supply unit [1]. Note: There are two charging cleaning blocks provided. Be sure to use either of these two blocks when cleaning the charging corona.
PROCESS UNIT
[2]
4. Holding the charging corona unit [2] so that the charging control plate [1] comes up, set the charging cleaning block [3] to the notch and insert it from under the bottom on the rear side, and turn it about 45 clockwise. Note: If the charging wire is cleaned with the charging control plate facing down, there is a risk that dust that has stuck to the charging wire sticks to the charging control plate. So, when cleaning the charging wire, be sure to hold the charging corona unit so that the charging control plate comes upward. 5. Clean the charging wire [4] by sliding back and forth the charging cleaning block [3]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
8050ma3038
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3039
1-29
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
[1]
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.3
Cleaning/replacing, removing and reinstalling the charging wire assy /the charging control plate
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Charging wire assy: Every 100,000 copies Charging control plate: Every 200,000 copies Charging grid spring: Every 200,000 copies Note: The charging corona unit is made up of a charging wire assy, charging control plate and a charging grid spring. B. Procedure 1. Remove the charging corona unit. (See "4.2 Cleaning and replacing the charging corona unit.") 2. Remove 2 charging control springs [1] and then remove the charging control plate [2]. 3. Clean the charging control plate by blowing off dust with a blower brush. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to install the charging control plate so that the side on which the charging control spring is hooked comes to the front of the charging corona unit. Be sure to install each of the charging control springs with its tips [3] of both ends point toward the charging wire.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3040
1-30
PROCESS UNIT
Note: In order to prevent the main body from falling down, the process unit and the ADU are provided with a safety mechanism so that they cannot be pulled out at the same time. If the ADU has been pulled out when pulling out the process unit, be sure to push it back into the main body. A. Procedure 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. Loosen the screw [1] and open the front fan cover [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Bring down the stand handle /L [1] and the stand handle /R [2] to the inside at the same time to release the fixing of the process unit [3]. Then, hold each of the stand handles to pull out the process unit [3]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
8050ma3035
[3]
[2] [1]
8050ma3036
1-31
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.4
Pulling out the process unit
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.5
Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit
A. Procedure 1. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out the process unit.") 2. Loosen the screws [1], 2 each. 3. After turning once the belt positioning shaft [2] counterclockwise, pull it out for removal.
[2]
[1]
[1]
4. Remove the supporting rod [3] from the charging corona suction assembly [2] provided on the inside of the toner supply unit [1]. Note: The supporting rod is an auxiliary device to allow a removed transfer belt unit to self stand. When removing the transfer belt unit, be sure to make necessary arrangements in advance.
8050ma3043
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3044
1-32
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. With the handle [1] raised up, remove the transfer belt unit [2]. Note: Be careful not to touch and damage the transfer belt [3] with bare hands. Make sure to grab both ends of the handle of the transfer belt with both hands.
PROCESS UNIT
[1]
[2]
[3]
Hold Hold
[1]
[2]
5001ma3045
6. Set the supporting rod [2] to the transfer belt unit [1] to allow it to self stand. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Make sure not to touch and damage the transfer belt unit with the drum at installation.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3046
1-33
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT Note:
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
When reinstalling the transfer belt unit [1], be sure to turn the cam [3] clockwise fully until it will not turn any more before starting work. Be sure to install the transfer belt unit so that 2 transfer support blocks /F [4] and the 2 transfer support blocks /R [5] are accompanied with the guide pins [2] provided at two places each at front and rear. Be sure not to rotate the transfer belt when the transfer belt unit self stand with a supporting rod.
[1]
[2]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
8050ma3047
1-34
PROCESS UNIT
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Belt cleaning brush unit: Every 600,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.") 2. Remove 2 screws [2] while holding the belt cleaning unit [1] by hand, and then remove the belt cleaning unit. 3. Replace the belt cleaning brush unit with a new one. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: The belt cleaning unit is made up of the belt cleaning brush unit and the parts listed below. (For details of these parts, see "4.7 Replacing the belt cleaning blade" and "4.8 Replacing the toner collection sheet /1.") Belt cleaning blade : 1 piece Blade spring : 2 pieces Stop ring : 2 pieces Blade fulcrum shaft : 1 piece Toner collection sheet /1 : 1 piece Toner collection sheet /2 : 1 piece Screw : 3 pieces Before installing the belt cleaning unit, apply the setting powder on the portion [3] on the transfer belt. When reinstalling it, set the guide sections provided on both sides below the belt cleaning unit to the pins of the transfer belt unit, and then attach the screws.
8050ma3048
[2]
[2]
[1]
[3]
1-35
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.6
Replacing the belt cleaning brush unit
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.7
Replacing the belt cleaning blade
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Belt cleaning blade: Every 100,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning unit.") 2. Remove 2 blade springs [1]. 3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the blade support shaft [3] and remove the belt cleaning blade [4]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat the entire surface on the side on the transfer belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be mounted, with the setting powder.
[4]
[3]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3049
1-36
PROCESS UNIT
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Toner collection sheet /1: Every 200,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the belt cleaning unit. 2. After removing 3 screws [1], remove the toner collection sheet /2 [2] and then remove the toner collection sheet /1 [3]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be careful not to fold the PET sheet of the toner collection sheet /1, or damage it by hitting it on the edge.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3159
1-37
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.8
Replacing the toner collection sheet /1
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.9
Replacing the belt separation claw
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Belt separation claw: Every 600,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.") 2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the separation claw unit [2]. Note: Be careful not to touch and/or damage the transfer belt [3] with bare hands. When reinstalling the separation claw unit, be sure to apply setting powder to the semicircle [4] of the transfer belt [3].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[2] [1]
8050ma3050
3. Remove the screws [1], one each, and then remove 3 transfer belt separation claws [2]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] [2]
8050ma3051
1-38
PROCESS UNIT
A. Screw that must not be removed Note: The screws [1] shown in the drawing below are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not to remove them.
B. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Transfer belt: Every 200,000 copies C. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.") 2. Remove the belt cleaning unit. (See "4.6 Replacing the belt cleaning unit.") 3. Remove the separation claw unit. (See "4.9 Replacing the belt separation claw.") 4. Remove 2 tension springs [1].
[1]
8050ma3148
[1]
[1]
8050ma3053
1-39
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.10 Replacing the transfer belt
PROCESS UNIT 5. Stand up the transfer belt unit [1] by using the
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
front side of the transfer belt unit [1] as the bottom. 6. Remove the screw [2] and release the fixing of the handle [3]. 7. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the shaft stopper [5]. 8. Remove the screw [6] and then remove the tension plate /R [7].
[2]
[3] [6]
[7] [4]
[5]
Note: When reinstalling the tension plate /R, knock against the projection of the tension plate /R. 9. Remove 2 screws [8] and then remove the high voltage supply curler /R [9]. 10. Remove the stop ring [10] and then remove the bearing [11]. Note: When reinstalling the stop ring, be sure to raise the shaft so that the stop ring is set in the groove of the shaft. 11. Pull up the transfer belt [12] for removal. Note: Be sure to reinstall the transfer belt so that the rear side stamped with "UP SIDE" at the edge of the belt comes up. When holding the transfer belt by hand, hold it within 10mm from the upper end. Be careful not touch any part other than this. 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be careful not to touch and/or damage the transfer belt with bare hands. Before installing the belt cleaning unit, coat the entire surface on the side on the transfer belt, on which the belt cleaning unit is to be mounted, with the setting powder. 1-40
8050ma3152
[12]
[1]
[11]
[8]
[10]
[9]
8050ma3054
PROCESS UNIT
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C, /K: Every 200,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing the transfer belt.") 2. Place the transfer belt unit as shown in the illustration. 3. Remove the stop ring [1]. 4. After removing 1 bearing [2], slide the stopper /4 [3] to open the tip end of the transfer release arm [4]. 5. Remove the 1st transfer roller /K [6] while sliding it. 6. Remove 3 1st transfer rollers/Y, /M, /C [5].
[5]
[7]
[7]
[7] [4] [3] [3] [4]
Note: Be sure to reinstall the 1st transfer roller so that a shallow groove near the groove of the E-ring comes this side. 7. Remove the E-rings [7], 2 each, from each of the 1st transfer rollers. 8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[7] [6]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3055
1-41
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.11 Replacing the 1st transfer roller
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.12 Replacing the 2nd transfer roller /U

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle 2nd transfer roller /U: Every 200,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt. (See "4.10 Replacing the transfer belt.") 2. After raising the 2nd transfer roller /U [1] once, remove it diagonally from the lower side. Note: The fixing of the 2nd transfer roller /U was released when the transfer belt was removed at the time of the removal of the high voltage supply curler. Be sure to reinstall the 2nd transfer roller /U so that the shaft end with a dent comes to the bottom. 3. Remove 2 bearings [2] from the 2nd transfer roller /U [1]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
2
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3056
1-42
PROCESS UNIT
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Drum cartridge: Every 100,000 copies B. Procedure Note: The drum cartridges are provided for the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black, and they are all common. However, be sure to avoid reusing a drum cartridge that was once used for a color since it has been stuck with the toner of that color. 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.") 2. After raising once both ends [2] of the drum stay /U [1], hold them and remove the drum cartridge /Y [3]. 3. Remove the drum cartridge /M [4], drum cartridge /C [5] and the drum cartridge /K [6] in the same manner as in Step 2. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling each drum cartridge, be sure to check if both ends of the cartridge have been dropped into the grooves of the drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8]. (The drum installation blocks /F [7] and /R [8] are for yellow drum cartridges. Repeat the steps for other cartridges in the same manner.) When reinstalling the drum cartridge /K [6], be careful that the mylar [9] is not caught up. Be careful not touch and damage the photosensitive material of the drum with bare hands. When the drum cartridge is not used for a long period of time, be sure to store it in the dark place with a cover on it (to shield the light).
[2] [8] [7] [3] [1] [4]
[5] [6] [9]

8050ma3057
1-43
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.13 Replacing tridge
the
drum
car-
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum

A. Screw that must not be removed Note: Screws that are paint locked are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not to remove them at all costs.
[1]
[1]
8050ma3058
B. Procedure 1. Remove the drum cartridge. (See "4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge.") 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the drum stay /U [2].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3059
1-44
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. Remove the coupling shaft /A [1] and then remove the coupling /A [2]. 4. Remove 2 screws [3]. 5. Remove the position adjusting plate /R [8]. 6. Remove the stop ring [4] and then remove the screw idler gear [5]. 7. Remove 3 screws [6] (be careful not to remove black screw.). 8. Remove the position adjusting plate /F [7]. 9. Hold both ends of the drum [9] and raise it up for removal. Note: Be sure to reinstall the drum so that the coupling side of the drum flange comes to the rear side of the drum cartridge. 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
PROCESS UNIT
[6]
[9]
[7] [5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[8]
8050ma3060
1-45
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.15 Replacing unit
the
developing
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Developing unit: Every 600,000 copies
B. Procedure Note: Be careful not to fold the Teflon sheet posted at the developing sleeve side of the developing unit upper cover. When cleaning the developing unit, be sure to use Hydro-Wipe which is specified as a CE tool. Using paper or cloth other than HydroWipe will cause the developing regulation plate in the developing unit to be stuck with dust and lint of the paper or cloth, thus resulting in white streaks on the images. The developing units are provided for the four colors of yellow, magenta, cyan and black, and they are all common. However, be sure to avoid reusing a developing unit that was once used for a color since it has been stuck with the toner of that color. 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove 4 developing support legs [3] provided inside the toner supply unit [2]. Note: When placing the developing unit by itself, be sure to set the developing support legs to the body of the developing unit as a seat to prevent the toner bristles section from getting in touch with other sections. 3. Pull out the process unit. (See "4.4 Pulling out the process unit.")
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3062
1-46
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Remove the screws [1], 3 each, and then remove 2 developing pressing blocks [2] while sliding the upper side of the developing pressing blocks.
PROCESS UNIT
[2]
5. Remove the relay connectors [1], 1 each, and then remove 4 developing units [2] one at a time. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Place an appropriate color label supplied with the developing unit on the new unit. Note: Be careful not to open the developing unit cover.
8050ma3063
[1]
[2]
8050ma3064
1-47
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[1]
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.16 Replacing the developer

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Developer: Every 100,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the developing unit. (See "4.15 Replacing the developing unit.") 2. Put the developing unit [1] on end and rotate its upper end in drawing an arc to discharge developer. After discharging the developer, repeat Steps 3 and 4 below to discharge all of the developer.
8050ma3149
3. Install the rotating jig [1] provided inside the toner supply unit to the coupling [2] on the agitator screw side and turn it in the arrow-marked direction.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3150
1-48
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Install the rotating jig to the coupling [1] on the developing sleeve side and turn it in the arrowmarked direction. Note: If the jig is turned in the reverse direction, it sometimes occurs that the developer is not discharged completely. Be careful not to turn it in the reverse direction. 5. Charge a new developer. (See "7. 36 mode," "II . Adjustment" in Field Service.)
PROCESS UNIT
8050ma3151
1-49
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.17 Replacing the belt separation claw solenoid

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Developer: Every 1,500,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.") 2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the solenoid lever [2]. 3. Remove the relay connector [3]. 4. Remove the screw [4] and release the cable [6] from the cable clamp [5]. 5. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the SD1 (belt separation claw solenoid) [8]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When having reinstalled the solenoid bar, check to see if the shaft [9] of SD1 (belt separation claw solenoid) moves smoothly while sliding it.
[8]
[7]
[4]
[5] [6] [3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3069
1-50
PROCESS UNIT
A. Procedure 1. Remove the transfer belt unit. (See "4.5 Removing and reinstalling the transfer belt unit.") 2. Remove all of the drum cartridges. (See "4.13 Replacing the drum cartridge.") 3. Remove all of the developing units. (See "4.15 Replacing the developing unit.") 4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each. Note: When removing the process unit, be sure to remove in advance the transfer belt unit, drum cartridge and the developing unit. Be careful not to remove black screws. 5. Push back the process unit [6] until it becomes possible to see the screw [5] through each hole [4] of the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3]. 6. Remove the screws [5], 1 each. Note: Be careful not to remove black screws. 7. Pull out the process unit [6] again. Then remove it from the guide rails /L [2] and /R [3] as explained below: The projection [7] on the guide rail /L is set into the notch [8] of the process unit. The notch [10] of the process unit is placed on the projection [9] on the guide rail /R. Accordingly, slide the guide rail /L a little against the process unit to remove it from the guide rail /L, and then remove it from the guide rail /R by raising the process unit. 8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[8]
[6]
[4] [2] [5] [1]
[6]
[7]
[4] [1] [5] [3]
[10]
[9]
8050ma3070
1-51
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit
PROCESS UNIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.19 Removing and reinstalling the image correction unit

A. Procedure 1. Remove the process unit. (See "4.18 Removing and reinstalling the process unit.") 2. Remove a relay connector [1]. 3. Remove 2 screws and then remove the image correction unit [3]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When removing the image correction unit, be sure to remove in advance the process unit. When removing the image correction unit, be careful not to touch the drum drive shaft [4] of each color. Otherwise, this may cause stress to it.
[4] [2]
[3]
[1]
[4]
8050ma3071
1-52
TONER SUPPLY
5.1
Opening and closing toner supply section
the
A. Procedure 1. Open the front door [1]. 2. Loosen the screw [2] and open the toner supply section [3]. Note: With the toner supply section left open, be sure not to apply force to the toner supply sections such as the operation board. If applied, the hinge of the toner supply section may be deformed. When closing the toner supply section, tighten the screw with a hand before using a driver to prevent stripping the thread. 3. Remove once the door lock [2] provided on the inside of the toner supply section [1] and replace it at a new position where it becomes a stopper. 4. Close the front door following the steps for opening in reverse order. Note: When the toner supply section is opened, be sure to replace the door lock to a new position where it becomes a stopper and prevent it from getting in touch with the process unit when being pulled out.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3072
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3073
1-53
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. TONER SUPPLY
TONER SUPPLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5.2
Replacing the charging dust filter
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Charging dust filter: Every 600,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. Remove the charging dust filter [3] from the charging suction assembly [2] provided on the inside of the toner supply section [1]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3074
1-54
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
6.1
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit
A. Procedure Note: Since the composition of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 [1]. 2. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed unit cover [3].
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
8050ma3160
1-55
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 3. Remove the connector [1].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down shaft screw [3]. 5. After sliding the paper feed unit [4] to the rear side, lift it up. Remove the connector [5] and then remove the paper feed unit [4]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3161
1-56
A. Procedure Note: Since the composition of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1. 2. Remove the paper feed unit. 3. Remove 4 screws [1] and lift up the paper feed tray /1 [2] for removal. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3162
1-57
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.2
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed trays /1 to /3
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.3
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed rubber
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Paper feed roller: Every 2,500,000 copies (Every 800,000 copies in actual replacement count) Feed rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Every 125,000 copies in actual replacement count) B. Procedure Note: Since the composition of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1. 2. Remove the paper feed unit. 3. Remove 2 stop rings [1], slide 2 bearings [2] to the outside and then remove the paper feed roller assembly [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3163
1-58
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Remove a bearing [1]. 5. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the paper feed roller [3]. 6. Remove a stop ring [4] and then remove the feed roller [5]. 7. Remove the feed rubber [6] from the feed roller [5]. 8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to install the feed rubber [6] so that the paint mark [7] turns in the arrow-marked direction. Be sure to check that each roller is not stuck with grease.
[7]
[6] [5] [4] [1]
[3]
[2]
8050ma3164
1-59
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.4
Replacing the double feed prevention rubber
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Double feed prevention rubber: Every 400,000 copies (Every 125,000 copies in actual replacement count) B. Procedure Note: Since the composition of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1. 2. Remove the paper feed unit. 3. Remove the paper feed roller assembly. 4. Remove a stop ring [1] and then remove the double feed prevention roller [2]. 5. Remove the gear [3] from the double feed prevention roller [2]. 6. Remove the double feed prevention rubber [4] from the double feed prevention roller [2]. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to install the double feed prevention rubber [4] so that the paint mark [5] turns in the arrow-marked direction. Be sure to check that the double feed prevention roller is not stuck with grease.
[5]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
8050ma3165
1-60
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Paper feed clutches /1 to /3 (MC7, MC9, MC11): Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count) Pre-registration clutches /1 to /3 (MC8, MC10, MC13): Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count) B. Procedure Note: Since the composition of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1. 2. Remove the paper feed unit. 3. Remove 2 connectors [1]. 4. Remove a stop ring [2] and then remove the MC7 [3]. 5. Remove a stop ring [4] and then remove the MC8 [5]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the clutches, be sure to check that the stopper [6] of each clutch is in the specified position.
[6]
[3]
[2]
[1]
[5]
[4]
8050ma3166
1-61
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.5
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
6.6
Removing and reinstalling the tray up/down wire
Wire length: Up/down wire /A and up/down wire /C: 531mm Up/down wire /B and up/down wire /D: 160mm A. Removing the wire Note: Since the composition of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. 1. Pull out the paper feed tray /1. 2. Remove the paper feed unit. 3. Remove the paper feed tray /1. 4. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the wire cover /FR [2]. 5. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the wire cover /FL [4]. 6. Remove 3 screws [5] and then remove the wire cover /RR [6]. 7. Remove 2 screws [7] and then remove the wire cover /RL [8].
[7] [5]
[6]
[2]
[1] [3] [8] [4]

8050ma3167
1-62
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 8. Remove an E-ring [1]. 9. Slide the drive pulley [2] to the inside and remove the wires /C [3] and /D [4]. 10. After removing an E-ring [5], remove the pulley [6] and release the wires /C [3] and /D [4] from the wire restraining cover [7]. 11. Remove a screw [8] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /D [4]. 12. After removing an E-ring [9], remove the pulley [10] and release the wire /C [3] from the wire restraining cover [11]. 13. Remove a screw [12] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /C [3].
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 14. Remove an E-ring [13]. 15. Slide the drive pulley [14] to the inside and remove the wires /A [15] and /B [16]. 16. After removing an E-ring [17], remove the pulley [18] and release the wires /A [15] and /B [16] from the wire restraining cover [19]. 17. Remove a screw [20] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /B [16]. 18. After removing an E-ring [21], remove the pulley [22] and release the wire /A [15] from the wire restraining cover [23]. 19. Remove a screw [24] from the bottom of the paper feed tray /1 and then remove the wire /A [15].
[9]
[11] [10] [3]
[7] [6] [5] [8] [1] [3]
[4]
[12]
[2]
[23]
[22]
[19]
[18]
[17] [15] [20] [21] [16]
[15]
[24]
[14] [13]
8050ma3168
1-63
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 B. Attaching the wire
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. After winding the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10] around the pulley [11], insert it into the shaft [13] together with the wire restraining cover [12] and fasten it with an E-ring [14]. Note: Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley [11] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10] to the inside. 5. After sliding the drive pulley [15] to the outside with the wire /C [3] and the wire /D [10] inserted into the up/down drive shaft [14], fasten it with an E-ring [16].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note: Since the composition of the paper feed trays /1 to /3 is the same, the explanation here is made of the steps for the paper feed tray /1. 1. Install the wire /C [3] to the wire holding shaft [2] with a screw [1] from the bottom side of the paper feed tray. 2. After winding the wire /C [3] around the pulley [4], insert it into the shaft [6] together with the wire restraining cover [5] and fasten it with an Ering [7]. 3. Install the wire /D [10] to the wire holding shaft [9] with a screw [8] from the bottom side of the paper feed tray.
[7]
[5] [4]
[12] [11] [4] [13] [8] [9] [16]
[3]
[6]
[3]
[10]
[2]
[1]
[14] [15]
[17]
[18]
[17]
8050ma3169
1-64
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Note: Be sure to wind the wires around the pulley [14] so that the wire /C [3] comes to the outside and the wire /D [10] to the inside. 6. Install the wires /A [17] and /B [18] by following Steps 1 to 5. Note: After completion of attaching the wires, be sure to rotate the up/down drive shaft by hand to check to see if the up/down plate goes up and down smoothly. 7. For the subsequent steps, reinstall the parts following the removal steps in reverse.
1-65
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
BY-PASS TRAY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. BY-PASS TRAY
7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Paper feed roller: Every 800,000 copies in actual replacement count Feed roller: Every 125,000 copies in actual replacement count B. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU.") 2. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed solenoid cover [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Remove the stop ring [1]. 4. Remove the bearing [2] and then remove the paper feed roller unit [3].
[1]
8050ma3075
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3076
1-66
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. After removing the stop ring [1], pull out the feed shaft [2] and remove the paper feed gear assembly [3]. 6. Remove the paper feed roller [4] from the paper feed gear assembly [3].
BY-PASS TRAY
[4]
7. Remove the feed roller assembly [2] from the by-pass drive shaft [1]. 8. Remove the feed roller [3] from the feed roller assembly [2]. Note: Be sure to install the feed roller [3] so that the paint mark [4] turns in the direction shown in the drawling. 9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
8050ma3077
[4]
[3]
Note: Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1] so that the actuator section [2] coincides with the detection section of the PS47 (no paper sensor /BP) [3]. Be sure to install the paper feed roller unit [1] so that the tip end of the paper feed side of the paper up/down lever comes into contact with the inside of the top plate of the paper feed roller unit [1].
[2]
[1]
8050ma3078
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3079
1-67
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[3]
BY-PASS TRAY
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7.2
Replacing the double feed prevention roller
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Double feed prevention roller: Every 125,000 copies in actual replacement count B. Procedure 1. Remove the paper feed roller and the feed roller. (See "Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller.") 2. Remove 2 double feed pressure springs [1]. 3. After removing the stop ring [2], pull out the double feed prevention shaft [3] and remove the flange [4] and the double feed prevention roller assembly [5]. 4. Remove the double feed prevention roller [6] from the double feed prevention roller assembly [5]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to install the double feed prevention roller [6] so that the paint mark [7] turns in the direction shown in the drawing.
[7]
[1]
[1]
[3] [2] [4]
[6]
[5]
8050ma3080
1-68
BY-PASS TRAY
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6): Every 2,000,000 copies in actual replacement count B. Procedure 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU.") 3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit.") 4. Remove 4 screws [1]. (One of the screws is installed on the underside of the ADU cover/R [2].) 5. After pulling out the ADU cover /R [2] halfway, remove 2 relay connectors [3] and then remove the ADU cover /R [2]. 6. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the stand pulling lever [5]. 7. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the ADU cover /L [7].
[1]
[1] [2]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
8050ma3081
1-69
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7.3
Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP
BY-PASS TRAY 8. Remove a relay connector [1].
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) [3]. 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
[1]
Note: When reinstalling the paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) [1], be sure to set the stopper in the detente groove [2].
8050ma3082
[1]
[2]
8050ma3083
1-70
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
8.1
Removing and reinstalling the vertical conveyance
A. Procedure 1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the side cover / 4 [2]. 2. Loosen 2 screws [3] and remove the side cover / 5 [4].
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3170
1-71
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
8. VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE 3. Pull out the paper feed trays /1 [1], /2 [2] and /3
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]. 4. Loosen a screw [4]. 5. Remove 3 screws [5]. 6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the side cover /3 [7].
[5]
[6]
[7]
[1] [2] [3]
[4]
8050ma3171
7. Push up the hooks [1] in 2 positions at both sides, and separate the by-pass up/down cover [2] from the vertical conveyance section [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3172
1-72
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 8. Remove 7 screws [1]. 9. Pull out the vertical conveyance section [2], remove a connector [3] and then remove the vertical conveyance section [2]. 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
[1]
Note: When installing the vertical conveyance section, be sure to fasten it with screws with the vertical conveyance door closed.
[3] [2]
8050ma3173
1-73
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
VERTICAL CONVEYANCE
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
8.2
Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutch /1
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13): Every 2,000,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the vertical conveyance section. 2. Remove a connector [1]. 3. Remove an E-ring [2] and then remove the spacer [3] and the gear [4]. 4. Remove a stop ring [5] and then remove the MC13 [6]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the clutch, be sure to check that the stopper [7] of the MC13 is in the specified position.
[4]
[7]
[3]
[2] [1]
[6]
[5]
8050ma3174
1-74
FIXING
Caution: The fixing unit is very hot immediately after turning off the main switch (SW2). In order to avoid getting burnt, be sure to start operation after the temperature goes down sufficiently.
9.1
Screws that must not be removed

[1]
2 double nuts [1] are not allowed to be removed. Be careful not to remove them.
8050ma3153
1-75
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. FIXING
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.2
Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit
A. Procedure 1. Open the front door. 2. Pull out the ADU. 3. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing knob [2]. 4. Remove 2 screws [3] and then remove the fixing cover /F [4].
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3098
5. Open the reverse section [1] and remove a screw [1] and 3 connectors [3]. And then remove the fixing unit [4]. Note: When removing or reinstalling the fixing unit, slide it toward front and raise it while holding both ends [5] at front and rear. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[5]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3099
1-76
FIXING
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2): Every 2,500,000 copies Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3): Every 2,500,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing cover /R [2]. Note: Be careful not to touch the glass section of the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This may shorten the effective life of the heater lamp. Be careful not to damage the surface of the fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to contact and damage the inner surface of the fixing roller. When the installation is completed, check to see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to the fixing plate and the faston terminal is properly installed. 3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at the 3 places.
8050ma3100
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3154
1-77
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.3
Replacing the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2
FIXING 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit [2]. Note: The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder section securely into the screw hole.
[2] [1]
[1]
8050ma3101
5. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] at the front, and a clamp fixing screw [2], 2 faston terminals [3] and a screw [4] at the rear. And then remove the fixing plate [5] and pull out gently the fixing heater lamps /1 and /2 [6] from the fixing roller /U [7] for removal. Note: When removing the faston terminal, be sure to hold it at the connector. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so that the maker mark indication comes to the rear. When reinstalling the fixing heater lamps, please note that the lamp fitting holes on the fixing plate are different.
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3] [6]
[5]
[4]
8050ma3102
1-78
FIXING
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing lower lamp (L4): Every 2,500,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing cover /R [2]. Note: Be careful not to touch the glass section of the fixing heater lamp with bare hands. This may shorten the effective life of the heater lamp. Be careful not to damage the surface of the fixing heater lamp. Especially when removing or reinstalling it, care should be taken not to contact and damage the inner surface of the fixing roller. When the installation is completed, check to see if the fixing heater lamp is set securely to the fixing plate and the faston terminal is properly installed. 3. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at the 3 places.
8050ma3103
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3155
1-79
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.4
Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp
FIXING 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and open the fixing upper
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
unit [2]. Note: The screw [1] is a shoulder screw. When attaching it, be sure to set the shoulder section securely into the screw hole.
[2] [1]
[1]
8050ma3104
5. Remove the clamp fixing screw [1] and the connector [2] at the front.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3105
1-80
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Remove a clamp screw [1], a connector [2] and a screw [3] at the rear to remove the fixing plate [4]. And then pull out gently the fixing heater lamp [5] from the fixing roller /L [6] for removal. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to reinstall the fixing heater lamp so that the maker mark indication comes to the rear.
FIXING
[3]
[2]
[4]
8050ma3106
1-81
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[6]
[5]
[1]
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.5
Replacing the fixing roller /U, ball bearing /U and the heat insulating sleeve /U
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing roller /U: Every 100,000 copies Heat insulating sleeve /U: Every 600,000 copies Ball bearing /U: Every 600,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and remove the fixing unit upper cover. Note: When removing the fixing unit upper cover, raise it up without tilting it to avoid damage to the fixing roller /U. 3. Remove the fixing upper heater lamps /1 and /2.
8050ma3177
[1]
[2]
1-82
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Remove the fixing upper lamps /1 and /2. 5. Remove the rear side O-ring [3]. Remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the ball bearing [5] at the rear side, from the fixing roller /U [6]. Note: Be careful not to damage the surface of the fixing roller. 6. Remove the fixing roller /U [6]. 7. Remove the O-ring [1] and then remove the fixing gear [2]. 8. After removing the O-ring [3] of front side, remove the heat insulating sleeve /U [4] and the ball bearings /U [5] from the fixing roller /U [6]. 9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: After replacing the fixing roller, check whether the fixing temperature sensor /3 is contacting with the roller. When fixing temperature sensor /3 is soiled with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum cleaner and cleaning pad. When having replaced the fixing roller /U, be sure to make adjustments by referring to the 36 mode "Adjustment item list." Otherwise, poor images may result. Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripheries of the heat insulating sleeve with Maltemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it. When reinstalling them, be sure to take note of the directions of the ball bearing and the flange of the heat insulating sleeve. Reinstall them so that their upper surface turns to the inside as seen in the picture in which they are arranged after disassembly.
FIXING
[3] [4] [5] [6]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [1] [5] [4] [3]

8050ma3108
1-83
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.6
Replacing the fixing roller /L, ball bearing /L and the heat insulating sleeve /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing roller /L: Every 100,000 copies Heat insulating sleeve /L: Every 600,000 copies Ball bearing /L: Every 600,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove the fixing cover /R. 3. Open the fixing upper unit. (See 9.4 Replacing the fixing lower heater lamp. 4. Remove the fixing lower heater lamp. 5. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing entrance plate /L [2]. Note: Be careful not to damage the paper passage section of the entrance plate /L. Be careful not to damage the surface of the fixing rollers /U and /L with the entrance plate /L.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3109
[3]
[2]
6. After loosening the stopper screw [1] once, open the fixing paper exit guide [2] up to the turnout position and retighten it temporarily and then remove the fixing roller /L [3]. Note: Be careful not to damage the surface of the fixing roller.
[1]
[1]
8050ma3110
1-84
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7. Remove the ball bearings /L [1], 1 each at both sides, and the heat insulating sleeves /L [2], 1 each at both sides, from the fixing roller /L. 8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to apply the inner and outer peripheries of the heat insulating sleeve with Multemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) before reinstalling it. When reinstalling them, be sure to take note of the directions of the ball bearing and the flange of the heat insulating sleeve. After replacing the fixing roller/r, check whether the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in touch with the roller. When fixing temperature sensor /4 is soiled with paper dust, clean the sensor with drum cleaner and cleaning pad.
FIXING
[2] [1]
8050ma3111
1-85
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[3]
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.7
Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /1 and the thermostat /1
Caution: After installing the fixing temperature sensor /3, be sure to check that the sensor section is in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the temperature control may go abnormal or the fixing temperature sensor /3 may detect the low fixing temperature abnormality. Be sure to check that the wiring harness is not in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution: The thermostat /1 is an essential safety part. Be sure to follow the cautions and steps given below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution: After completion of the installation of the thermostat /1, be sure to check that the wiring harness is not in touch with the fixing upper roller. Be sure to fasten the thermostat /1 after positioning it properly with a positioning jig (4969-1885-01). Be sure to apply screws with screw lock paint. Also be sure to conduct this adjustment under the pressure-released condition and the temperature low condition of the fixing roller /U.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing temperature sensor /3: Every 2,500,000 copies
1-86
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing temperature sensor /3) 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the fixing upper cover [2].
FIXING
[1]
[2]
8050ma3112
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1] and the connector [2].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3113
4. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing temperature sensor /3 [2]. Note: When reinstalling it, check that the sensor section of the fixing temperature sensor is in touch with the fixing roller. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3114
1-87
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
fixing temperature sensor /1) 1. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the mounting board [2] of the fixing temperature sensor /1.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3115
2. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing temperature sensor /1 [2]. Note: Be careful not to change the position of the set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /1. Be careful not to damage the internal surface of the sensor. A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling it. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
8050ma3139
[1]
[2]
D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /1) 1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2] of the thermostat /1 and then remove the thermostat section.
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3116
1-88
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the thermostat /1 [3] from the thermostat mounting board [2].
FIXING
[3]
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat) 1. Fasten the thermostat /1 [2] with 2 screws [1].
8050ma3117
[2] [1]
8050ma3118
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board [2] with 2 screws [1]. 3. Connect 2 faston terminals [3] to the thermostat /1.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3119
1-89
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
[2]
FIXING 4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1885-01)
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
set between the thermostat /1 [1] and the fixing upper roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting board with 2 screws so that the mounting board becomes the same thickness as the positioning jig. Specification: a = 3.1 0.2mm
[1]
[2]
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with screw lock paint.
8050ma3120
[1]
8050ma3121
1-90
FIXING
Caution: After reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /4, be sure to check that the sensor section is in touch with the fixing roller. If not, the temperature control may go abnormal or the fixing temperature sensor /4 may detect the low fixing temperature abnormality. Be sure to check that the wiring harness is not in touch with the fixing roller.
Caution: The thermostat /L is an essential safety part. Be sure to follow the cautions and steps given below when removing and reinstalling.
Caution: After completion of the installation of the thermostat /L, be sure to check that the wiring harness is not in touch with the fixing lower roller. Be sure to fasten the thermostat /L after positioning it properly with a positioning jig (4969-1886-01). Be sure to apply screws with screw lock paint. And also be sure to conduct this adjustment under the pressure-released condition and the temperature low condition of the fixing roller /L.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing temperature sensor /4: Every 2,500,000 copies
1-91
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.8
Replacing the fixing temperature sensor /4, and removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /2 and the thermostat /L
FIXING B. Procedure (for replacing the fixing tempera-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ture sensor /4) 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing entrance plate /L [2]. Note: Be careful not to damage the paper passage section of the fixing admission plate /L [2].
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 2 clamp screws [1], connector [2] and a screw [3], and then remove the fixing temperature sensor /4 [4]. Note: When reinstalling it, be sure to check that the sensor section of the fixing temperature sensor /4 is in touch with the fixing roller. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
8050ma3122
[1]
[3]
[4]
[2]
C. Procedure (for removing and reinstalling the fixing temperature sensor /2) 1. Remove a clamp screw [1], connector [2] and 2 screws [3], and then remove the mounting board [4] of the fixing temperature sensor /2.
8050ma3123
[1]
[3]
[2]
8050ma3124
1-92
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2. Remove a screw [1] and then remove the fixing temperature sensor /2 [2]. Note: Be careful not to change the position of the set screw of the fixing temperature sensor /2. Be careful not to damage the internal surface of the sensor. A positioning jig is not used when reinstalling it. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. D. Procedure (for removing the thermostat /L) 1. Remove 2 faston terminals [1] and 2 screws [2] of the thermostat /L and then remove the thermostat section.
FIXING
[1]
[2]
8050ma3125
[1]
[2]
8050ma3126
1-93
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the ther-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
mostat /L [3] from the thermostat mounting board /L [2].
[1]
[3] [2]
8050ma3127
E. Procedure (for reinstalling the thermostat / L) 1. Fasten the thermostat /L [2] with 2 screws [1].
[1]
[2]
8050ma3128
2. Fasten the thermostat mounting board /L [2] with 2 screws [1]. 3. Connect 2 faston terminals [4] to the thermostat /L [3].
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3129
1-94
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. With a thermostat positioning jig (4969-1886-01) set between the thermostat /L [1] and the fixing lower roller [2], fasten the thermostat mounting board /L with 2 screws so that the mounting board becomes the same thickness as the positioning jig. Specification: a = 2.7 0.2mm
FIXING
a
[1] [2]
8050ma3130
5. Apply 2 screws [1] of the thermostat section with screw lock paint.
[1]
8050ma3131
1-95
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.9
Replacing the fixing drive gear
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing drive gear: Every 1,000,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove the connector [1] and a screw [2], and then remove the PS16 (fixing pressure release sensor) [3]. Note: Be careful not to damage the PS16 [3]. 3. Remove the E-ring [4] and then remove the actuator [5]. Note: Be sure to take note of the direction of the actuator when reinstalling it.
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
8050ma3132
4. Remove the connector [1] and take out the web motor wiring harness [3] from the clamps [2] at the 3 places.
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3155
1-96
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Remove 3 screws [1] and the connector [2], and then remove the fixing drive panel assembly [3].
FIXING
[1]
[3]
[1]
[2]
8050ma3133
6. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the fixing drive gear [2]. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When installing the fixing drive gear, apply Multemp FF-RM (or, Solvest 240) on it.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3134
1-97
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.10 Replacing the fixing cleaning unit

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Fixing cleaning unit: Every 200,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then the remove the fixing upper cover [2]. Note: When removing the fixing upper cover, raise it up without tilting it to avoid damage to the fixing roller /U.
[1]
[2]
8050ma3156
3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the fixing cleaning unit [2]. Note: Be sure to turn the web drive gear [3] to take up the slack of the cleaning web before reinstalling it to the fixing unit.
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3157
1-98
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 When reinstalling it to the fixing unit, be sure to press it against the paper exit side [2] horizontally while being careful that the paper entrance prevention plate [1] does not get in touch with the roller. This is because the paper entrance prevention plate may cause damage to the roller. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: After replacing the fixing cleaning unit, be sure to reset the count of the fixing cleaning unit in accordance with the 25 mode "Parts counter - Count of special parts." If not, a problem such as image smudge may arise because the web feed amount becomes less than the set value or the machine displays the message "The fixing cleaning unit is require to be replaced. Contact the service manager or the authorized distributor and is disabled to copy or print.
FIXING
8050ma3158
1-99
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
[1]
FIXING
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9.11 Replacing the fixing torque limiter

A. Periodically replaced part/cycle Fixing torque limiter: Every 600,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the fixing unit. 2. Place it gently on an even table with its paper feed side down. 3. Remove the E-ring [1].
[1]
4. Slide the shaft [1] to the rear side, and pull it out with the notch [2] of the shaft aligned with the panel.
8050ma3144
[2]
[1]
8050ma3145
1-100
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Remove the E-ring [1].
FIXING
[1]
6. Remove the gear [1] and the fixing torque limiter [2] and replace the fixing torque limiter with a new one. Note: The shaft [3] contains a pin [4]. Be careful that the pin does not get lost. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
8050ma3146
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050ma3147
1-101
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10. REGISTRATION/ADU/ REVERSE/PAPER EXIT

10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU
Note: In order to prevent the main body from falling down, the process unit and the ADU are provided with a safety mechanism so that they cannot be pulled out at the same time. If the process unit has been pulled out when pulling out the ADU, be sure to put the process unit back into the main body. A. Procedure 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. Release the lock and pull down the ADU release lever [1] counterclockwise and pull out the ADU [2]. 3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit.") 4. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP"). 5. Remove the paper feed solenoid cover. (See "7.1 Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller.")
[1]
[2]
8050ma3084
1-102
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Remove 2 relay connectors [1]. 7. Remove the screw [2] and then release the fixing of the ADU wiring harness assembly [3].
[2] [3]
8050ma3085
8. Remove 4 screws [1]. 9. Remove the screw [2]. 10. Push back the ADU [6] so that each of the screws [5] can be seen through the holes [4] in the guide rail /L [3], and then remove the screws [5] one at a time. Note: Be careful not to remove black screws. 11. Pull out the ADU [6] once again and move the guide pin [8] of the guide rail /R [7] into the turnout place of the oblong hole [9]. 12. Remove the ADU [6] from the guide rails /L [3] and /R [7]. Note: When removing the ADU [6], please note that this work requires two persons, with one person at the paper feed side and the other at the paper exit side. When removing the ADU [6], a person at the paper feed side must hold the ADU handle /R [10]. When removing the ADU [6], a person at the paper exit side must hold the handle provided at the center of the fixing positioning rail [11]. 13. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. 1-103
[1]
[9]
[7]
[10]
[8]
[6] [11]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[3]
8050ma3086
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.2 Replacing the cleaning sheet
registration
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Registration cleaning sheet: Every 600,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU.") 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the registration cleaning sheet [2]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
8050ma3087
1-104
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Separation discharging plate unit: Every 100,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Open the toner supply section. (See "5.1 Opening and closing the toner supply section.") 2. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU.") 3. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit.") 4. Remove 2 screws [1] and remove the transfer release cover.
[2]
[1]
5. Remove 2 separation fitting screws [2]. 6. Raise the separation discharging plate unit [2] once, remove a faston [3] and then remove the separation discharging plate unit [2]. Note: When removing the faston from the separation discharging plate unit, be sure to pull out straight the faston cover section. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the separation discharging plate unit, be sure to fasten in advance the separation fitting screw on the front side for positioning. 1-105
8050ma3176
[2]
[3]
[1]
8050ma3088
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.4 Replacing the transfer ground plate unit and the 2nd transfer roller /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Transfer ground plate unit: Every 1,000,000 copies 2nd transfer roller /L: Every 200,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the separation discharging plate unit [1]. (See "10.3 Replacing the separation discharging plate unit.") 2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the transfer ground plate unit [3]. 3. Remove 2 stop rings [5]. 4. Slide each of 2 bearings [6] to the outside and remove the 2nd transfer roller /L [4]. 5. Remove 2 bearings [6] from the 2nd transfer roller /L [4]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be careful not to touch with bare hands the 2nd transfer roller /L [4] on any sections other than the shaft section. When installing the 2nd transfer roller /L, install it with the dent on the roller shaft comes to the rear of the machine (instead of coming to the side contacting with the transfer earth plate).
[4]
[1] [6]
[6] [2] [3] [5]
[5]
8050ma3089
1-106
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Registration roller: Every 1,500,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the registration cleaning sheet. (See "10.2 Replacing the registration cleaning sheet.") 2. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP .") 3. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the gear cover [2]. 4. Remove a relay connector [3]. 5. Remove the stop rings [4], 1 each, and then remove the bearings [5], 1 each at front and rear. 6. Remove 2 screws [6] and then remove the registration unit [7]. Note: When removing the registration unit [7], open the conveyance guide plate /U [8] and slide the registration unit toward the rear of the ADU to pull out the shaft of the front side from the ADU panel, and then remove the registration unit.
[7]
[6]
[3] [6]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[5] [5] [4]
[4]
8050ma3090
1-107
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.5 Replacing roller
the
registration
REGISTRATION/ADU/REVERSE/PAPER EXIT 7. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the reg-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
istration gear [2] and the pin [3].
[6]
Note: When reinstalling the registration gear [2], be sure to attach the pin [3] without fail. 8. Remove 2 registration pressure springs [4]. 9. Remove 2 E-rings [5] and 2 bearings [6] and then remove the registration roller [7]. 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the registration unit, be careful not to damage the paper passage of the guide plate. Make sure to replace the registration pressure springs to the original position.
[5]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[6] [1] [2] [5] [4]

8050ma3091
1-108
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4): Every 2,000,000 copies Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5): Every 2,000,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the ADU cover /R. (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP .") 2. Remove a relay connector [1]. 3. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) [3]. 4. Remove a relay connector [4]. 5. Remove the stop ring [5] and then remove the intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) [6]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the MC4 and MC5, be sure to take note of the position of the stopper.
[5]
[6]
[2] [4] [1]
[3]
8050ma3092
1-109
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.6 Replacing the intermediate conveyance clutches /2 and /3
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.7 Replacing the ADU conveyance clutches /1 and /2

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1): Every 2,000,000 copies ADU pre-registration clutch (MC2): Every 2,000,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the ADU release lever and the ADU cover /L (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP"). 2. Remove a relay connector [1]. 3. Remove the stop ring [2] and then remove the ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) [3]. 4. Remove a relay connector [4]. 5. Remove the stop ring [5] and then remove the ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) [6]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the MC1 and MC2, be sure to take note of the position of the stopper.
[5]
[6]
[1]
[3] [4] [2]

8050ma3093
1-110
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3): Every 2,000,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the ADU cover /R, ADU release lever and the ADU cover /L. (See "7.3 Replacing the paper feed clutch /BP .") 2. Remove two relay connectors [1]. 3. Remove 3 screws [2] and then remove the ADU lock section [3].
[3]
[1]
[2]
4. Remove the stop ring [1] and then remove the ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) [2]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the ADU lock section, be sure to take note of the stopper position of the the MC3.
8050ma3094
[1]
[2]
8050ma3095
1-111
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.8 Replacing the ADU pre-registration clutch
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
10.9 Replacing the decurler roller

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Decurler roller: Every 100,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. (See "10.1 Removing and reinstalling the ADU.") 2. Remove the fixing unit. (See "9.2 Removing and reinstalling the fixing unit.") 3. Remove the paper exit drive belt /1 [1]. 4. Remove 3 screws [2] and the screw [3], and the remove the paper exit guide plate /4 assembly [4]. Note: The screw [2] and the screw [3] are different in length. Be sure to take note of the position of the screw [3] when reintalling the assembly.
[4] [2] [1]
[3]
[2]
8050ma3096
1-112
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the knob [2]. 6. Remove the paper exit mounting plate /F [3] and the paper exit open/close spring /F [4]. 7. Remove two screw [5] and then remove the bearing [6]. 8. Remove the E-ring [7] and then remove the paper exit drive pulley /1 [8] and the pin [9]. 9. Remove the E-ring [10] and then remove the paper exit drive gear /4 [11] and the pin [12]. 10. Remove the bearing [13], paper exit mounting plate /R [14], curler /1 [15] and the paper exit open/close spring /R [16]. 11. Slide the bearing [17] to the inside and remove the decurler [18]. 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the paper exit drive pulley /1 [8], be sure to take note of the direction of the belt guide. When the decurler roller is replaced, reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts." If not, the fixing jam may occur.
[15] [14] [11] [10] [8] [7]
[5] [6] [5]
[18]
[4]
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050ma3097
1-113
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[16] [13] [12]
[9]
[17]
OTHER
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Remove dummy connector. Connect the Key Counter Socket connector.
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11. OTHER
11.1 Installation of the Key Counter Socket (OPTION)
A. Procedure 1. Remove the Filter Cover. See 1.1 Replacing the dust filter /2. 2. Remove the Hinge cover and Scanner cover /R. See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main board unit. 3. Remove the Key Counter Cover from the Scanner cover /R.
.
4969D513aa
Scanner cover /R.
Note: When the Key Counter Socket is mounted, Set to the Software DIP Switches. *25mode: DipSW No.4 Bit.4 Key counter removal recovery. *25mode: DipSW No.9 Bit.3 - 0 Operation at the counter removal.
Key Counter Cover
4969D510aa
4. Remove two screws and the Cover.
4969D511aa
5. Use two screws, secure the Key Counter Socket.
4969D512aa
1-114
OTHER 5. To mount the memory unit successfully. a Insert the memory unit into the memory slot while being careful to ensure the direction is as shown in the picture. Fit the slot pins into the holes at both ends of the memory unit, and then push it down so that the claws at both ends of the slot secure the memory unit.
a
Note: Handling Precautions against static electricity. Keep the memory unit in an antistatic bag while transporting or storing. Discharge electricity from your body by touching somewhere metallic portion before handling, when working on the place where static electricity tend to generate such as on a carpet. Do not touch the gilded pins of memory unit directly with hands. Direct touch may cause malcontinuity. Do not give the mechanical shock to the memory unit by dropping or bending and so on. A. Procedure 1. Remove the Platen cover to Main Board unit. See 1.5 Removing and reinstalling the main board unit. 2. Pull it out toward you to remove it from the main body. Note: When pulling out the main board assembly, be careful that the memory board doesnt touch the stay. 3. If the HDD-7 is installed, remove it. 4. Memory unit into the memory slots (4 places) of the Image processing board.
b
4969D515aa
6. When demounting the memory unit. a b Release the claws at both ends of the slot. Raise the memory unit gently to remove it.
b a
4 places
4969D516aa
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Image processing board (IPB)
4969D514aa
1-115
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
11.2 Installation / Remove of the Memory Unit (OPTION)
OTHER
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
1-116
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
EXTERIOR
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 RADF hinge opening/closing angle adjustment
A. Replacing 70-degree and 40-degree fixtures 1. Untighten 4 screws [1] and remove 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2]. Fixtures are for 70 or 40-degree use and can be distinguished by the stamp on them. 2. Install 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively.
[1]
[2]
df3193001
1-117
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
AFR-20 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR B. Fixing the fixture at 90 degrees
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Note: When removing RADF or when opening RADF to remove the scanner components, the fixture should be fixed at an degree of 90. If not, the RADF installing metal plate may be deformed. 1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture at an angle of 90 by either one of the following methods. Two types of fixtures, 70 and 40-degree use, are installed. They can be distinguished by the mark on them. 70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: As shown in the drawing right, untighten 4 screws [1], slide down 2 adjusting fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [2] positively. 40-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: Untighten 4 screws [1], install 2 adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and lower positions and retighten 4 screws [2] positively. 2. After completion of required process, return them to the original positions.
[2]
[1]
[1]
[2]
df3193002
1-118
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
EXTERIOR
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit cover [2]. 2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the front cover [4]. 3. Install the removed components in the steps reverse to removal.
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[3]
df3193003
1-119
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.2
Removing and reinstalling the front cover
EXTERIOR
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.3
Removing and reinstalling the rear cover

[1] [3] [4] [3]
1. Open the paper feed cover [1] and paper exit cover [2]. 2. Untighten 2 screws [3] and remove the rear cover [4]. 3. Install the removed components in the steps reverse to removal.
[2]
df3193004
1-120
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
EXTERIOR
1. Open the paper feed cover [1]. 2. Pull up the paper feed tray [2]. 3. Unscrew 4 screws [3] and remove the registration roller cover [4]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
[4]
[1]
[2] [3]
df3193005
1-121
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.4
Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover
PAPER FEED
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. PAPER FEED
2.1 Cleaning the no paper sensor
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover.") 2. Clean the no paper sensor (PS304) [1] with a brush, etc.
[1]
df3193006
1-122
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
PAPER FEED
1. Open the paper feed cover [1]. 2. Push 2 claw locks [2] at both ends of the paper feed cover [1] to release and remove the paper feed guide [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
df3193007
1-123
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.2
PAPER FEED 3. Untighten 1 screw [1] and remove the shaft fix-
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing plate [2]. 4. Remove 2 snap rings [3]. 5. Pushing 2 bearings [4] inward, remove the paper feed unit [5]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
[3]
[4]
df3193008
1-124
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
PAPER FEED
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every 625,000 copies for actual durable count) Paper feed roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every 625,000 copies for actual durable count) B. Procedure 1. Remove the paper feed unit. (See "1.4 Removing and reinstalling the paper feed unit.")
df3193009
2. Remove 1 bearing [1]. 3. Remove 1 snap ring [2] and remove 1 pin [3]. 4. Remove the gear [4] and remove the belt [5]. 5. Remove the black snap ring [6] and remove 1 pin [7] (long pin) and gear [8]. 6. Remove the plastic arm [9] and remove 1 pin [10]. 7. Remove 1 snap ring [11] and remove the paper feed roller assembly [13] from the arm [12].
[1] [6]
[8]
[7]
[10]
[12] [11]
[5]
[3]
[4] [2] [9]
[13]
df3193010
1-125
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.3
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller
PAPER FEED 8. Remove 1 snap ring [1].
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
9. Remove 1 feed roller [2] and replace with new one. 10. Remove 1 snap ring [3] and remove 1 pin [4]. 11. Remove 2 paper feed rollers [5] and replace with new ones. 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be careful not to lose the paper feed roller and feed roller fixing pins.
[2]
[3]
[4] [1] [5]

df3193011
1-126
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
PAPER FEED
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Double feed prevention roller: Every 1,800,000 copies (every 625,000 copies for actual durable count) B. Procedure 1. Open the paper feed cover [1]. 2. Release the claw lock of the double feed prevention unit cover [2] and remove the cover.
[2]
[1]
[2]
df3193012
1-127
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.4
PAPER FEED 3. Holding both edges of the roller shaft, stand the
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
double feed prevention roller [1].
[1]
df3193013
4. Remove the double feed prevention unit [1] and replace with new one. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
df3193014
1-128
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
PAPER FEED
3.1
Cleaning roller
the
registration
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover.") 2. Moisten cloth with alcohol and wipe 3 registration rollers [1] with the cloth.
[1]
df3193015
1-129
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. PAPER FEED
PAPER FEED
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.2
Cleaning sensor
the
registration
1. Remove the registration roller cover. (See "1.4 Removing and reinstalling the registration roller cover.") 2. Clean PS301 (registration sensor) [1] with a blower brush, etc.
[1]
df3193016
1-130
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
PAPER FEED
Note: Be careful not to touch the belt roller or avoid damage or crease on it. If touching it by hand, hold at the area of 20mm from the edges in the width direction. 1. Fix the hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture at an angle of 90 degrees. 2. Open RADF [1] vertically. 3. Slide 2 stoppers [3] in the upper part of the conveyance belt [2] rightward and loosen. 4. Remove the drive interlocking belt [4] on the left lower inside of the conveyance belt [2]. 5. Remove the conveyance belt unit. Note: When reinstalling, fit the drive interlocking belt to the conveyance belt unit securely.
[3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
df3193017
1-131
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.3
Removing and reinstalling the conveyance belt
PAPER FEED 6. Remove 2 screws [1] and stand the roller.
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
7. Remove the conveyance belt. 8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
df3193018
1-132
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
4.1
Cleaning the paper exit roller/the paper exit sensor

[2] [1]
1. Open the paper exit cover [1]. 2. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 4 paper exit rollers [2] with the cloth. 3. Clean the paper exit sensor (PS306) [3] with a brush, etc.
[3]
df3193019
4.2
Cleaning the reverse roller

[2] [1]
1. Open the paper exit cover [1]. 2. Open the reverse guide [2].
df3193020
3. Moisten the cloth with alcohol and wipe 5 reverse rollers [1] with the cloth.
[1]
df3193021
1-133
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. REVERSE/PAPER EXIT
REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF
AFR-20 Ver.1.0 Sep. 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. REMOVING AND REINSTALLING RADF

Note: Before removing RADF, fix the RADF hinge opening/closing angle at 90 degrees. Fix the fixture also at 90 degrees when opening RADF and removing parts of the scanner section. If not, RADF installing metal plate may be deformed. 1. Remove the connector [1]. 2. Fix 2 hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixtures [2] at an angle of 90 degrees. Two types of fixtures, 70 and 40-degree use, are installed. They can be distinguished by the mark on them. 70-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], slide down 2 adjusting fixtures [2] and retighten 4 screws [3] positively. 40-degree hinge opening/closing angle adjusting fixture: Untighten 4 screws [3], install 2 adjusting fixtures [2] changing their upper and lower positions and retighten 4 screws [3] positively.
[2]
[3]
[1]
[3]
df3193023
3. Open RADF [1] vertically. 4. Remove 3 screws [2] and 2 fixtures [3]. 5. Raise and remove RADF [1]. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: After installing RADF, perform the 36-mode "RADF installing position adjustment".
[3]
[1]
[3]
[2]
[2]
df3193024
1-134
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
EXTERIOR
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Removing and reinstalling the front cover
1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Open the top cover [1], remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the right side cover [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
lt2113004
1-135
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
C-208 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
EXTERIOR 3. Open the front door [1] and remove 3 screws [2]
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
provided on the side inside the door. 4. Remove a screw [3] on the upper face. 5. Remove 2 screws [4] on the right side and then remove the front cover [5].
[2]
[3] [1]
[5]
[4]
lt2113005
1-136
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
EXTERIOR
1. Remove the right side cover. 2. Remove 4 screws [1] and then remove the clutch replacement cover [2].
[1]
[2]
[1]
3. Remove 12 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover [2]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
lt2113007
[2]
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
lt2113008
1-137
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.2
Removing and reinstalling the clutch replacement cover and the rear cover
EXTERIOR
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.3
Removing and reinstalling the paper feed pick-up cover
1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Open the top cover [1]. 3. Remove the spring [3] from the paper feed unit [2]. 4. Remove 4 screws [4]. 5. Pull out the paper feed pick-up cover /B [5] to the right side and remove it. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[3] [4]
lt2113009
1-138
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
PAPER FEED
2.1
Cleaning the paper removing brush
dust
1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B. 3. Close the top cover [1]. 4. Clean the paper dust removing brush [2] with the blower brush. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[1]
[2]
lt2113010
1-139
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. PAPER FEED
PAPER FEED
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.2
1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B. 3. Remove 2 stop rings [1]. 4. Slide 2 bearings [2] to the outside and remove the paper feed unit [3]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to fit the spring that connects the top cover to the paper supply unit without fail.
[2]
[3]
[2] [1]
[1]
lt2113011
1-140
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
PAPER FEED
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Paper feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every 500,000 copies in actual replacement count) Feed roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every 500,000 copies in actual replacement count) B. Procedure 1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover /B. 3. Remove the paper feed unit [1].
[1]
4. Remove the bearing [1]. 5. Remove 2 stop rings [2] and then remove the arm [3]. 6. Remove the holder plate [4]. 7. Remove a stop ring [5]. 8. Remove the feed roller [6] and replace it with a new one. 9. Remove the paper feed roller [7] and replace it with a new one. 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
lt2113012
[1] [2] [3] [5]
[7]
[4]
[6]
lt2113013
1-141
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.3
Replacing the paper feed roller and the feed roller
PAPER FEED
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.4
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Double feed prevention roller: Every 600,000 copies (Every 500,000 copies in actual replacement count) B. Procedure Note: Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower most position in advance by pressing the tray down switch (SW100) with electricity supplied. 1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Open the top cover [1]. 3. Remove 2 screws [2] and then remove the protective cover [3].
[1]
[3]
4. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the double feed prevention unit [2].
[2]
lt2113014
[2]
[1]
lt2113015
1-142
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Remove 2 stop rings [1]. 6. With the "D" cuts [2] of the shaft and the fixture attached together, remove the double feed prevention roller [3].
PAPER FEED
[1]
[3] [2]
[1]
7. Remove the double feed prevention roller rubber [2] from the shaft [1] and replace it with a new one. 8. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Be sure to install the double feed prevention roller rubber [2] so that the paint mark [3] turns in the arrow-marked direction. Be sure to check to see if the PET sheet for the drive gear cover is not damaged. Be sure to check that the double feed prevention roller is not smeared with grease.
lt2113016
[3]
[1]
[2]
lt2113017
1-143
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PAPER FEED
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.5
Replacing the paper feed clutch and the pre-registration clutch
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Paper feed clutch (MC101): Every 2,500,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in actural replacement count) Pre-registration clutch actural replacement count) B. Procedure 1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Open the top cover [1]. 3. Remove 4 screws [2] and then remove the clutch replacement cover [3]. (MC102): Every
2,500,000 copies (Every 2,000,000 copies in
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4. Remove 2 relay connectors [1]. 5. Remove 2 stop rings [2]. 6. Remove 2 clutches [3] and replace them with new ones. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling them, be sure to check that a stopper for each clutch is in its specified position.
lt2113018
[3]
[3] [2] [1]
[2]
[1]
lt2113019
1-144
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRAY UP/DOWN
3.1
Removing and reinstalling the rear drive
A. Removing the cover Note: Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower most position in advance by pressing the tray down switch (SW100) with electricity supplied. 1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Remove the right side cover and the front cover. 3. Remove the clutch replacement cover and the rear cover. B. Removing the paper feed drive 1. Remove 9 connectors [1] provided on the rear left side.
[1]
[1]
[1]
2. Remove the paper feed clutch (MC101) and the pre-registration clutch (MC102) [1]. See ("2.5 Replacing the paper feed clutch and the preregistration clutch"). 3. Remove an E-ring [2].
lt2113020
[2]
[1]
lt2113021
1-145
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. TRAY UP/DOWN
TRAY UP/DOWN 4. Remove 6 screws [1], remove then a bearing [2]
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
and the LCT drive unit [3]. 5. Remove 2 connectors [4] provided on the back of the LCT drive unit [3] and then remove the LCT drive unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[1]
[1]
[4]
lt2113022
C. Removing the up/down drive 1. Remove 6 connectors [1] provided on the lower back side.
[1]
[1]
lt2113023
1-146
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2. Remove an E-ring [1]. 3. Remove 5 screws [2]. 4. Remove 2 bearing [3] and then remove the guide plate [4].
TRAY UP/DOWN
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
lt2113024
5. Remove the gear [1]. Note: When reinstalling this gear, be sure to make the positioning adjustments of the remaining paper detection gear at this step. For positioning adjustments, see "D. Reinstalling the rear drive." 6. Remove an E-ring [2] and a pin [3] and then remove the gear [4]. 7. Remove an E-ring [1], and then remove a bearing [2], the gear [3] and a bearing [4]. 8. Remove an E-ring [5] and then remove the gear [6] and a pin [7].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
lt2113025
[3] [4] [1]
[7] [5]
[6]
[2]
lt2113026
1-147
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
TRAY UP/DOWN 9. Remove an E-ring [1] and then remove a bear-
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing [2].
[2]
10. Remove 6 screws [1] and then remove the up/ down motor unit [2].
[1]
lt2113027
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
lt2113028
1-148
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 D. Reinstalling the rear drive Note: Reinstall the rear drive following the removal steps in reverse, but be sure to make positioning adjustments of the remaining paper detection gear at "C. Removing the up/down drive." 1. Conduct in reverse the steps 10 to 6 of "C. Removing the up/down drive." 2. With the up/down plate at its lower most position, stop the actuator of the remaining paper detection gear [1] at the position where it detects the remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105) [2] and install the gear [3].
TRAY UP/DOWN
[2] [3]
[2]
[1]
3. Conduct in reverse the steps 1 of "C. Removing the up/down drive."
lt2113030
lt2113031
1-149
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.2
Removing and reinstalling the up/down wire
A. Wire length: Up/down wire /A: 1450mm (4 wires) Assist wire /C: 1240mm Assist wire /D: 820mm B. Removing the wire Note: Be sure to lower the up/down plate to its lower most position in advance by pressing the tray down switch (SW100) with electricity supplied. 1. Remove the LCT from the main body. 2. Remove the right side cover, front cover, clutch replacement cover, and the rear cover. 3. Remove the rear drive. 4. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate [2] up to its upper most position. Note: When the springs [3] and [4] are removed in the succeeding steps, the up/down plate [2] comes down. For this reason, be sure to support the up/down plate [2] by hands. (This work requires two persons.) 5. Remove the spring [3] and then remove the assist wire /C [5] from the guide pulleys [6] and [7]. 6. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /C [5] around the drive pulley [8], remove the E-ring [9] and then remove the drive pulley [8]. 7. Remove the assist wire /C [5] from the up/down drive shaft [1]. 8. Remove the spring [4] and then remove the assist wire /D [10] from the guide pulleys [11], [12] and [13]. 9. After releasing the winding of the assist wire /D [10] around the drive pulley [14], remove the Ering [15] and then remove the drive pulley [14]. 10. Remove the assist wire /D [10] from the up/ down drive shaft [1]. 11. Bring down the up/drive plate [2]. 1-150
[2]
[11] [4] [10]
[13]
[12] [6] [3] [7] [5] [1] [8]
[5] [1]
[10] [15] [14] [1]

lt2113032
[9]
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 12. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the up/down wire /A [2]. 13. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/ down drive shaft [4]. 14. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7]. Note: When removing the up/down wire /A [2] installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7], be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8] provided on the side of each pulley to move the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the location where the notch [8] can be avoided. 15. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/ down wire protective cover [11]. 16. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.
TRAY UP/DOWN
[10] [12]
[11] [2] [8] [2] [9]
[6] [7]
[5]
[4] [2] [9] [3] [3]
[2] [8]
[2] [4] [1]

lt2113034
1-151
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN 17. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
drive pulley [3] while releasing the winding of the up/down wire /A [2]. 18. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the up/ down drive shaft [4]. 19. Remove the up/down wire /A [2] from the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7]. Note: When removing the up/down wire /A [2] installed onto the guide pulleys [5], [6] and [7], be sure to pull out the wire from a notch [8] provided on the side of each pulley to move the wire cover [9] of each pulley to the location where the notch [8] can be avoided. 20. Remove a screw [10] and then remove the up/ down wire protective cover [11]. 21. Pull out the up/down wire /A [2] from the upper surface [12] of the LCT main body to remove it.
[8] [2] [6]
[9]
[10] [12]
[11] [2]
[2] [5]
[7] [4] [3] [3] [2] [8] [9] [1] [2] [4]
lt2113035
22. In the same manner as Steps 12 to 16, remove the up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side. 23. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, remove the up/down wire /A [2] on the rear side.
[1]
[2]
lt2113037
1-152
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 C. Reinstalling the wire 1. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1] provided on the upper surface of the LCT main body. 2. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order. Note: When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to insert the wire into the pulley through the notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley and then move the wire cover [7] of each pulley to the wire that has been already inserted. When moving the wire cover [7], move it first to the position where the notch [6] can be avoided and then move the wire in the notch [6] into each pulley. 3. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire installation hole [9] provided inside the up/down drive shaft [8]. Note: The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3 wire installation holes each on the front side and the rear side. In this step, the inner-most wire installation hole is used. 4. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down drive shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive pulley [10] comes to the position in which the up/ down wire /A [2] is put. 5. Fit the E-ring [12] and fasten the drive pulley [10].
TRAY UP/DOWN
[6] [2] [4]
[7] [1]
[2]
[5]
[2]
[3] [8] [10] [10] [12] [11] [2] [9] [8]

lt2113039
[2] [6]
[7]
1-153
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN 6. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the hole [1]
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
provided on the upper surface of the LCT main body. 7. Reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5] in this order. Note: When reinstalling the up/down wire /A [2] onto the guide pulleys [3], [4] and [5], be sure to insert the wire into the pulley through the notch [6] provided on the side of each pulley and then move the wire cover [7] of each pulley to the wire that has been already inserted. When moving the wire cover [7], move it first to the position where the notch [6] can be avoided and then move the wire in the notch [6] into each pulley. 8. Insert the up/down wire /A [2] into the wire installation hole [9] provided at the middle of the up/down drive shaft [8]. Note: The up/down drive shaft [8] is provided with 3 wire installation holes each on the front side and the rear side. In this step, the wire installation hole at the middle is to be used. Since the inner-most wire installation hole has been already used, however, only two wire installation holes can be confirmed for this steps. As a result, the one near to the drive pulley that has been already installed is the wire installation hole [9] at the middle. 9. Insert the drive pulley [10] into the up/down pulley shaft [8] so that the notch [11] of the drive pulley [10] comes to the position into which the up/down wire /A [2] is put. 10. Fit the E-ring [12] to fasten the drive pulley [10].
[2] [1] [4] [3]
[6] [2]
[7]
[5]
[8] [2] [7] [10] [2] [10] [11] [9]
[2] [6]
[12]
[8]
lt2113040
1-154
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 11. In the same manner as Steps 1 to 5, reinstall the up/down wire /A [1] on the rear side. 12. In the same manner as Steps 17 to 21, reinstall the up/down wire /A [2] on the rear side.
TRAY UP/DOWN
[2] [1]
lt2113041
13. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [1] clockwise as seen from the rear side to lift the up/down plate [2] up to its upper most position. Note: Be sure to wind up the up/down wire /A form inside to outside in each drive pulley. The up/down plate [2] comes down by its own weight if the installation of the assist wire /C [3] and the assist wire /D [4] have not been completed. For this reason, be sure to support the up/down plate [2] by hands until the installation of Step 23 is completed. (This work requires two persons.) 14. Insert the assist wire /C [3] into the wire installation hole [5] provided outside the up/down drive shaft [1].
[3] [4]
[9] [17]
[16] [17] [2] [4]
[14]
[15] [8] [9] [7] [7] [3] [1] [5] [10] [6]
[3] [1]
[4]
[13] [18]
Note: The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided with 3 wire installation holes each on the front side and the rear side. However, since the wire installation holes on the inside and at the middle have been already used, only the wire installation hole on the outside can be confirmed for this steps. 15. Insert the drive pulley [6] into the up/down drive shaft [1] so that the notch [7] of the drive pulley [6] comes to the position into which the assist wire /C [3] is put.
[1]
[11]
[12]
lt2113043
1-155
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN 16. Wind the assist wire /C [3] around the drive pul-
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ley [6] one turn counterclockwise as seen from the front side. Note: Be sure to wind the assist wire /C [3] from inside to outside in the drive pulley [6]. 17. Reinstall the assist wire /C [3] onto the guide pulleys [7] and [8] in this order and then fasten them with the springs [9]. Note: Be sure to take note of the direction of the spring [9] when reinstalling it. 18. Fit the E-ring [10] to fasten the drive pulley [6]. 19. Insert the assist wire /D [4] into the wire installation hole [11] provided outside the up/down drive shaft [1]. 20. Insert the drive pulley [12] into the up/down drive pulley [1] so that the notch [13] of the drive pulley [12] comes to the position into which the assist wire /D [4] is put. 21. Wind the assist wire /D [4] around the drive pulley [12] one turn clockwise as seen from the rear side. Note: Be sure to wind the assist wire /D [4] from inside to outside in the drive pulley [12]. 22. Reinstall the assist wire /D [4] onto the guide pulleys [14], [15] and [16] in this order and then fasten them with the spring [17]. Note: Be sure to take note of the direction of the spring [17] when reinstalling it. 23. Fit the E-ring [18] to fasten the drive pulley [12].
[3] [4]
[9] [17]
[16] [17] [2] [4]
[14]
[15] [8] [9] [7] [7] [3] [1] [5] [10]

Note:
[3] [1]
[4]
[13] [18]
[6]
[1]
[11]
[12]
lt2113046
The up/down drive shaft [1] is provided with 3 wire installation holes each on the front side and the rear side. However, since the wire installation holes on the inside and at the middle have been already used, only the wire installation hole on the outside can be confirmed for this steps.
1-156
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 24. Reinstall 4 up/down wire protective covers [2] with a screw [1] for each. 25. Rotate the up/down drive shaft [3] counterclockwise as seen from the rear side to bring down the up/down plate [4]. 26. Reinstall the rear drive. 27. Reinstall the rear cover, clutch replacement cover, front cover and the right side cover.
TRAY UP/DOWN
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
lt2113045
1-157
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TRAY UP/DOWN
C-208 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
1-158
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
1. EXTERIOR
1.1 Removing and reinstalling of the booklet tray (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure 1. Remove 2 screws [1], and then remove the booklet tray [2]. 2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
fs2153001
1-159
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.2
Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /1
A. Procedure 1. Remove 2 caps [1]. 2. Open the finisher door [2] and remove 5 screws [3]. And then remove the top cover /1 [4]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] [3] [4]
[2]
[3]
fs2153002
1.3
Note:
Removing and reinstalling of the top cover /2
When an optional PI has been installed, be sure to remove it. A. Procedure 1. Remove the top cover /1. 2. Open the finisher door [1]. 3. After removing 2 screws [2], pull out the sub-tray [3] and remove the top cover /2 [4]. 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
fs2153003
1-160
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Remove 3 screws [1] and then remove the side cover [2]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
fs2153004
1.5
Removing and reinstalling of the finisher door
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door [1]. 2. Remove 2 screws [3] from the lower hinge [2] and remove the finisher door [1]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3] [1]
[2]
fs2153005
1-161
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.4
Removing and reinstalling of the side cover
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.6
Removing and reinstalling of the rear cover
A. Procedure 1. Remove 6 screws [1], and then remove the rear cover [2]. 2. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
fs2153006
1-162
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Caution: After you have lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body from the power outlet.
A. Procedure 1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the main tray [2]. 2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body and unplug the power cord from the power outlet.
[1]
[2]
fs2153007
3. Remove 2 screws [1]. 4. With the main tray [2] raised up, unhook the up/ down stay [3] and remove the main tray [2]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
[3]
fs2153008
1-163
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.7
Removing and reinstalling of the main tray
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.8
Removing and reinstalling of the main paper exit opening cover
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts: Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine (PI) Top cover /2 Side cover Rear cover Main tray 2. Remove 4 screws [1], and then remove the main paper exit opening cover [2]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
fs2153009
1.9
Removing and reinstalling of the booklet paper exit opening cover (FN-9 only)
A. Procedure 1. Remove the booklet tray. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the booklet paper exit opening cover [2]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2] [1]
fs2153010
1-164
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
2.1
Replacing the paper roller /A (sponge roller)
exit
Caution: After you have lowered the main tray, be sure to unplug the power cord of the main body from the power outlet.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller): Every 250,000 copies. Note: When replacing the sponge rollers, all of the 5 pairs (10 components) must be replaced. B. Procedure 1. Push up the actuator [1] of the tray upper limit sensor (PS702) with your finger, and lower the main tray [2]. 2. Turn off the main switch (SW2) of the main body and unplug the power cord of the main body from the power outlet.
[1]
[2]
fs2153011
1-165
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. CONVEYANCE
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the sponge roller.
[1]
fs2153012
4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put together at their respective concave sections [1], install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by pressing it down until a click sound is heard. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
fs2153013
1-166
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller): Every 250,000 copies. Note: When replacing the intermediate conveyance rollers, all of the 2 pairs (4 components) must be replaced. B. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and a bearing [2], and then remove the intermediate conveyance roller [3].
[2] [1]
[3]
fs2153014
3. With a driver inserted into the groove of the sponge roller [1], prize it open to remove the sponge roller.
[1]
fs2153015
1-167
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2.2
Replacing the intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller)
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. With a new sponge roller and the shaft put
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
together at their respective concave sections [1], install the sponge roller securely to the shaft by pressing it down until a click sound is heard. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[1]
Note: When reinstalling, be sure to insert the pin at the rear of the intermediate conveyance roller securely into the receiving groove.
fs2153016
2.3
Removing and reinstalling of the paper exit opening unit
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts: Top cover /1, or an optional PI-installed machine (PI) Top cover /2 Side cover Rear cover Main tray Main paper exit opening cover 2. Remove a screw [3] of the paper exit open/close link [2] of the paper exit opening unit [1].
[2]
[1]
[3]
fs2153017
1-168
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. Remove 3 clamp screws [1], a ground screw [2], the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) connector [3] and the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) connector [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
4. Remove E-rings [1] and bearings [2], two each, provided at front and rear, and then remove the paper exit opening unit [3]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
fs2153018
[1]
[2]
[2] [3]
[1]
fs2153019
1-169
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3. MAIN TRAY
3.1 Replacing the tray up/down motor
Caution: When removing the tray up/down motor, be sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from falling.
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Tray up/down motor (M703): Every 2,500,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Remove the rear cover. 2. After removing a connector [1], remove 2 screws [3] while supporting the main tray [2] with your hand, and then remove the tray up/down motor (M703) [4]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
fs2153020
1-170
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
Caution: When removing the tray up/down motor, be sure to hold the main tray to prevent it from falling.
Note: The wire replacement steps shown below refer to those taken on the rear side. The shape and the winding of wire on the front side are symmetrically the same as those on the rear side. The wire brackets of the up/down wire is stamped with "F" for the front side and "R" for the rear side. When reinstalling, be careful not to mix up the front with the rear. A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts: Side cover Finisher door Rear cover Tray up/down motor (M703) Main tray 2. Remove 5 screws [1], and then remove the up/ down gear cover [2] and the gear [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs2153021
1-171
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
3.2
Removing and reinstalling of the up/down wire
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. After removing 2 screws [1], remove the wire
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
bracket [3] of the up/down wire [2] on the rear side from the up/down stay [4].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
fs2153022
4. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the belt tensioner [1].
[2]
[1]
fs2153023
5. Remove an E-ring [1], the gear [2] and the up/ down pulley /L [3], and then remove the up/down wire [4]. Note: When removing the up/down pulley /L, be careful not to drop the pins [5]. Otherwise, they may get lost.
[3]
[5]
[4] [1] [2]
fs2153024
1-172
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Fasten the wire bracket [1] tentatively to the up/ down stay [2] with 2 screws [3]. Note: Be sure to set the up/down wire [4] with the shorter section [5] up and the longer section [6] down.
[6] [4]
[2]
[1] [5] [3]
fs2153025
7. With a new up/down wire fastened to the wire end [2] of the up/down pulley /L [1], wind the wire a little less than 5 turns from inside toward outside around the pulley without getting loosened and set the up/down pulley /L [1] to the shaft so that it is in tune with the pin [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs2153026
8. After putting the up/down wire on the up/down pulley /U [1], wind it 2 turns from inside toward outside around the up/down pulley /L [2] without getting loosened and fasten it to the wire end [3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
fs2153027
1-173
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 9. Set the pin [1] and the gear [2] to the shaft and
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
fasten it with the E-ring [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
10. Using a tension gauge or spring balance, pull the belt tensioner [1] to the specified force "A" and tighten it with 2 screws [2]. Specified value: A = 2.5 0.25 kg
fs2153028
[2]
[1]
fs2153029
11. Loosen 2 screws [2] of the wire bracket [1] on the front side. Press down the up/down stay [3] to make it level, and tighten screws [5] of the wire bracket [4] on the rear side and screws (4 screws in all). Note: Be sure to check if the up/down stay [3] is level. If it is out of the level, an undesirable load may be imposed on the tray up/down motor (M703) or the gear, causing damage to it. 12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
[4]
[5]
[3]
fs2153030
1-174
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
4.1
Replacing the assist roller
stacking
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Stacking assist roller: Every 400,000 copies B. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Pull out the stacker unit. 3. Open the stacking assist section [1] and lift up the stacking assist roller [2]. 4. Remove the stop ring [3], and then remove the stacking assist roller [2]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[3]
[2]
[1]
fs2153031
4.2
Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit cover
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the stacker unit cover [2]. 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[2]
[1]
fs2153032
1-175
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4. STACKER
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
4.3
Removing and reinstalling of the stacker unit
Caution: We recommend that at least two people perform this service. Be careful when you detach the FNS from the main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts: Booklet tray Side cover Finisher door Rear cover 2. Detach the FNS from the main body. 3. Pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove 3 connectors [1] (CN1, CN2, CN3) from the relay board (RB) [2]. (For FS-115, two connectors (CN1, CN2) are provided.) 5. Remove each cable from the wiring harness guide.
[2]
[1]
fs2153033
1-176
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. After removing an E-ring [1] and the shaft [2], detach the connecting arm [3].
[2]
[3] [1]
7. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out the stacker unit [2]. Note: To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
fs2153034
[1]
[2] [1] [3]

fs2153035
1-177
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 8. Remove 2 screws [1] and raise the stacker unit
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] to remove the guide rail [3].
[3]
Caution: When removing the guide rail, be careful not to hurt your hip by taking an appropriate posture.
[4]
[5] [1]
9. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: When reinstalling the stacker unit [2] to the guide rail [3], be sure to check to see if the hook [4] is set securely into the fitting hole [5].
[2]
[3]
[5] [4] [1]
fs2153036
1-178
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
5.1
Removing and reinstalling of the stapler unit cover
Caution: Be careful when you detach the FNS from the main body. If you pull out the stacker unit, the FNS may fall. This may cause injury.
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Pull out the stacker unit [1].
[1]
3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [1] and pull out the stacker unit [2]. Note: To prevent the FNS from falling down, be sure to put a support [3] under the stacker unit.
fs2153037
[1]
[2] [3]
[1]
fs2153038
1-179
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5. STAPLER
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Remove 5 screws [1] and then remove the sta-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
pler unit cover [2]. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
fs2153039
5.2
Note:
Replacing the clincher
Do not use hands to move clincher units to horizontal direction. Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping may occur. After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to conduct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS stapler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.") A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Clincher: Every 200,000 staples B. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Pull out the stacker unit and remove the stapler unit cover. 3. Remove a ground screw [1], and then remove the ground [2] and the clamp [3]. 4. After removing 4 screws [4], remove the clincher /F [5] and then remove the connector [6].
[5]
[6] [1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
fs2153040
1-180
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Remove 4 screws [2] of the clincher /R [1] and the ground [3].
[2]
[3]
6. After removing 2 screws [1] and the ball bearing spring mounting bracket [2], rotate the clincher / R [3] to the position in which it can be easily taken out, and then remove the connector [4]. Note: Be careful not to lose the bearing spring [5] and the ball. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
fs2153041
[3]
[4] [5] [2] [1]

fs2153042
1-181
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
5.3
Replacing the stapler
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Stapler: Every 200,000 staples Note: Do not use hands to move stapler units to horizontal direction. Otherwise the belt and the gear teeth skipping may occur. After reinstalling the clincher, be sure to conduct the "vertical adjustment of the FNS stapler." (See "ADJUSTMENT.") B. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the cartridge from the stapler. 4. After removing 4 screws [2] of the stapler /F [1] and a ground screw [3], take out the stapler /F [1] and remove the connector [4].
[2] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
fs2153043
1-182
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. After removing 2 screws [3] of the sensor cover [2] of the stapler /F [1] and 3 clamps [4], remove a ground screw [5] and the connector [6]. Note: When reinstalling the sensor cover [2], be careful that the wiring harness does not interfere with the stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713) [7] or get caught by the gear.
[2]
[4]
[6] [3] [5]

6. After removing 4 screws [1], take out the stapler /R [2] and remove the connector [3]. Note: When taking out the stapler /R [2], be careful not to damage PS713 [4]. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[7]
fs2153044
[1] [2]
[1] [4] [3]

fs2153045
1-183
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
FN-9/FN120 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Blank page
1-184
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
PUNCH SECTION
1. PUNCH SECTION
Note: The following screws should not be removed. If you do, punching cannot be done as designed.
Punch unit
Screws that should not be removed
1.1
Replacing the Punch unit
A. Procedure 1. Remove cap on the top cover.
Punch scraps box
1-185
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PK-5 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
PUNCH SECTION 2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 punch drive board cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
ing one screw.
Screw
3. Disconnect two connectors (CN65, 68) and one relay connector (CN531) from the punch drive board (PKDB). Connector (CN65)
Relay connector (CN531)
Connector (CN68) Punch drive board (PKDB)
1-186
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Remove three screws to remove the punch unit cover.
PUNCH SECTION punch unit cover
Screws
5. Disconnect two connectors (CN158, 505). 6. Remove the punch unit from FNS by removing four screws. 7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse
6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Screws Punch unit Connector (CN505) Connector (CN158) Punch shift motor (M802) Punch shift HP PS (PS803)
1-187
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
PUNCH SECTION
PK-5 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
1.2
Cleaning the Punch Edges and Punch Scraps Full PS (PS802)
A. Procedure 1. Remove the punch unit. 2. Use a blower brush to remove paper dust and punch scraps from the punch edges and punch scraps full PS (PS802). 3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse Punch scraps full PS (PS802)
Punch edges
1-188
Cover Inserter D Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
External Section
1. External Section
1.1 Removing / Re-installing the External covers
Screws Cap
A. Procedure 1. Remove cap on the top cover. 2. Remove four screws to detach the top cover.
Top cover
3. Remove one screw to detach the connector cover. 4. Remove three screws to detach the lower cover.
Screws Lower cover
Screw
Connecting cover
1-189
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
External Section 5. Remove two screws, disconnect the relay con-
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
nector (CN232), and detach the operation panel cover. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Relay connector (CN232) Screw Screw
Operation panel cover
1-190
Paper feed unit
2.1
Replacing the Paper feed roller and Feed roller

Stop ring Bearing Stop ring
A. Procedure 1. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed roller for the upper tray, detach the top cover. 2. Remove the two stop rings, then shift the left and right bearings outside, and remove the feed roller unit.
Bearing
Paper feed roller unit
3. Remove actuator, three stop rings, three bearings of the feed roller unit, then slide the roller shaft in the direction of the allow to remove each roller.
Rubber Feed drive belt
Paint mark
Feed roller Stop ring
Bearing
Rubber Feed roller Stop rings
Bearing Actuator
1-191
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
2. Paper feed unit
Paper feed unit 4. When replacing the paper feed roller and feed Top cover
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
roller for the lower tray, open the upper tray and perform the steps 2 and 3. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Ensure that the mounting direction of each roller and rubber is correct.
Release lever
2.2
Replacing the Double feed prevent roller and Torque limiter
A. Procedure 1. When replacing the double feed prevent roller and the torque limiter for the upper tray, detach the top cover. 2. Detach the paper feed roller unit. 3. Release the hooks on both sides, remove the double feed prevention roller assembly by lifting up, then pull out the shaft, and remove the double-feed-prevention roller together with the feedreverse gear.
Double-feed prevention roller
Hooks
4. Separate the double feed prevention roller and the torque limiter from the double feed prevention roller assembly. 5. When replacing the double feed prevention roller and the torque limiter for the lower tray, open the upper unit and perform the steps 2 and 3. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse. Note: Ensure that the mounting direction of each roller and rubber is correct.
Notch Torque limiter Stop rings Double feed prevention roller
1-192
TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003
TRIMMER
Caution: Make sure the power cord of the copier is unplugged from the power outlet before disassembly or assembly. Trimming knives (upper and lower) are used in this machine. Be extremely careful in handling these knives to avoid injuries.
1. TRIMMER
1.1 Replacing the trimmer knife /U and trimmer knife /L
A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle Trimmer knife /U: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 500,000 copies for actual durable count) Trimmer knife /L: Every 4,000,000 copies (Every 500,000 copies for actual durable count) B. Procedure 1. Open the front door [1] and conveyance door [2]. 2. Untighten 4 fixing screws [3] and remove the top plate [4]. 3. Untighten 1 nylon clamp screw fixing the power cord and remove the power plug.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
tu1093001
1-193
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
TMG-3 DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
TRIMMER 4. Untighten 4 fixing screws [1] and 3 fixing screws
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[2] and remove the rear cover [3].
[2]
[1]
5. Untighten 3 fixing screws [1] and remove the roller cover [2]. 6. Disconnect 1 relay connector [3] and remove the wiring harness [5] from the cable clamp [4]. 7. Untighten 2 front and rear fixing screws [6] respectively and remove the entrance conveyance roller unit [7].
[3]
tu1093002
[2]
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
[6]
8. Remove 1 front and rear E-ring [1] and bearing [2] respectively and remove the trimmer entrance driven roller [3].
[1]
[7]
tu1093003
[3]
[1]
[2]
tu1093004
1-194
TMG-3 Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 9. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and remove the trimmer knife /U [3] holding the replacing handle [2] at 2 positions. Note: When removing the trimmer knife /U [3], be sure to hold the replacing handle [2]. Never touch the knife blade. Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /U or hit it against some object; its edge may be nicked.
TRIMMER
[2]
[3]
10. After pulling down the conveyance guide plate [1], insert a screw (M4 x 16 or more) or the like [2] into the stopper hole [3] to avoid the conveyance guide plate [1] from returning to the original position. Note: Do not remove 2 screws [4] and 1 screw [5] that should not be removed.
tu1093005
[5] [4]
[2]
[1] [3]
tu1093006
1-195
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
[1]
TRIMMER 11. Remove 4 hexagon socket head bolts [1] and
I DIS./ASSEMBLY
remove the trimmer knife /L [2] holding the front fixture [3] and inner corner [4]. Note: Never touch the blade of the trimmer knife /L [2]. Be careful not to drop the trimmer knife /L or hit it against some hard object; its edge may be nicked. When installing, align the bottom of the trimmer knife /L [2] with the hexagon socket head bolt [5] and insert into the guide pin [6].
[2]
[4]
[3] [6]
[1]
12. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[5]
tu1093007
1-196
HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION
II
1.1
ADJUSTMENT
Composition
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT SECTION

8. Is proper paper used for copy? 9. Are copy materials replaced with new ones at their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc.) 10. Is toner filled? B. Checkpoints when conducting on-site serA. Checking before starting work When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to check in advance the following: 1. Are the power source and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications? 2. Is the power source properly grounded? 3. Is any equipment that consumes repeatedly a lot of electricity connected to the same power source? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as elevator and air conditioner) 4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine? High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, ventilation, etc. Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed. 5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself? 6. Is density selected properly? 7. Is the original glass stained? vice Due attention should be paid to the following when repairing the machine. 1. In this machine, when the reset switch (SW1) is turned off, only one side of the AC line is shut off. So, be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Also, when operating the machine with the power supplied, be careful of the scan of the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear. 2. The fixing section may be very hot. Be careful not to get burnt when handling it. 3. The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near to the unit. 4. Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool. 5. Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
This part "Adjustment" describes items to be adjusted and their method of adjustment that are required by this machine and gives detailed explanations.
2. ADJUSTMENTS WHEN REPLACING PARTS

Adjustments and setting are required when there occurs a claim for poor image quality. However, these adjustments (including checking) and setting are also required when a part is replaced with a new one. [How to use the tables] Each item represents the following: 1. Mode Shows which mode is used for adjustments. "25": 25 mode "36": 36 mode "47": 47 mode 2-1 (Empty circle) : 2. A circle " " in the table , ................. : Shows that the order of priority has been specified for adjustments (including checking) and setting. Shows that adjustments (including checking) and setting can be independently. done
II ADJUSTMENT
LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

This table shows the list of adjustment items when replacing a part. Items are numbered in " " by the priority if there is any. Drum cartridge (drum) /Y, M, C, K 4 1 2 3
Replacement parts
II ADJUSTMENT
Adjustment items
PM count
PM counter resetting PM cycle set Count of special parts 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K Fixing cleaning unit Developer /Y, M, C, K Decurler roller 25
Parts counter
ISW Board change mode Blade setting mode LD bias adjustment Automatic gamma adjustment (0) Automatic developer charge L detection initial auto. adjustment Initial drum rotation Printer vertical mag. adjustment Printer horizontal mag. adjustment Belt line speed adjustment Fixing line speed adjustment Printer lead edge timing adj. Writing unit skew initial adj. Auto. color registration adj. Color registration manual adjustment Printer gamma offset adj. Printer gamma sensor adj. Printer screen gradation adj. Dot detect adjustment Color text adjustment
Process adjustment
Drum peculiarity adjustment
Magnification adjustment Image adjustment Timing adjustment Scanner gamma adjustment Printer gamma adjustment Image quality adjustment Sharpness adjustment Image judge adjustment
ACS adjustment Other adjustment FNS stapler position adjustment *1 After replacing the developer, be sure that you do not make any copies until you have first performed the L detection adjustment. *2 When replacing memory board (MB), be sure to replace the developer, 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K, and fixing cleaning unit. *3 When adjust the belt line speed adjustment, be sure to adjust the fixing line speed adjustment.
2-2
Mode 36
3 1 2 1 6
Developer *1 Transfer belt Belt cleaning blade
2*3 3
4 5 2 1 1st transfer roller /Y, M, C, K Image correction unit Charging corona /Y, M, C, K Fixing roller /U, L Fixing cleaning unit Decurler roller 5 6 1 7 Write unit /K Write unit /Y, M, C Dust-proof glass /Y, M, C, K 4 1 2 3 7 6 5 CCD unit Each scanner mirror Exposure lamp (L1) Original glass 1 2 Overall control board (OACB) 1 2 Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) 1 2 Operation board /1 (OB1) 1 Memory board (MB) *2 1 Registration roller RADF control board (DFCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler unit 1 2 3
4 2 7 2 3*3 3*3 4 4 1 5 6
When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the OACB being damaged, the memory board (MB) that was installed on the damaged OACB should be used on the new OACB. Contact the service section of the authorized distributor if it is considered that the MB is also damaged. Never perform the 47 mode - 92 (output).
2-3 3 1 2 6 5 4 1 4 3 2 1 4 3 2 2 3
II ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGE MENU
4. MODE CHANGE MENU

4.1 Setting method
From this screen, the following modes can be selected without turning off/on the power. "1 Basic screen" "2 36 mode" "3 25 mode"
II ADJUSTMENT
"4 Key operator mode" "5 47 mode" A. Procedure 1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main switch (SW2). 2. Press the P button and wait until "Enter 4-digit password to change mode" appears. 3. Input 9272 as the password and press the START button. (The password is fixed and cannot be changed.) "Mode changing menu screen" is displayed. 4. Press any desired key. 5. To return to the "Mode changing menu screen," press the P button and wait until the "Mode changing menu screen" appears. 6. After completion of adjustment, press the [Exit] key to return to the basic screen.
2-4
MODE CHANGE MENU
4.2
Display transition of 36 modes

High voltage adjustment mode menu
1 2 3 4 5 1st transfer manual adjustment 2nd transfer manual adjustment HV adjustment (Separation-AC) HV adjustment (Separation-DC) Pre-transfer guide HV check
36 mode 1/2
x : Factory exclusive use. Service is not used.
Drum peculiarity adjustment mode menu
1 2 3 4 5
High voltage adjustment Drum peculiarity adjustment Sensor output check Exclusive paper setting Recall standard data
Sensor output check mode menu 3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Process adjustment Image adjustment Image quality adjustment Running test mode Test pattern output mode Test pattern density setting Finisher adjustment List output mode 1 Surface potential sensor output 2 MAX. density sensor output 3 Gamma sensor output
Magnification adjustment mode menu

1 2 3 4 Printer drum clock adjustment Printer horizontal adjustment Scanner drum clock adjustment EDH drum clock adjustment
Timing adjustment mode menu Image adjustment mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 Magnification adjustment Timing adjustment EDH adjustment Centering adjustment Non-image area erase check Recall standerd data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Printer restart timing adjustment Printer resist loop adjustment Printer pre-resist adjustment Printer lead edge timing adjustment Scanner restart timing adjustment EDH restart timing adjustment EDH resist loop adjustment
EDH adjustment mode menu

1 EDH density adjustment 2 EDH original size adjustment 3 EDH Incline offset adjustment
Centering adjustment mode menu

1 Printer centring adjustment 2 Scanner centring adjustment 3 EDH centring adjustment
2-5
II ADJUSTMENT
Process adjustment mode menu
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Blade setting mode Automatic drum potential adjustment x Automatic gamma adjustment LD bias adjustment Automatic developer charge L detect initial automatic adjustment Initial drun rotation
MODE CHANGE MENU 36 mode 2/2
Printer gamma adjustment mode menu

1 Printer gamma offset adjustment 2 Printer gamma sensor adjustment 3 Printer screen gradation adjustment
Image quality adjustment mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Scanner gamma adjustment Printer gamma adjustment Sharpness adjustment Contrast adjustment Image judge adjustment ACS adjustment Density adjustment Tone adjustment Recall standard data
Image judge adjustment mode menu

1 Dot detect adjustment 2 Color text adjustment 3 Dot/Text area adjustment
II ADJUSTMENT
Density adjustment mode menu

1 AE adjustment 2 Copy density adjustment 3 Background adjustment
3-6 Modus / Adjustment mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Process adjustment Image adjustment Image quality adjustment Running test mode Test pattern output mode Test pattern density setting Finisher adjustment List output mode
Tone adjustment mode menu Running test mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 Intermittent copy mode Paperless running mode Paperless mode Paperless endless mode Running mode 1 Red adjustment 2 Green adjustment 3 Blue adjustment
Finisher adjustment mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment Fold stopper adjustment Cover sheet tray size adjustment Trimming stopper adjustment Punch adjustment Three Folding position adjustment 2 Positions staple pitch adjustm.
Punch adjustment mode menu

1 Punch vertical position adjustment 2 Punch horizontal position adjustment 3 Punch resist loop adjustment
List output mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Machine management list 1 Adjustment data list Page fill data list Machine management list 2 Parameter list Memory dump list Font pattern
2-6
MODE CHANGE MENU
4.3
Display transition of 25 modes

PM count mode menu
1 Count reset 2 Change setting
2-5 Modus /Memory setting mode

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Software SW setting Paper size setting PM count Data collection Parts counter Password setting Telephone number setting M/C serial number setting Indication of ROM version RD mode setting ISW Setting date input Board change mode
Collecting data mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Total count of each setting Copy count of each paper size Print count of each paper size RADF count Page fill of each section JAM date of time series JAM count Count of each copy mode SC count
10 JAM count of each section 11 SC count of each section
Copy count mode menu

1 Count of special parts 2 Count of each parts
Password setting mode menu

1 Key operator password 2 E.K.C. master key cord 3 Weekly timer password *1
M/C serial number setting menu

1 2 3 4 Main body Option tray RADF Finisher
*1 Name of system E.K.C : Except USA area E.C.M : USA area only
2-7
II ADJUSTMENT
MODE CHANGE MENU
4.4
Display transition of Key Operation modes
Key Operation mode
System initial setting menu

1 2 3 4 Date & Time setting Language select setting IP address setting / Tandem E-mail transmission setting
Key operator mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 System initial setting Copier initial setting User setting mode E.K.C function setting *1 Lock / delete program memory Paper type / Special size set Panel contrast / Key sound adj. Key operator data setting Weekly timer Control panel adjustment Tray auto select setting Power save setting Memory switch setting Machine management list print * Not use Minolta! Finisher adjustment Front & Back Density setting Scanner transmission setting Non-image area erase setting AES adjustment Execute adjust operation Magnification adjustment Timing adjustment Centring adjustment Printer gamma sensor adj.
Weekly timer setting menu

1 2 3 4 5 Weekly timer ON/OFF setting Timer setting Timer action ON/OFF setting Lunch hour off setting Timer interrupt password set
II ADJUSTMENT
> Next page Management list print mode menu

1 2 3 4 Job memory list User management list E.K.C. management list Font pattern list
Finisher adjustment mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Stitch & Fold stopper adjustment Fold stopper adjustment Trim stopper adjustment Punch adjustment Z-Fold position adjustment 2-Positions staple pitch adjustment Finisher output limit
Magnification mode menu

1 Printer vertical mag. adj. 2 Printer horizontal mag. adj. 3 Scanner vertical mag. adj.
Centring adjustment mode menu

1 Printer centring adjustment 2 Scanner centring adjustment 3 RADF centring adjustment
Timing adjustment mode menu

1 2 3 4 5 6 Printer lead edge timing adj. Printer registration loop adj. Printer pre-registration adj. Printer erasure amount adj. Scanner re-start timing adj. RADF registration loop adj.
2-8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Key Operation mode No.13 Memory Switch Setting
MODE CHANGE MENU
No15 - Memory switch menu

1 Auto reset timer 2 Auto reset key function 3 RADF-Original effect 4 Job memory auto recall -305 Finisher mode by Full-Auto 6 Initial by Key Counter insert 7 Erasure outside area of original 8 RADF frame erasure selection 9 Automatic tray switching 10 Platen APS 11 RADF APS 12 Platen AMS 13 RADF AMS 14 Select tray when APS cancel 15 Platen original size detect 16 RADF original size detect 17 Platen original size detect (SMALL) 18 Rotation 19 Staple mode reset function 20 Job offset operating 21 Continuation print 22 Key click sound 23 1 Shot indication time 24 Power save screen 25 Start Key latch function 26 Stop Key function 27 Auto select of booklet copy 28 E.K.C. Password *1 29 Arrow key change [Image shift] 30 An interruption suspended way
31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49
E.K.C. password input timing *1 Sound (No paper, toner/ JAM) Reserve copy function Change page no. Pos. (booklet) Trimmer (STD./ Non STD size) Timer which prohibits print Bookmark function Delete of overlay image Orig. direction/ Binding mode Screen (Line Screen) Screen (Dot Screen) Side 2 drum clock adjust mode Screen (Full Colour-Text/ Photo) Screen (Full Colour-Photo) Screen (Monochrome-Text/ Photo) Screen (Monochrome-Photo) Screen (Mono Colour-Text/ Photo) Screen (Mono Colour-Photo) Colour gamut
2-9
II ADJUSTMENT
CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION
5.CHECKING BY THE P FUNCTION

The P function is a function that allows you to confirm the following various numeric values by using the P button. [1] Total counter [2] Full color counter [3] Mono color counter
II ADJUSTMENT
[4] Monochrome counter [5] Copier counter [6] Printer counter
5.1
Checking method of the P function
A. Procedure 1. Turn ON the reset switch (SW1) and the main switch (SW2). 2. Press the P button. 3. "Counter list screen" appears. 4. Press the ! button in "Counter list screen," and the PM counter is displayed. 5. To output the counter value list, press the [Counter list output] key. 6. Pressing the [Exit] key, or the stop or clear button returns to the basic screen.
2-10
25 MODE
6. 25 MODE
6.1 List of adjustment items for 25 mode
Adjustment item menu 1. Software SW setting 2. Paper size setting 3. PM count 4. Data collection 1. Count reset 2. Change setting 1. Total count of each paper setting 2. Copy count of each paper size 3. Print count of each paper size 4. RADF count 5. Page fill of each section 6. JAM data of time series 7. JAM count 8. Count of each copy mode 9. SC count 10. JAM count of each section 11. SC count of each section 5.Parts counter 6. Password setting 1. Count of special parts 2. Count of each parts 1. Key operator password 2. E.K.C. master key code 3. Weekly timer password 7.Telephone number setting 8. M/C serial number setting 1. Service centre Telephone number 2. Service centre FAX number 1. Main body 2. Option tray 3. RADF 4. Finisher 9. Indication of ROM version 10. RD mode setting 11. ISW 12. Setting date input 13. Board change mode 4 digits 8 digits 4 digits 16 digits 16 digits Remarks See the "List of software DIPSW". LCT paper size setting
2-11
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.2
Setting method
6.3
Setting software DIPSW
This machine is provided with the 25 mode as an adjustment method. This mode is used when the memory board (MB) is rewritten or various settings are made.
A. Setting method The software DIPSW is set on "Software SW setting screen." Note:
A. Procedure 1. Turn OFF the main switch (SW2) with the reset
Please note that DIPSW bits are written into the memory board (MB) each time a change is made. B. Meaning of the values displayed on the
II ADJUSTMENT
switch (SW1) left ON. 2. While pressing the numeric keys 2 and 5 at the same time, turn on the SW2. the "25 mode menu screen" appears. At this point, the machine enters the 25 mode with normal copy operations unavailable. 3. Press the item keys on the liquid crystal display (LCD). A setting screen corresponding to each item appears. screen
[1]
4. Confirm the input data on the setting screen of each item. 5. Turn off the SW2 to release the 25 mode. 6. New data will be effective after restarting. [1] [2] [3] [4]
[2]
[3]
[4]
8050fs1026e
DIPSW number Bit number (0 to 7) Bit data : 1:ON, 0:OFF 8-bit switch values in indicated in hexadecimals from 00 to FF.
C. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Software SW setting] key. 3. "Software SW setting screen" Select a DIPSW number by using the arrow key on the left. 4. Select a bit number of the DIPSW by using the arrow key on the right. 5. Select the ON (1) or OFF (0) of the DIPSW by using the [ON] or [OFF] key. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "25 mode menu screen". For each function of the DIPSW, see "List of software DIPSW."
2-12
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 List of software DIPSW Note: Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function. DIPSW No. DIPSW1 0 1 2 Print stop method after toner supply or waste toner full display 3 *1 *1 *1 *1 Prohibited *2 *2 *2 Connected *3 *3 *4 *4 Latched Requested Enabled Enabled Disabled Disabled Count as 2 Bit Functions 0 1
25 MODE
Default values Japan Inch Metric 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
4 Prohibition of printing when the PM Not prohibited count is reached 5 Print number setting until printing is 6 prohibited after PM is displayed 7 DIPSW2 0 Hard disk connection 1 2 3 4 Control of the LT paper feed assist fan 5 6 Switchover of the rotational speed 7 of the polygon motor DIPSW3 0 1 SC latch (SC34/35/36) 2 Password request for 25, 36, 47 mode (password: 9272) 3 4 5 6 47 mode 15-01, 02 counter clear 7 DIPSW4 0 1 2 3 4 Recovery from removal of the key counter 5 APS when change magnification 6 Change of fixed magnifications setting in key operator mode 7 Large size paper counting method (Other than PM counter) *2 *2 *2 Disconnected *3 *3 *4 *4 Unlatched Not requested Disabled Disabled Enabled Enabled Count as 1
2-13
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE DIPSW No. DIPSW5 0 1 2 3 Bit Functions 0
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 1 A3, 11 x 17 or larger Count as 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Default values Japan Inch Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
4 5 Change of the size of the large size B4, 8.5 x 14 or paper larger
II ADJUSTMENT
6 DIPSW6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DIPSW7 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 DIPSW8 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Large size paper PM counting method 7 DIPSW9
Count as 1
0 Operation when the key counter is Same as Immediate stop removed (copier) the stop button jam 1 Operation when the key counter is removed (IP) 2 Message switchover 3 4 Copy quantity limit selection 5 6 7 Ignored *5 *5 *6 *6 *6 *6 Same as DIPSW9-0 *5 *5 *6 *6 *6 *6
2-14
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 DIPSW No. DIPSW10 0 Page memory reservation at power No reservation 94MB (177MB on when Expansion memory is installed) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW11 0 1 2 3 4 Filter for jagged edges on slanting lines 5 6 DIPSW12 7 Jam code display 0 1 Adjustment of the image quality in the key operator mode 2 3 4 5 6 Black text screen with overlay function 7 DIPSW13 0 Size detection switchover 1 1 Size detection switchover 2 2 Size detection switchover 3 3 Size detection switchover 4 4 5 F4 size setting 6 7 Disabled Disabled Disabled *7 Screen A5, A4R A6R 8.5 x 14 *8 *8 *9 *9 Enabled Enabled Enabled *7 Nonscreen 5.5 x 8.5, 8.5x11R Post card F4 *8 *8 *9 *9 Bit Functions 0 1
25 MODE Default values Japan Inch Metric 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
2-15
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE DIPSW No. DIPSW14 Bit Functions 0
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 1 Default values Japan Inch Metric 0 Size detection switchover 5 (main B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR body) 8.5 x 11 / B5R 1 2 3 Size detection switchover 5 (bypass) 4 Size detection switchover 5 (platen) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11/B5R
II ADJUSTMENT
5 Size detection switchover 5 (ADF) B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K/16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R 6 Size detection switchover 5 (PI) 7 0 Selection of the RD mode type 1 2 3 FNS alarm stop method 4 5 RD mode connection 6 DIPSW16 7 0 1 Recognizing the copy reservation function/coin vendor B4, 11 x 17 / B5, 8K / 16K / 16KR 8.5 x 11 / B5R DIPSW15 Telephone line *10 *10 Disconnected E-mail *10 *10 Connected
Copy reservation Copy reservation function enabled function prohibited Coin vendor disabled Coin vendor enabled Parallel Serial communication communication Not counted Displayed IP NIC *11 *11 *11 *11 *12 *12 *12 Counted Not displayed Copier NIC *11 *11 *11 *11 *12 *12 *12
2 Coin vendor type 3 Counting of the key counter in the printer mode (IP) 4 Display of the total count start date (P function) 5 6 7 NIC selection for E-Mail RD-mode DIPSW17 0 Summer time setting 1 2 3 4 Density selection at scanning the tabed paper 5 6 7
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
2-16
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 DIPSW No. DIPSW18 0 Tray 1 faulty part isolation 1 Tray 2 faulty part isolation 2 Tray 3 faulty part isolation 3 Tray 4 (LCT) faulty part isolation 4 5 Folding, stitch & folding, tri-fold, trimmer faulty part isolation 6 PI faulty part isolation 7 HDD faulty part isolation DIPSW19 0 1 Fixing temperature selection 2 3 4 5 PK faulty part isolation 6 Default resolution of the IP scanner 7 DIPSW20 0 Group stapling mode 1 Image scanning area with shift function 2 Selection of the stamped page number 3 Keyboard layout 4 5 6 7 DIPSW21 0 1 LCT size setting in the key operator mode 2 Display of the original count 3 4 5 6 Selection of the index paper with APS 7 Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal Normal *13 *13 *13 Normal *14 *14 Disabled *15 Normal Based on original ABC layout Disabled Displayed Disabled Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable Unavailable *13 *13 *13 Unavailable *14 *14 Enabled * 15 Original priority Based on transfer paper QWERTY layout Enabled Not displayed Enabled 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Functions 0 1
25 MODE Default values Japan Inch Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
2-17
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE DIPSW No. DIPSW22 0 IP address setting 1 Number of punch holes 2 3 Image reference position for the non-standard size original 4 Function of the power save button 5 6 Operation when FNS runs out of staple Disabled *16 *16 selection Enabled Bit Functions 0
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 1 Enabled *16 *16 ADF Disabled Default values Japan Inch Metric 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0
Based on user Based on APS at
II ADJUSTMENT
Staple supply Selecting between staple request supply or staple release
7 DIPSW23 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0 0 0
1 Output when EKC (ECM) user ID is Enabled Disabled (regisunmatched (IP) (counted as the tered in JOB list) other user) 2 Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) 3 Control of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) 4 Main scan correction of the color registration automatic correction (periodic correction) 5 IP gamma correction 6 Job memory registration of the special paper setting on the bypass tray 7 DIPSW24 0 1 Vs/Vp switch control 2 Image stabilization control timing 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW25 0 1 2 3 Color registration correction control 4 5 Color registration fine correction 6 7 De-humid heater *17 Normal *17 Fine
*18 Enabled
*18 Disabled
*19 Enabled
*19 Disabled
*20 Enabled Disabled
*20 Disabled Enabled
0 0
0 0
0 0
*21 Disabled *22 *22 *23 *23 Yes ON
*21 Enabled *22 *22 *23 *23 No OFF
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
2-18
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 DIPSW No. DIPSW26 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW27 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DIPSW28 0 1 2 Toner refresh mode (at job end) 3 Toner refresh mode (periodical) 4 Printer gamma offset adjustment 5 PK punch mode restriction 6 7 Toner refresh mode switchover (Key operator mode) DIPSW29 0 1 2 3 Include of proof copy to the set copy quantity 4 5 6 7 DIPSW30 0 1 Restriction of the display of the 25 mode data correction 2 3 4 5 6 7 *24 Disabled *24 Disabled *25 Only high light Enabled *26 Y,M,C,K Not included Restricted *24 Enabled *24 Enabled *25 Whole area Disabled *26 M,C Included Not restricted Bit Functions 0 1
25 MODE Default values Japan Inch Metric 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
2-19
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE DIPSW No. DIPSW31 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Bit Functions 0
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 1 Default values Japan Inch Metric 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
II ADJUSTMENT
*1
Print stop method after toner supply or waste toner full display 1-3 0 0 1 1 1-2 0 1 0 1
*4
Switchover of the rotational speed of the polygon motor Mode 2-7 0 0 1 1 2-6 0 1 0 1
Mode Stops after ejecting paper in the machine Stops at a break between copy set Stops at the end of the current job Does not stop
1/1 speed 1/1 speed 2/3 speed 1/2 speed
Message switchover Mode 9-3 0 0 1 1 9-2 0 1 0 1
*2
Print number setting until printing is prohibited after PM is displayed Mode 1-7 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1-6 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1-5 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
Please insert key counter Please insert copy card Please insert coin Please insert key counter
1,000 prints 2,000 prints 3,000 prints 4,000 prints 5,000 prints 1,000 prints 1,000 prints 1,000 prints
*6
Copy quantity limit selection Mode 9-7 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9-6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 9-5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 9-4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
No limit 1 sheet 3 sheets 5 sheets 9 sheets 10 sheets 20 sheets 30 sheets 50 sheets 99 sheets No limit No limit No limit No limit No limit
*3
Control of the LT paper feed assist fan 2-5 0 0 1 1 2-4 0 1 0 1
Mode ON for coated paper only ON for all types of paper ON for all types of paper OFF at all times
2-20
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 *7 Black text screen with overlay function When using the overlay of the applied function, the image creation method of black characters is switched between the error diffusion and the screen. Mode Screen Error diffusion 12-6 0 1 *11 Summer time setting Mode 0 minute 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes 60 minutes *8 Size detection switchover 4 Mode A5R B6R 5.5 x 8.5R 13-4 0 0 1 1 13-3 0 1 0 1 70 minutes 80 minutes 90 minutes 100 minutes 110 minutes 120 minutes 130 minutes 140 minutes *9 F4 size setting Mode 8 x 13 8.25 x 13 8.125 x 13.25 8.5 x 13 13-6 0 0 1 1 13-5 0 1 0 1 80 40 (most lighter) *10 FNS alarm stop method This setting is used to determine when to stop if a FNS full alarm is detected. Functions detected are; Lower limit of the FNS tray, the number of the FNS trays, FNS booklet tray, PK punch scraps, TU scraps and TU stacker Mode Stops immediately after detection Stops at a break between copy set after detection Does not stop while in printing Does not stop while in printing 15-4 0 0 1 1 15-3 0 1 0 1 60 100 120 160 200 255 (most darker) *12 150 minutes
25 MODE
17-3 17-2 17-1 17-0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
1 0 1 0 1 0 1
Density selection when scanning the tabed paper Mode 17-6 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 17-5 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 17-4 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
2-21
II ADJUSTMENT
1 0
25 MODE *13 Fixing temperature selection Temperature up: Decrease a insufficient fixing or fixing winding jam Temperature down: Decrease paper exit curling or waving Mode Upper roller, lower roller: 30C 19-3 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 19-2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 19-1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 Enabled Disabled *14 Default resolution of the IP scanner *19 Mode 400dpi 600 dpi 200 dpi 300 dpi 19-7 0 0 1 1 19-6 0 1 0 1 *18 Normal Fine *17
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Precision of the color registration automatic correction (periodical correction) "Fine" is used when the precision of the color registration correction that is periodically conducted is increased with the amount of error reduced. However, it takes about 2 minutes longer for correction. Mode 23-2 0 1
II ADJUSTMENT
Upper roller, lower roller: 20C Upper roller, lower roller: 10C Standard Upper roller, lower roller: +10C Upper roller: +10C Lower roller: +20C Standard
Color registration auto correction control (periodical correction) Down time while in the continuous printing is reduced with the color registration correction omitted that is periodically performed (color registration correction at power ON is not omitted). Mode 23-3 0 1
Main scan correction of the color registration auto correction (periodical correction) The color registration corrections, in the main scanning direction that are periodically performed can be omitted. This is used temporarily when there is a registration error along the main scan as a result of a trouble around the transfer belt unit, or when separating faulty points. Mode 23-4 0 1
*15
Image scanning area with shift function Normal: Compare the original size and the transfer paper size and the smaller one is to be the image area. Original priority: Original size is to be the image area. Mode 20-1 0 1 Enabled 22-2 0 0 1 1 22-1 0 1 0 1 Disabled Enabled Disabled
*20
Normal Original priority *16 Number of punch holes Mode 2 holes (for Japan) 3 holes (for inch area) 4 holes (for metric area)
IP gamma correction In order to separate defective items when there is poor images sent from IP The gamma . correction can be omitted. The gamma correction table is stored in the IP . Mode 23-5 0 1
2-22
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 *21 Vs/Vp switch control This Vs/Vp switch control is used when there is an image erasure around a solid image in the half-tone section in early stage after the change of developer. Mode Disabled Enabled 24-1 0 1 *23 Color registration correction control Correction made:
25 MODE
Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print. No correction made: Correction is omitted temporarily to reduce down time when the machine cannot be used with SC due to malfunctions around the color registration sensor. No correction while in printing: Correction that is performed by suspending print at every specified print is performed after the print job to reduce down time. Mode Correction made Correction not made No correction while in printing 25-4 0 0 1 1 25-3 0 1 0 1
Correction is performed by suspending print at specified print. No correction made: Correction is omitted temporarily to reduce down time when the machine cannot be used with SC due to the malfunction of the drum potential sensor or gamma sensor. No correction while in printing: Correction that is performed by suspending print at every specified print is performed after the print job to reduce down time. Mode Correction made Correction not made No correction while in printing 24-3 0 0 1 1 24-2 0 1 0 1
2-23
II ADJUSTMENT
*22 Image stabilization control timing Correction made:
25 MODE *24 Toner refresh mode (at Job end) Toner refresh mode (periodical) When printing coverage is low (5% or less of each color), rough image, white spot or toner spillage tend to occur due to toner deterioration. The effective measure against these are as follows. Toner refresh mode in key operator mode It is performed by a user's decision when a problem occurs. Amount of toner equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid is developed for all Y, M, C, K. (It needs to change setting by DIPSW 287) DIPSW 28-2 For the colors of which print coverage of the previous job is 5% or less (convert into A4), solid toner of the difference amount from the 5% is developed to consume toner. PIPSW 28-3 Check the average print coverage for each color at prescribed distance of developing sleeve drive developes the toner amount equivalent of 8-sheet A3 solid for the color of which the average print coverage is 5% or less (convert into A4). Mode Disabled Enabled 28-2 0 1 *25
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Printer gamma offset adjustment Change the area in which the printer gamma offset of the 36 mode can be adjusted. 0: High light area only 1: Possible in whole area Mode High light area only Possible in whole area 28-4 0 1
II ADJUSTMENT
*26
Toner refresh mode switchover Switch over the toner refresh mode function in the key operator mode. 0: Amount of toner equivalent of 8 sheets A3 solid is developed for all Y, M, C and K to consume toner. This setting is effective for rough image, white spot and toner spillage. This setting is not so effective for white line (paper feeding direction). Amount of toner equivalent of 10 sheets A3 half-tone is developed for M and C to consume toner. This setting is effective for white line (paper feeding direction). This setting is effective for rough image, white spot and toner spillage for magenta and cyan only. (It has no effect for yellow and black.) Mode 28-7 0 1
1:
Mode Disabled Enabled
28-3 0 1
Y,M,C,K M,C
2-24
25 MODE 6. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
6.4
Paper size setting
Conduct this setting when changing the paper size of the LCT. The paper size is available in the standard size, non-standard size and wide paper. 6.4.1 Standard size setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [Standard size] key. 4. Press the arrow key to select the paper size. 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [Cancel] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
6.4.3 Wide paper setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [Wide paper] key. 4. Press the arrow keys and select the standard size of the wide paper. 5. Press the [Enter size] key. 6. Press the main scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys.
6.4.2 Non-standard size setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Paper size setting] key. 3. "Paper size setting screen" Press the [Non-standard size] key. 4. Press the main scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 5. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 7. Press the sub-scan direction key and enter the paper size using the arrow keys or numeric keys. 8. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
2-25
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.5
PM count setting
6.5.2 Change setting A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [3. PM count] key. 3. "PM count/cycle screen" Press the [Page] or [Distance] key. 4. Enter a cycle value through the numeric keys.
Reset the PM count after implementation of the PM and set and/or change the PM cycle. The selection of the PM cycle is available in the total count and the distance in operation of the developing unit /K. In default, the total count is set. 6.5.1 Count reset
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [3. PM count] key. 3. "PM count/cycle screen" Press the [Count reset] key. 4. "PM count reset confirmation screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting the PM count. The PM count is reset and the starting date of the PM count is automatically entered. When the [NO] key is pressed, the PM count is not reset and return to "PM count/cycle screen." Only the upper three digits can be entered. 5. Press the [OK] key to return to "25 Mode menu screen." To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key and return to "25 mode menu screen."
2-26
25 MODE B. Data collection confirmation method (1) Procedure
6.6
Data collection
It is possible to confirm various data held in the machine. It is also possible to confirm collected data by the list output and the mail remote notification system. A. Data that can be confirmed 1. Total count of each paper size 2. Copy count of each paper size 3. Print count of each paper size 4. RADF count 5. Page fill of each section 6. JAM data of time series 7. JAM count 8. Count of each copy mode Count of each copy mode (1) Count of each copy mode (2) 9. SC count 10. JAM count of each section 11. SC count of each section Note: When setting DIPSW30-1 to 1, 6 to 11 can be confirmed. Note: The [Count reset] key is shown in the individual data confirmation screen of the [10. JAM count of each section] and the [11. SC count of each section]. When pressing the [COUNT RESET] key, "Count reset confirmation screen" is shown, and when pressing the [YES] key, the section data is reset. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Individual data confirmation screen" with the interval data not reset. Reset these data while in the PM implementation to confirm the jam or SC occurrence count after it was visited last time. 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [4. Data collection] key. 3. "Data collection menu screen" Press the key of a data collection item that you To select any succeeding key to the key 11, press the arrow key. 4. "Individual data confirmation screen" Press the arrow key to scroll the screen. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to "25 mode menu screen."
2-27
II ADJUSTMENT
want to confirm.
25 MODE C. Details of the data collection (1) Data collection No. 1 to 3: Total, copy and printer counts of each paper size NO Japan 1 2 3 4 A2 A3 B4 A4 B5 A5 B6 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11 Special For Inch 17 x 22 11 x 17 8.5 x 14 8.5 x 11 5.5 x 8.5 A4 Special
Remark Metric A2 A3 B4 (8K) A4 B5 (16K) A5 F4 Special Not used
II ADJUSTMENT
5 6 7 8 9 10
Maximum count: 99,999,999 1 count is made for paper of All types regardless of the paper size. All sheets of paper that do not come under the size of No. 1 to No. 9 are counted as special. However, SEL and LEF are counted as the same size. The non-standard and the wide paper are counted as special.
2-28
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) Data collection No. 4: RADF count NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Item No. of originals fed in ADF mode No. of originals fed in RADF mode No. of originals fed in RDH mode No. of originals fed in RRDH mode No. of originals fed in LDH mode No. of originals fed in CFF mode No. of 1 sided SDF original fed Not used Remark
25 MODE
No. of originals fed in 2 in 1 mode No. of 1 sided z-folded original fed No. of 2 sided z-folded original fed No. of 2 sided SDF original fed
Not used
Not used
Maximum count: 99,999,999 (3) Data collection No. 5: Page fill of each section It is possible to confirm the average pixel ratio of 5,000 print sheets of the latest 30 data for each of Y, M, C and K. This pixel ratio is a calculated value based on the dot area of pixels and the transfer paper area, and is different from the print ratio when actually printed. (4) Data collection No. 6: JAM date of time series With respect to the latest 100 jam data, it is possible to confirm originating jam code, total count, date of occurrence, time of occurrence, tray, paper size and magnification.
2-29
II ADJUSTMENT
No. of mix originals fed in ADF mode No. of mix originals fed in RADF mode
25 MODE (5) Data collection No. 7: Jam count / No. 10. JAM count of each section NO Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J10-01 J10-02 J10-03 J11-01 J12-01 J13-01 J14-01 J17-01 J17-02 J17-03 J17-04 J17-05 J17-06 J17-07 J17-08 J17-09 J31-02 J32-08 J32-04 J32-01 J32-05 J32-07 J32-02 J32-03 J92-01 J93-01 J94-02 J19-01 J19-02 J51-01 J71-01 J71-02 ADU Vertical conveyance LCT Main body FNS TU Reversed paper exit Paper feed By-pass Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 LCT Section 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 NO
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J72-16 J72-17 J72-18 J72-19 J72-20 J72-21 J72-22 J72-23 J72-24 J72-25 J72-26 J72-28 J72-29 J72-30 J72-32 J72-33 J72-34 J72-35 J72-38 J72-39 J72-40 J72-41 J72-42 J72-43 J72-44 J72-45 J72-46 J72-47 J72-48 J72-49 J72-50 J72-51 J72-60 J72-61 J72-62 J72-63 J72-64 J72-80 J72-81 J72-82 J72-83 J72-90 PK Not used FNS PI Not used PK Not used PI TU Section
1 2 3 4 5
II ADJUSTMENT
FNS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
FNS
2-30
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 NO Jam code is shown on the LCD display when DIPSW11-7 is set to 1 J61-01 J61-02 J61-03 J62-01 J62-02 J62-03 J62-04 J62-05 J62-06 J62-07 J17-10 Not used LCT DF Section
25 MODE
75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90
Maximum count: 99,999,999
2-31
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE (6) Data collection No. 8-1: Count of each copy mode (1) NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Item 1-1 mode 1-2 mode 2-1 mode 2-2 mode ADF 1-1 mode ADF 1-2 mode Mixed original mode Tab original mode Z-folded original mode LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Reg.) LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Reg.) LEF: Portrait/SEF: Landscape(Rev.) LEF: Landscape/SEF: Portrait(Rev.) Enhance Mode: text/photo Enhance Mode: Text Enhance Mode: Photo Enhance Mode: Map Non STD size 1 oblique staple(Upper left) 1 oblique staple(Upper right) 2 parallel staples(Left binding) 2 parallel staples(Upper binding) Left binding Right binding Upper binding Three-Folding Stapling & Folding Folding Main tray: Group Main tray: Sort Main tray: Non sort Subtray: Group (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Group (FACE UP) Subtray: Sort (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Sort (FACE UP) Subtray: Non sort (FACE DOWN) Subtray: Non sort (FACE UP) Cover sheet Trimmer Real size copy Preset magnification E4 Preset magnification E3 Preset magnification E2 Preset magnification E1 Preset magnification R4 2-32
Count conditions
II ADJUSTMENT
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 NO 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 Item Preset magnification R3 Preset magnification R2 Preset magnification R1 User lens mode 1 User lens mode 2 User lens mode 3 Zoom Vertical/Horizontal zoom Minimum zoom APS AMS AE (AES) User density level 1 (Not used) User density level 2 (Not used) Interrupted copy Auto image rotation cancellation Sheet insertion Chapter control Combination Booklet copy OHP interleave (copy) (Not used) OHP interleave (blank) (Not used) Image insert Book copy Program job Non-image area erase Reverse image Auto repeat Manual repeat STD size repeat Frame erasure Fold erasure Auto layout All-image area (Not used) Image Shift Reduction shift Overlay Water mark Stamp Date/Time Page Numbering Set quantity 1 Set quantity 2-5 Set quantity 6-10 2-33 Count conditions
25 MODE
II ADJUSTMENT
Maximum zoom
25 MODE NO 92 93 94 95 96 97 Item Set quantity 11 or more Time while power remote 1 is ON Time while power remote 2 is ON Time while power remote 3 is ON Time while power remote 4 is ON Time during Low Power mode Time during warm up time Time during front door open
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Count conditions Accumulation of time during which the overall control board is powered Accumulation of time during which the remote power 1 is on (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the remote power 2 is on (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the built-in controller operates (in minutes) Accumulation of time in the low power mode (1 count for each minute) Accumulation of warm-up time (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the front door is open (in minutes) Accumulation of time from the start of print to the end of print (in minutes) Down time due to jam omitted Accumulation of time during which ADF operates (in minutes) Accumulation of time during which the APS sensor is on (in minutes)
II ADJUSTMENT
98 99
100 Ope. Time in 1side straight exit 101 Ope. Time in 1side reverse exit 102 Operation time in 2 side print 103 Operation time in ADF mode 104 Morning Correction count (Not used) 105 Time during APS sensor ON 106 N of main tray used jobs 107 N of subtray used jobs 108 N of stapling & folding used jobs 109 N of folding used jobs 110 N of ADF NF occurred 111 N of ADF special error1 occurred 112 N of ADF special error2 occurred 113 N of ADF special error3 occurred 114 N of scanner scanned 115 N of electrode cleaned (Not used) 116 N of memory overflow 117 N of fixing alarm occurred (Not used) 118 N of no toner stop occurred (Not used) 119 N of AGC retry (Not used) 120 N of sub scan beam correct error (Not used) 121 N of mis-centering correct error (Not used) 122 N of distortion adjust error (Not used) 123 N of ADF distortion data error (Not used) 124 Compression memory overflow 125 Page memory overflow (scan) 126 Page memory overflow (print) 127 FNS alarm (tray/trimming) 128 FNS alarm (staple) 129 130 N of ADF special error4 occurred (Not used) 131 Store for HDD (Sync. With Copying) (Not used)
Wrong detection of original size Next original information error Error in size for which mixed paper is not allowed No. of scans in platen mode
2-34
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 NO 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 Maximum count: 99,999,999 Item Store for HDD (SRVmode Scan HDD) (Not used) Store for PC (SRVmode Scan PC) (Not used) Store for PC (SRVmode HDD PC) (Not used) Recall from HDD (SRVmode HDD) (Not used) Recall from PC (SRVmode PC) (Not used) Image edit count by SRV Wide paper count (A3W) or (11 x 17R) Wide paper count (A4WR) or (8.5 x 11RW) Wide paper count (A5W) or (5.5 x 8.5W) Wide paper count (Others) Punch Z-Folding (Not used) ADF original-thick MixPlex (1 side) MixPlex (2 side) ADF original-thin Count conditions
25 MODE
2-35
II ADJUSTMENT
Wide paper count (A4W) or (8.5 x 11W)
25 MODE (7) Data collection No. 8-2: Count of each copy mode (2) NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Item ACS Full color Monochrome Mono color (Y) Mono color (M) Mono color (C) Mono color (R) Mono color (G) Mono color (B) DF thick paper DF thin paper Original type: Printed paper Original type: Photo paper Original type: Copied paper Original type: Inkjet paper Original type: Pencil Original type: Newspaper Screen : Line screen/Smooth tone Screen : Line screen/High resolution Screen : Dot screen/Smooth tone Screen : Dot screen/High resolution Screen : High compression Gloss mode Density shift Background adjustment Red adjust Green adjust Blue adjust Hue adjustment Saturation adjustment Brightness adjustment Color balance adjustment Sharpness adjustment Contrast adjustment Image judge adjustment Paper Type: Normal paper Paper Type: Recycle paper Paper Type: Color paper Paper Type: High quality paper Paper Type: Coated paper Paper Type: Tab paper Paper Type: Color specific paper Paper Type: Exclusive paper A Paper Type: Exclusive paper B Paper Type: Exclusive paper C 2-36
Count conditions
II ADJUSTMENT
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 NO 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Maximum count: 99,999,999 Paper Weight: 1 Paper Weight: 2 Paper Weight: 3 Paper Weight: 4 Paper Weight: 5 Paper Weight: 6 Multi page enlargement N of no toner stop occurred (Y) N of no toner stop occurred (M) N of no toner stop occurred (C) N of no toner stop occurred (K) N of toner recovery box is full N of color regist. auto. adj. N of auto stability control OFF mode time ON time of heater (Main body) ON time of heater (tray 4) Polygon motor operation time Develop motor ope. time (color) Develop motor ope. time (black) ON time of PCL (color) ON time of PCL (black) Operation time in Scanner motor Time while power (ADF) Item Paper Type: Exclusive paper D Count conditions
25 MODE
Counts 1 per every correction operation Counts 1 per every correction operation
Sum of the OFF mode time (unit: minute) Sum of the time the heater is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the LCT heater is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the polygon motor is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the developing motor (color) operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the developing motor (black) operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the PCL (color) is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the PCL (black) is on (unit: minute) Sum of the time the scanner motor operates (unit: minute) Sum of the time the 24V is applied to the ADF (unit: minute)
2-37
II ADJUSTMENT
Main Tray: Face up
25 MODE (8) Data collection No. 9: SC occurrence count/ No. 11: Sectional SC occurrence count NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 SC code SC10-10 SC13-01 SC13-02 SC18-01 SC18-02 SC18-03 SC18-04 SC18-50 SC18-51 SC18-60 SC18-61 SC18-70 SC18-71 SC20-10 SC20-11 SC20-12 SC21-01 SC21-02 SC21-03 SC21-04 SC23-01 SC23-02 SC23-03 SC23-04 SC23-05 SC23-06 SC23-07 SC23-08 SC23-09 SC23-10 SC23-11 SC27-01 SC27-02 SC27-03 SC27-04 SC28-01 SC28-02 SC28-03 SC28-04 SC29-01 SC29-02 SC29-03 SC29-04 High voltage abnormality Transfer belt section abnormality Toner supply abnormality L-detection abnormality L-detection abnormality Drum motor abnormality Developing motor abnormality PCL abnormality Communication abnormality LT abnormality Section Communication abnormality Paper feed motor abnormality Paper feed tray abnormality NO 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SC code SC29-06 SC29-07 SC29-08 SC29-09 SC29-10 SC29-11 SC29-12 SC29-13 SC29-14 SC29-15 SC29-16 SC29-17 SC29-18 SC29-19 SC29-20 SC29-21 SC29-22 SC29-23 SC30-01 SC30-02 SC30-10 SC32-01 SC32-02 SC32-03 SC32-04 SC32-05 SC32-06 SC33-01 SC33-02 SC33-03 SC33-04 SC34-01 SC34-02 SC34-03 SC34-04 SC34-05 SC34-06 SC34-07 SC34-08 SC35-01 SC35-02 SC35-03 SC35-04 SC35-05 SC35-06 Low fixing temperature abnormality High fixing temperature abnormality Motor abnormality Communication abnormality Fan abnormality Section Process abnormality
II ADJUSTMENT
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43
2-38
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 NO 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 SC code SC36-02 SC36-04 SC36-05 SC36-06 SC36-07 SC36-08 SC36-09 SC36-10 SC36-11 SC36-12 SC38-02 SC38-03 SC39-01 SC41-01 SC41-02 SC41-03 SC41-04 SC41-05 SC41-06 SC41-07 SC41-08 SC41-09 SC41-10 SC41-11 SC42-01 SC42-02 Fan abnormality Scanner abnormality Write abnormality Scanner abnormality Write abnormality Section Fixing sensor abnormality NO 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 SC code SC45-01 SC45-03 SC45-07 SC45-08 SC45-09 SC45-10 SC45-11 SC45-12 SC46-01 SC46-02 SC46-03 SC46-05 SC46-06 SC46-07 SC46-08 SC46-09 SC46-11 SC46-12 SC46-13 SC46-14 SC46-15 SC46-16 SC46-17 SC46-18 SC46-19 SC46-21 SC46-23 SC46-24 SC46-25 SC46-26 SC46-31 SC46-32 SC46-35 SC46-40 SC46-41 SC46-42 SC46-43 SC46-58 SC46-59 SC46-62 SC46-63 SC46-64 SC46-66 Section
25 MODE
Color registration abnormality
Image processing abnormality
2-39
II ADJUSTMENT
SC45-20
25 MODE NO 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 SC code SC46-80 SC46-81 SC46-82 SC46-83 SC46-90 SC46-91 SC46-98 SC46-99 SC49-00 SC49-01 SC49-02 SC50-01 SC50-02 SC50-03 SC50-04 SC50-05 SC50-10 SC50-11 SC52-01 SC52-02 SC52-03 SC56-02 SC56-11 SC56-12 SC56-13 SC60-01 SC61-01 SC61-02 SC61-03 SC61-04 SC61-05 SC61-06 SC61-07 SC61-08 SC61-09 SC61-10 SC70-01 SC77-01 DF abnormality Operation board abnormality Fan abnormality Communication abnormality Section Image processing abnormality NO 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 2-40
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 SC code SC77-02 SC77-03 SC77-04 SC77-05 SC77-06 SC77-07 SC77-08 SC77-11 SC77-12 SC77-13 SC77-14 SC77-21 SC77-22 SC77-25 SC77-26 SC77-31 SC77-32 SC77-33 SC77-34 SC77-35 SC77-36 SC37-37 SC77-41 SC77-42 SC77-43 SC77-44 SC77-45 SC77-46 SC77-47 SC77-52 SC77-53 SC77-54 SC77-55 SC77-56 SC77-57 SC77-81 SC77-91 SC77-92 SC77-98 SC77-99 SC80-01 SC80-02 SC80-03 SC80-11 SC80-21 SC80-30 ISW abnormality Communication abnormality FNS abnormality PK abnormality Not used PK abnormality Not used PK abnormality Not used PI abnormality TU abnormality Section FNS abnormality
II ADJUSTMENT
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 NO 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 Maximum count: 99,999,999 SC code SC80-31 SC80-32 SC80-40 SC89-01 SC89-02 SC89-03 SC89-04 Main body abnormality Section
25 MODE
2-41
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.7
Parts counter
6.7.1 Count of special parts When a periodically replaced part is replaced, reset the counter of the part that has been replaced. Display the name, part number and the copy count of a replacement part that has been registered, and reset the count. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [1. Count of special parts] key. 4. "Parts counter (fixed) screen" Press the arrow key to select a part that you want to reset. 5. Press the [Count reset] key. 6. "Parts count reset screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting the part count. The part count is reset. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Parts counter menu screen" with the part count not reset.
The following are conducted with respect to each replacement part: display of copy count used, resetting of count, setting of limit value, and new registration of replacement parts. The copy count by parts that need to be replaced includes the following: Count of special parts Count of each parts
II ADJUSTMENT
2-42
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 B. Count of special parts list NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 Parts name Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 (Right side) Deodorant filter (Rear side) Dust-proof filter /1 (Right side) Dust-proof filter /2 (Rear side) Charging dust proof filter Drum cartridge /Y Drum /Y Drum cleaning blade /Y Lubricant applying unit /Y Drum cartridge /M Drum /M Drum cleaning blade /M Lubricant applying unit /M Drum cartridge /C Drum /C Drum cleaning blade /C Lubricant applying unit /C Drum cartridge /K Drum /K Drum cleaning blade /K Lubricant applying unit /K Charging corona /Y Charging wire assy /Y Charging grid plate /Y Charging corona /M Charging wire assy /M Charging grid plate /M Charging corona /C Charging wire assy /C Charging grid plate /C Charging corona /K Charging wire assy /K Charging grid plate /K Transfer belt unit Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /Y 1st transfer roller /M 1st transfer roller /C *2 *1 *2 *1 *2 *2 Count conditions *1
25 MODE
2-43
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 Parts name 1st transfer roller /K 2nd transfer roller /U Transfer belt separation claw Transfer belt cleaning unit Belt cleaning brush unit Toner collection sheet /1 Belt cleaning blade 2nd transfer roller /L Separation discharging unit Fixing cleaning unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Developer /Y (Page) Developer /Y (Page) Developer /C (Page) Developer /K (Page) Developing unit /Y Developing unit /M Developing unit /C Developing unit /K Developer /Y (Distance) Developer /M (Distance) Developer /C (Distance) Developer /K (Distance) FNS tray up/down motor FNS stapler /F FNS stapler /R FNS shift motor FNS exit opening motor *1 *1 *2 *2 *1
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Count conditions
II ADJUSTMENT
Displays developing sleeve travel distance (in meters)
1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit 1 count for each 1 paper exit in staple mode 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2staple and the stitch-and-fold modes 1 count for each paper exit in each of the 1-staple at front, 2staple and the stitch-and-fold modes 1 count for each paper exit at even number of copies in the sort mode 1 count for starting the job of "large size" (A4R/8.5 x 11R or larger) in the staple mode, and 1 count for each paper exit 1 count for starting each of the stitch-and-fold and folding jobs 1 count for each copy exit in each of the stitch-and-fold and folding and the three-folding modes 1 count for each A4 / B5 / 8.5 x 11 / 16K copy exit in the staple mode 1 count for each copy exit in the three-folding mode 1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81
FNS folding knife motor By-pass gate solenoid Tri-folding gate SD Pl conveyance clutch /U Pl feed roller /A /U Pl feed roller /B /U Pl reverse roller /U Pl torque limiter /U
1 count for each paper feed in PI upper stand
2-44
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 NO 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 Parts name Pl conveyance clutch /L Pl feed roller /A /L Pl feed roller /B /L Pl reverse roller /L Pl torque limiter /L Trimmer blade PK punching unit (2 hole) PK punching unit (3 hole) ADF paper feed roller ADF feed roller ADF feed prevention roller ADF exit solenoid ADF Dfeed clutch ADF reversal solenoid Exposure ON time Sub power switch Door SW Toner supply door switch Main power SW Pl regist clutch Punch motor Paper exit roller /A Intermediate conveyance roller Stacking assist roller Fixing torque limiter Registration cleaning sheet Ball bearing /U Heat insulating sleeve /U Intermediate convery. clutch /1 Intermediate convery. clutch /2 Intermediate convery. clutch /3 Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-1) Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-2) Feed/Dfeed rubber (Tray-3) Feed/Dfeed rubber (By-pass) Original passage count in all modes PK punching unit (4 hole) 1 count for each cutter operation 1 count for each punch operation Count conditions 1 count for each paper feed in PI lower stand
25 MODE
Original passage count in all modes 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode Single side copy mode: 1 count for each original Double side copy mode: 3 counts for each original 1 count for each original passage in the double side copy mode and the mixing original mode Accumulation of on-time (in : minute 1 count each time the main switch turns off the power 1 count each time the front door is opened 1 count each time the toner supply door is opened 1 count each time the reset switch turns off the power 1 count each time PI feeds a sheet 1 count for each punch operation 1 count for each FNS main tray paper exit 1 count for each sheet in each of the FNS flat stapling, stitchand-fold, folding and three-folding modes *1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode *1 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 1 counts in the double side copy mode
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray
2-45
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE NO Parts name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Count conditions 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 *1
123 Registration roller 124 Separation claw solenoid 125 Fixing upper lamp /1 126 Fixing upper lamp /2 127 Fixing lower lamp 128 Fixing temp. sensor /3 129 Fixing temp. sensor /4 130 Paper feed roller (Tray-1)
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray 1 count for each paper exit in the double side copy mode (no count is made in the single side copy mode)
II ADJUSTMENT
131 Paper feed roller (Tray-2) 132 Paper feed roller ((Tray-3) 133 Paper feed roller (By-pass) 134 ADU conveyance clutch /1 135 ADU conveyance clutch /2 136 ADU pre-registration clutch 137 Ball bearing /L 138 Heat insulating sleeve /L 139 Fixing drive gear 140 Decurler roller 141 LCT paper feed roller 142 LCT feed/Dfeed roller 143 LCT feed clutch 144 LCT pre-registration clutch 145 Paper feed clutch (Tray-1) 146 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-1) 147 Paper feed clutch (Tray-2) 148 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-2) 149 Paper feed clutch (Tray-3) 150 Pre-regist. clutch (Tray-3) 151 Paper feed clutch (By-pass) 152 Transfer earth plate unit 153 Center fixing temp. sensor/U 154 Center fixing temp. sensor/L Maximum count: 99,999,999
*1
1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the LCT
1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 1 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 2 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the tray 3 1 count for each paper exit of paper supplied from the bypass tray 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode 2 counts in the double side copy mode *1
*1
Count in all color modes 25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in the double side copy mode = 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the double side copy mode
*2
Count only in full color or single color mode 25DIPSW8-6 = 0: 1 count for each paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 2 counts in the double side copy mode = 1: 2 counts for each large size paper exit in the single side copy mode, and 4 counts in the double side copy mode
2-46
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6.7.2 Count of each parts This is used when you want to control the part counter. Set the part name, part number and the limit value, and display and reset the copy count. Up to 30 data from No. 01 to No. 30 can be set. A count is taken for each passage of paper, regardless of the paper size. Reference: When the copy count is in excess of a limit value, an asterisk [*] is shown to the left of No. A. Setting of each replacement part and display of the copy count (1) Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key. 3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [2. Count of each parts] key. 4. "Copy count of each part screen" Press the arrow key to select a number you want to set or change. 5. Press one of the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and [Limit setting] key. 6. Press an item you want to set or change out of the [Parts name setting], [P/N setting] and [Limit setting] key, and enter it with the alphanumeric keys. [Part name setting]: Enter a part name (8 digits in alphanumeric) [P/N setting]: Enter a part number (9 digits in alphanumeric) [Limit setting]: Limit value (8 digits in numeric) 7. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key. 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Parts counter] key.
25 MODE B. Resetting of each replacement part (1) Procedure
3. "Parts counter menu screen" Press the [2. Count of each parts] key. 4. "Count of each part screen" Press the arrow key to select a number you want to set or change. 5. Press the [COUNT RESET] key. 6. "Parts count reset screen" Press the [YES] key when resetting a part count. This resets the part counter. Pressing the [NO] key returns to "Count of each part" with the part count not reset.
2-47
II ADJUSTMENT
25 MODE
6.8
Password setting
6.9
Telephone number setting
Set the following passwords. Key operator password (4 digits): Password used to enter the key operator mode. EKC master key code (8 digits): Password required when entering various EKC setting modes. Weekly timer password (4 digits): Password required when entering various weekly timer setting modes. Note: A password can be set only when the setting for use of the weekly timer is set to "Use" in the key operator mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [6. Password setting] key. 3. "Password setting mode screen" Press the key of an item you want to set. Key operator password (4 digits) EKC master key code (8 digits) Weekly timer password (4 digits) 4. Enter a new password through the numeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
Set the customer support center telephone and FAX numbers that are used in an emergency for a service call and shown on the basic screen for help. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Telephone number setting] key. 3. "Customer support TEL/FAX setting screen" Press either of the [Service centre Telephone number (16 digits)] and [Service centre FAX number (16)] keys that you want to set. 4. Enter a TEL or FAX number through the numeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
Note: When a number is less than 16 digits, be sure to use hyphens to fill up the blanks.
Note: Setting "0000" for the key operator password and the weekly timer password allows you to use each mode with no password.
2-48
25 MODE
6.10 M/C serial number setting

Display and set the serial numbers of the main body and options. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [8. M/C serial number setting] key. 3. "Serial number setting mode screen" Press the key of an item you want to set and enter a serial number through the alphanumeric keys. 4. Press the [OK] key to update the data. 5. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
6.11 Indication of ROM version

Display the ROM version of the main body and options. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen"
3. "Indication of ROM version screen" Each ROM version is displayed. 4. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to "25 mode menu screen."
6.12 ISW
See chapter "Service tools."
Note: The serial number of the main body cannot be changed.
2-49
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [9. Indication of ROM version] key.
25 MODE
6.13 Setting date input

Set the starting date of the total counter that is displayed on the LCD in the P function. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen"
6.14 Board change mode

When changing any of the following four types of boards, be sure to set the serial number of the main body in this setting. OPERATION (operation board /1) OVERALL CB (overall control board) NVRAM (memory board) PRINTER (printer control board) Note: The number of boards that can be replaced at the same time is restricted only to two boards. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [13. Board change mode] key. 3. "Board change mode screen" Select a key of the board that you have replaced a part. 4. "Serial number input screen" Enter the serial number of the main body through the alphanumeric keys. 5. Press the [OK] key to update the data. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [12.Setting date input] key. 3. "Setting date input screen" Enter an installation date through the numeric keys. 4. Press the [OK] key to update the data. 5. To invalidate the setting that you have changed, press the [CANCEL] key.
2-50
36 MODE
7. 36 MODE
7.1 Setting method 7.2 Process adjustment
This machine is provided with the 36 mode to make various adjustment in this mode. A. Procedure
Make various adjustments around the process. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode.
1. With the reset switch (SW1) left ON, turn OFF Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 2. Turn ON the SW2 while pressing the numeric buttons 3 and 6 at the same time. The "36 mode menu screen" is shown. At this point, the machine enters the 36 mode with the normal copy operation unavailable. 3. Press the item key on the liquid crystal display (LCD) to show a setting screen of each item. 4. Confirm the details of input in the setting screen of each item. 5. Turn OFF the SW2 to release the 36 mode. 6. New data will be effective after restarting. 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Process adjustment menu screen." 3. "Process adjustment mode menu screen" For the process adjustment, there are the following items provided: [1. High voltage adjustment] [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] [3. Sensor output adjustment] [4. Exclusive paper setting] [5. Recall standard data]
2-51
II ADJUSTMENT
the main switch (SW2).
2. "36 mode menu screen"
36 MODE 7.2.1 High voltage adjustment For the high voltage adjustment, the following items are provided. However, be sure not to conduct a high voltage adjustment in the field. [1. 1st transfer manual adj.] [2. 2nd transfer manual adj.] [3. HV adjustment (Separation AC)] [4. HV adjustment (Separation DC)] [5. Pre-transfer guide HV check] a.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (1) Blade setting mode Perform this adjustment when changing the belt cleaning blade or the transfer belt. In this mode, apply toner onto the transfer belt then clean with the belt cleaning blade. This prevents the damages of the transfer belt and the belt cleaning blade. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen"
II ADJUSTMENT
7.2.2 Drum peculiarity adjustment Conduct the blade setting, charging potential correction, gamma, developer charge, L-detection adjustment and the initial drum rotation. A. Procedure
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press [1. Blade setting mode] key. 5. "Blade setting mode screen"
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" For the drum peculiarity adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Blade setting mode] [2. Automatic drum potential adj.] [3. Automatic gamma adjustment] [4. LD bias adjustment] [5. Automatic developer charge] [6. L-detect initial auto. adj.] [7. Initial drum rotation] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen.
Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 15 seconds and complete message is shown on the screen. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
2-52
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) Automatic drum potential adjustment Measure the charging potential of each drum of Y, M, C and K to adjust automatically the developing bias value and the charging voltage. This adjustment is not necessary because of the automatic gamma adjustment contain this adjustment. 1. Enter the 36 mode. a. Procedure 2. "36 mode menu screen" (3) Automatic gamma adjustment
36 MODE
The gamma adjustment is performed automatically. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press [2. Automatic drum potential adjustment] key. 5. "Automatic drum potential adjustment screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 20 seconds and the charging potential is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen, with an exit message shown. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Automatic gamma adjustment] key. 5. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0 screen" There are 8 kinds of the gamma adjustment (0 to 7). However, conduct "Gamma auto adjustment 0" in the field. "Automatic gamma adjustment 0": Perform the Dmax density adjustment, dot diameter adjustment, automatic drum potential adjustment, and the gamma adjustment. The developing bias value is shown for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) with a complete message. Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 2.5 minutes and the developing bias value is displayed for each line speed (1/1 speed, 1/ 2 speed and 1/3 speed) and for each color (Y, M, C and K) on the screen with a complete message. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
2-53
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
36 MODE (4) LD bias adjustment Perform this adjustment when replacing the write unit. Note: Do not perform this adjustment except when replacing the write unit. a. Procedure
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1) screen" For the LD bias adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select the color of the write unit you just replaced. "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment Y (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment M (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment C (LS 1/3)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/1)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/2)" "LD bias adjustment K (LS 1/3)"
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Read the numeric value on the bar code labeled [1] on the replacing write unit.
7. Enter the numeric value on the bar code labeled on the replacing write unit through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Note: Be sure to enter the same numeric value in LS 1/1, LS 1/2, and LS 1/3. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
[1]
8050fs1025
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 4. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 5. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. LD bias adjustment] key.
2-54
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (5) Automatic developer charge In this mode, after discharging developer from the developing unit manually, a new developer is automatically charged. Note: Do not open the upper cover of the developing unit. Otherwise, dust gets in the unit causing image failure. a. Procedure
36 MODE 3. Set the developer charging plate /L [2] to the shoulder screws [1] provided above the developing unit of a color the developer of which is changed.
[2]
[1]
1. Open the toner supply section. 2. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the developer charging plate [3] provided inside the toner supply section [2]. Remove 2 screws [4] and then remove the developer charging funnel /L [5].
[2]
[1]
[4] [2]
[3]
[5]
8050fs1002
[1]
8050fs1003
2-55
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 4. Set the developer charging funnel /L [2] to the developer charging plate [1]. Note: Be sure to attach the tip of the developer charging funnel /L [2] securely to the toner supply opening [3].
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 8. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 9. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Automatic developer charge] key.
[1] II ADJUSTMENT
10. "Automatic developer charge Y screen" Press the arrow key to select the color of developer you want to charge. For the automatic developer charge, the follow ing items are provided: Automatic developer charge Y Automatic developer charge M Automatic developer charge C Automatic developer charge K
11. Press the [Start] key to introduce a new developer into the developer charging funnel /U. 12. Make sure that the developer has been
[3]
[2]
8050fs1004
charged successfully before pressing the [CANCEL] key.
5. Set the developer charging funnel /U [2] packaged together with developer to the developer charging funnel /L [1]. Note: The developer charge funnel /U [2] is packaged together with each developer. So, be sure to avoid its reuse. 13. When charging another developer, repeat steps 3 to 11. 14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen." 15. Return the installed parts back to their original positions. Note: After completion of this adjustment, be sure to perform the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. If printing is started without performing the L-detect initial auto. adjustment, a proper image density cannot be obtained, thus resulting in the change of developer again.
[1]
6. Enter the 36 mode.
[2]
8050fs1005
2-56
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (6) L-detect initial automatic adjustment Be sure to conduct this adjustment after a new developer is charged. Note: Do not print without conducting the L-detect initial auto. adjustment. Otherwise, a proper image density cannot be obtained, thus resulting in the change of developer again. 2. "36 mode menu screen" a. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. (7) Initial drum rotation
36 MODE
When remove the drum cartridge, be sure to conduct this operation to securely set the drum coupling. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [6. L-detect initial auto. adjustment] key.
3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Drum peculiarity adjustment] key. 4. "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen" Press the [7. Initial drum rotation] key. 5. "Initial drum rotation screen" Press the [Start] key. This process completes in about 10 seconds and complete message is shown on the screen. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return
5. "L-detect initial auto. adj. ALL screen" Press the arrow key to select the color of a developer that has been newly charged, and then press the [Start] key. For the L-detect initial auto. adj., the following items are provided: L-detect initial auto. adj. All: Conduct all colors of Y, M,C and K. L-detect initial auto. adj. YMC: Conduct Y, M and C only. L-detect initial auto. adj. K: Conduct K only. L-detect initial auto. adj. Y: Conduct Y only. L-detect initial auto. adj. M: Conduct M only. L-detect initial auto. adj. C: Conduct C only. 6. A message "Completed" is displayed. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
to the "Drum peculiarity adjustment menu screen."
2-57
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [1. Process adjustment] key.
36 MODE 7.2.3 Sensor output check For the sensor output check, the following items are provided; however, do not conduct them in the field: [1. Surface potential sensor output] [2. Max. density sensor output] [3. Gamma sensor output]
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. For setting, press the key of an item you want to set. Set the following 12 types of setting for each exclusive paper A to D. 2nd transfer offset Side 1 2nd transfer offset Side 2 2nd separation AC offset Side 1 2nd separation AC offset Side 2 2nd separation DC offset Side 1 2nd separation DC offset Side 2 Fixing (U) roller temp (idle) Fixing (U) roller temp (print) Fixing (L) roller temp (idle) Fixing (L) roller temp (print) Fixing (U and L) roller temp. difference Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width <261mm Compulsion off (upper heater) paper width >=261mm Line speed 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "User paper setting menu screen."
7.2.4 Exclusive paper setting
II ADJUSTMENT
This setting is used when the user cannot obtain the satisfactory results of transfer, separation or fixing with the standard setting due to a special paper being used. This setting is applicable when [Exclusive paper A to D] is selected in the key operator mode [Paper type/ Special paper size set]. In default, the following paper data is entered for each destination area. For Japan: 80 g/m color specified paper For inch area: 105 g/m2 color specified paper For metric area: 90 g/m2 color specified paper Note: When setting data, be sure to follow the instructions given by Minolta Technology Support Center. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. Exclusive paper setting] key. 4. "User paper setting menu screen" For the user paper setting menu, the following items are provided which correspond to the setting key of the same name in the key operator mode. [1. Exclusive paper A setting] [2. Exclusive paper B setting] [3. Exclusive paper C setting] [4. Exclusive paper D setting]
2
2-58
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.2.5 Recall standard data Reset the adjusted set values of process adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data) Note: Data for automatic drum potential, automatic gamma, L-detect initial auto. and exclusive paper setting adjustment cannot be reset to the standard data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [1. Process adjustment] key. 3. "Process adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data: Process adjustment screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Process adjustment menu screen" without recalling the standard data.
36 MODE
2-59
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
7.3
Image adjustment
7.3.1 Magnification adjustment Adjust various magnifications. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" For the magnification adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer vertical mag.adj.] [2. Printer horizontal mag.adj.] [3. Scanner vertical mag.adj.] [4. Belt line speed adjustment] [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
Conduct various image adjustments. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" For the image adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Magnification adjustment] [2. Timing adjustment] [3. RADF adjustment] [4. Centring adjustment] [5. Non-image area erase check] [6. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
2-60
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system. This adjustment changes the line speed of the registration roller, drum, transfer belt and the fixing. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following two methods are available. Be sure to take care when an adjustment is made. (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to the wear of the registration roller or the heat shrinkage of paper. (2) Belt line speed adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to causes other than the above. In default, the printer vertical magnification adjustment on side 2 is not reflected to the image. When adjusting the vertical magnification on side 2, use the memory switch in the key operator mode to turn ON side 2 drum clock adjustment mode. However, since the line speed is switched for each image creation process on side 1 and side 2, the print speed is reduced to about 1/4. a. Procedure
36 MODE 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1mm against 205.7 mm
205.7 1
8050fs1006
8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Printer vertical magnification adjustment
screen" For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment": Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same time. Setting range: -300 to +300, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Back tray 4 offset": LCT side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key.
keys and press the [SET] key. 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value
4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Printer vertical mag. adj.] key. 5. "Printer vertical mag. adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
2-61
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (2) Printer horizontal magnification adjustment Adjust the horizontal magnification of the printer system. This adjustment changes the horizontal magnification in image processing prior to the laser exposure. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 9. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment screen" For the printer horizontal magnification adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment": Side 1 and side 2 are adjusted at the same time. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 1 offset (ADU)": Tray 1 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 2 offset (ADU)": Tray 2 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 3 offset (ADU)": Tray 3 side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "By-pass tray offset (ADU)": By-pass tray side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% "Tray 4 offset (ADU)": LCT side 2 adjustment Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer horizontal magnification adjustment] key. 5. "Printer horizontal magnification adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 7. Measure the horizontal magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1 mm against 190 mm
11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
190
8050fs1007
8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button.
2-62
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (3) Scanner vertical magnification adjustment Adjust the vertical magnification of the scanner system. This adjustment changes the scan speed. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
36 MODE 8. When the value is not within to the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.05% 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Scanner vertical mag. adj.] key. 5. "Scanner vertical mag. adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1 mm against 200 mm
11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
200
8050fs1008
2-63
II ADJUSTMENT
can be obtained.
36 MODE (4) Belt line speed adjustment Adjust the vertical magnification of the printer system. This adjustment charges line speed of the transfer belt. Note: For the printer vertical magnification adjustment, the following two methods are available. Be sure to take care when an adjustment is
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 7. Measure the vertical magnification with a scale. Standard value: 0.5% or less (when in life-size) Within 1 mm against 205.7 mm
II ADJUSTMENT
made. (1) Printer vertical magnification adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to the wear of the registration roller or the heat shrinkage of paper. (2) Belt line speed adjustment Used when the vertical magnification has been changed due to causes other than the above. a. Procedure 8. If the specification is not satisfied, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Belt line speed adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.01% 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the standard value can be obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification screen." adjustment menu
205.7 1
8050fs1006
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [4. Belt line speed adjustment] key. 5. "Belt line speed adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
2-64
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (5) Fixing line speed adjustment When replacing the fixing roller/U, /L and transfer belt, use this adjustment method to adjust the fixing roller line speed. When the fixing line speed is faster than the transfer belt, this results in an increased vertical magnification or transfer jittering. And when the fixing line speed is slower than the transfer belt, this results in the trailing edge of the image will be soiled. Note: When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper for fixing speed adjustment" (P/N 65AA-991*). Otherwise, the fixing line speed cannot be accurately adjusted. a. Procedure
36 MODE 7. Compare the fixing adjustment density patches (upper and lower limit samples of density that are packed with the "paper for fixing speed adjustment") with the cyan density of the outputted paper, and check to see if the cyan density of the output paper is within the limit of the fixing density standard patches. 8. When it is not within the limit, press the C but-
9. "Set the cyan density screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 0 to 255 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the density ges inside the limit.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Magnification adjustment] key. 13. With 8 sheets of the fixing adjustment paper 4. "Magnification adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Fixing line speed adjustment] key. 5. "Set the cyan density screen" Press the [DENSITY] key. 6. With the fixing adjustment paper set to the bypass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. Based on a cyan half-tone, a test pattern is output. Note: When adjusting it, be sure to use the "paper for fixing speed adjustment." Otherwise, it cannot be accurately adjusted. set to the by-pass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern. Note: Be sure to conduct this operation with the copy count set to 1. 14. With the image formation line speed variable automatically at intervals of about 25 seconds, 8 sheets of test patterns based on cyan halftone are output. 15. With a pen, write serial numbers from 1 to 8 on the output sheets in order of the paper exit (bottom to top). 11. "Set the cyan density screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 12. "Push [Sample] and print 8 sheets screen" Press the [8 SAMPLES] key.
2-65
II ADJUSTMENT
ton while pressing the P button.
36 MODE 16. Comparing the output image on the first sheet with the remaining 7 output sheets, find out an output sheet in which the distance between the magenta line at the lead edge and the first black line at the trail edge (10 lines at intervals of 1 mm) gets 1 mm stretched.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.3.2 Timing adjustment Adjust various timings. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" For the timing adjustment, the following items are provided:
8050fs1009
[1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] [2. Printer registration loop adj.] [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] [6. RADF registration loop adj.] [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] [8. Auto. color registration adj.] [9. Color registration manual adj.] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Timing adjustment menu screen."
Note: The image does not stretch gradually for each output sheet. It suddenly stretches at a certain sheet. Therefore, be sure to measure each sheet in order of output. 17. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 18. "Set the cyan density screen" Enter the number of the output sheet that stretches 1 mm through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 19. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Magnification adjustment menu screen."
2-66
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (1) Printer lead edge timing adjustment Adjust the lead edge timing. This adjustment changes the paper restart timing from the registration roller. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Be sure the printer vertical magnification has been adjusted. a. Procedure
36 MODE Note: Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Set the copy setting according to the item
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Printer lead edge timing adj.] key. 5. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1) screen" For the printer lead edge timing adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Lead edge timing (Tray 1)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 2)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 3)" "Lead edge timing (Bypass)" "Lead edge timing (Tray 4)" "Lead edge timing (ADU)" "Tray large size normal paper offset" "Tray large size thick paper offset" "Tray small size normal paper offset" "Tray small size thick paper offset" "Bypass large size normal paper offset" "Bypass large size thick paper offset" "Bypass small size normal paper offset" "Bypass small size thick paper offset" "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)" "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)"
adjusted and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. Measure the lead edge timing with a scale. Standard value: 20 mm 0.5 mm
20
8050fs1010
10. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 11. "Printer lead edge timing screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -100 to +100, 1 step = 0.1 mm 12. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
2-67
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (2) Printer registration loop adjustment Adjust the paper loop amount in the registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Set the copy according to the item that has been adjusted and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. If the printer registration loop amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer registration loop adj. screen"
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer registration loop adj.] key. 5. "Printer registration loop adjustment screen (Tray 1)" For the printer registration loop adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 1 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 2 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 3 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Bypass S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Tray 4 S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU L)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (ADU S)" "Printer registration loop adjustment (Thick)"
Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
Note: Large size: 300 mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300 mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106 g/m2 or more
2-68
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (3) Printer pre-registration adjustment Adjust the paper loop amount in each tray and the ADU pre-registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the pre-registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
36 MODE 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
(4) Printer erasure amount adjustment
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Printer pre-registration adj.] key.
mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen"
5. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen (Tray 1)" For the printer pre-registration adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 1)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 2)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 3)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (Tray 4)" "Printer pre-registration adj. (ADU)"
Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Printer erasure amount adj.] key. 5. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Check the printer erasure amount. Standard value: 3mm or less 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button.
6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16). 9. When the printer pre-registration amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer pre-registration adj. screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -99 to +99, 1 step = 0.1 mm
9. "Printer erasure amount adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -20 to +40, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
2-69
II ADJUSTMENT
Conduct an erasure amount adjustment. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator
36 MODE (5) Scanner re-start timing adjustment Adjust re-start timing of original scanning. In this adjustment, the starting position for reading while in the original scanning mode is adjusted. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Make sure that the printer timing adjustment has been completed. a.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (6) RADF registration loop adjustment Adjust the original loop amount in the RADF registration roller section to remove paper skew and wrinkle, or paper jamming in the registration section. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Enter the 36 mode. a. Procedure 2. "36 mode menu screen" 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Scanner re-start timing adj.] key. 5. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Check the scanner re-start timing. Standard value: 3mm or less 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Scanner re-start timing adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -10 to +20, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen." 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen." Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [6. RADF registration loop adj.] key. 5. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. If the RADF registration loop amount is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "RADF registration loop adjustment screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -7 to +7, 1 step = 0.5mm 9. Repeat steps 5 to 8 until the standard value is obtained.
2-70
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (7) Writing unit skew initial adjustment Store a skew correction position data along the main scan of a new write unit (Y, M and C only) in the memory board (MB). The data is updated automatically by the auto. color registration adjustment. 1. Enter the 36 mode. Note: When any of the write units Y, M and C is replaced, be sure to start the main body in the 36 mode for this adjustment. a. Procedure 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment menu screen" Press the [7. Writing unit skew initial adj.] key. 5. "Writing unit skew int. adj. screen" Press the [Start] key. 6. Adjustment starts for all the write units Y, M and C at the same time, and a message "Complete" is shown in about a minute. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen." 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. a.
36 MODE registration auto correction in the user mode. So, be sure to perform this adjustment when a SC45-20 occurs. Procedure
3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key.
Press the [8. Auto. color registration adj.] key. 5. "Color registration adj. screen" Press the [Start] key. 6. The color registration adjustment starts and a message "Complete" is shown in about 2 minutes. When the error message appears, perform an error correction referring to the below. Error 1: It does not converge within the standard value. The patch density may be too light. Check around the drum unit and perform the gamma automatic adjustment (0). Then perform this adjustment. Error 2: The difference of the color registration is too much. Error 3: The other error SC other than the color registration automatic adjustment may occur. Restart the main body in the normal mode to check for SC code. 7. "Color registration adj. screen" When pressing the [LIST] key, the main scan, sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the skew of Y, M and C compared based on K after adjustment are shown. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
(8) Auto. color registration adjustment Make this adjustment when there is a color registration error. The main scan, sub-scan, horizontal magnification and the skew of color registration error are automatically adjusted. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: This auto. color registration adjustment has a larger correction area than that of the color
2-71
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (9) Color registration manual adjustment (partial horizontal adjustment) With respect to the main scan, entire horizontal magnification, partial horizontal magnification, subscan, inclination and the scan inclination, the registration error amount of Y, M and C compared based on K is shown on the operation panel. The partial horizontal magnification that cannot be corrected automatically is manually adjusted.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button to output a test pattern. Place the test pattern [1] outputted securely against the original positioning plate /L [2] and the original positioning plate /R [3] to set it to the original glass, and close the DF or platen cover. Note: When setting the test pattern to the original glass, be sure to take check of the setting direction and position. Check that the settings for all colors (Y, M, C, K) in the [Test pattern density setting] of 36 mode is set to 255. If not, it results in an error.
II ADJUSTMENT
Note: Be sure that the printer vertical and horizontal magnifications have been complete. Make sure that the auto. color registration adjustment has been completed. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Timing adjustment] key. 4. "Timing adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [9. Color registration manual adj.] key. 5. "Color registration manual adj. screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
[3] [2]
[1]
8050fs1011
7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Color registration manual adj. screen" Press the [SCAN] key to scan the test pattern. 9. The amount of error of the "MainScan" (main scan), "Mag(ALL)" (entire horizontal magnification), "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification), "SubScan" (sub-scan), "Incline" (inclination) and the "ScanBend" (scan incline) of Y, M and C are compared based on K and result are shown at "Rest" section on the operation panel (unit is pixel).
2-72
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 10. Make sure that "OK" is displayed for all the items. When any item is not within the standard, an error code is displayed for each cause together with an NG. Make an error correction referring to the below: When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan", "Mag(ALL)", "SubScan" or "Incline," perform the auto. color registration adjustment again. Error 1: A chart pattern cannot be detected. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is upside down. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected. A different type of chart. Error 4: Adjustment is impossible. Software bugged. Error 5: Not within the standard value. Re-adjust it. Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality. Check the installation of memory board. Error 7: Memory other than those specified is accessed. Software bugged. Error 8: Memory related error. Software bugged. Error 9: Program error. Software bugged. Error 10: The chart is skew. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 11: Image header information read error. Software bugged. Error 12: An argument set error. Software bugged. Error 13: A measurement error. Improper positioning of the chart, or a defective chart.
36 MODE 11. When a "NG" occurs in the "MainScan", "Mag(ALL)" or "Mag(PART)," open the toner supply section and loosen 2 screws [1] provided near the developing unit of a color from which an "NG" is displayed. Then, slide the adjustment plate [2] up and down to adjust the partial horizontal magnification. Moving the adjustment plate [2] upward reduces the partial horizontal magnification data (minus) and moving the plate downward increases it (plus). Adjustment target Move the adjustment plate [2] by referring to the "Rest" of "Mag(PART)" (partial horizontal magnification) (unit: pixel) displayed at the operation panel. The scale of the adjustment plate [2] changes about 0.5 pixel per notch.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1012
12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment menu screen." 13. Conduct the color registration adjustment referring to (8) Auto. color registration adjustment. 14. Repeat steps 4 to 13 until "OK" is displayed. 15. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Timing adjustment mode menu screen."
2-73
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.3.3 RADF adjustment Conduct the original size adjustment, original stop position adjustment and the sensor adjustment of the RADF. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. "RADF original size adjustment (A4) or (8.5 x 11) screen" With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11 (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 6. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 7. "RADF original size adjustment (A5R) or (5.5 x 8.5R) screen" With the A5R (for metric machine) or 5.5 x 8.5R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 8. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key. 9. "RADF original size adjustment (A4R) or (8.5 x 11R) screen" With the A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R (for inch machine) paper set to the RADF, press the [Start] key. 10. After confirmation of a message "Complete," press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 11. Make sure that the RADF original size is properly detected.
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" For the RADF adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. RADF original size adjustment] [2. RADF orig. stop position adj.] [3. RADF sensor adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
(1) RADF original size adjustment Conduct this adjustment when the RADF original size is not properly detected. a. Procedure
12. Press the C button while pressing P button. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. RADF original size adjustment] key.
2-74
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) RADF original stop position adjustment Conduct the original stop position leading edge timing (leading edge timing) adjustment of the RADF. Note: Make sure that the printer lead edge timing adjustment and the scanner re-start timing adjustment have been completed. (3) RADF sensor adjustment a. Procedure
36 MODE 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. RADF orig. stop position] key. 5. "Front plain paper/thick paper screen" For the RADF orig. stop position adj., the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. [Normal & Thick paper (Front side)] [Thin paper (Front side)] [Normal & Thick paper (Back side)] [Thin paper (Back side)] 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. With the original setting set to the copy mode according to an item you want to adjust, set the test chart to the RADF. And select the A3 paper and press the START button. 8. Check the RADF leading edge timing. Standard value: 3 mm or less 9. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -14 to +14, 1 step = 0.5 mm a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. RADF adjustment] key. 4. "RADF adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. RADF sensor adjustment] key. 5. "RADF sensor adjustment screen" Close the RADF and press the [Start] key. The sensitivity of the RADF sensors are automatically adjusted. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "RADF adjustment mode menu screen."
2-75
II ADJUSTMENT
Conduct this adjustment when malfunction occurs in the reflective type sensors.
36 MODE 7.3.4 Centring adjustment Adjust the mis-centering of images vertical to the paper feed direction. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen"
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Printer centring adjustment] key. 5. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1) screen" For the printer centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer centring adj. (Tray 1)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 2)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 3)" "Printer centring adj. (Bypass)" "Printer centring adj. (Tray 4)" "Printer centring adj. (ADU)" "Large size offset (Tray 1)" "Small size offset (Tray 1)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 1)" "Large size offset (Tray 2)" "Small size offset (Tray 2)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 2)" "Large size offset (Tray 3)" "Small size offset (Tray 3)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Tray 3)" "Large size offset (Bypass)" "Small size offset (Bypass)" "8.5 x 5.5 offset (Bypass)" "Large size offset (Tray 4)" "Small size offset (Tray 4)" "Large size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Large size thick paper offset (ADU)" "Small size normal paper offset (ADU)" "Small size thick paper offset (ADU)" "8.5 x 5.5 normal paper offset (ADU)" "8.5 x 5.5 thick paper offset (ADU)"
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" For the centering adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer centring adjustment] [2. Scanner centring adjustment] [3. RADF centring adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
(1) Printer centring adjustment This adjustment changes the laser writing start timing. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Be sure that the printer horizontal magnification has been completed. a. Procedure
Note: Large size: 300mm or more in length in the paper feed direction Small size: 300mm or less in length in the paper feed direction Thick Paper: 106g/m2 or more 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 7. Select the paper size and the type of paper 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. according to an item you want to adjust, and press the START button to output a test pattern (No. 16).
2-76
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 8. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2mm
36 MODE 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed
9. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric Setting range: -40 to +40, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value can be obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2mm
press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu
(2) Scanner centring adjustment Adjust the centring when scanning the platen original. This adjustment changes the reading timing of the CCD. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Make sure that the printer centering adjustment has been completed. a. Procedure
screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Scanner centring adjustment] key. 5. "Scanner (platen) centring adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
2-77
II ADJUSTMENT
keys and press the [SET] key.
8. When the value is not within the standard,
36 MODE (3) RADF centring adjustment Adjusts the centring when scanning the RADF original. This adjustment changes the reading timing of the CCD. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. Note: Make sure that the printer centering and scan-
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Fold the outputted paper in the paper feed direction and check the amount of error of the lines on both sides. Standard value: Within 2mm 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -30 to +30, 1 step = 0.1mm 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Centring adjustment mode menu screen."
II ADJUSTMENT
ner centring adjustment has been completed. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Centring adjustment] key. 4. "Centring adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. RADF centring adjustment] key. 5. "RADF centring adjustment (Front) screen" For the RADF centering adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "RADF centring adjustment (Front)" "RADF centring adjustment (Back)" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
2-78
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.3.5 Non-image area erase check When installing the copier or moving its installation location, check to see if the "non-image area erase" function of the copy application functions works satisfactorily. Preparations made in advance: Open fully the RADF or platen cover. There should not be anything on the original glass. Clean the original glass. A. Procedure (1) Error message 1 B. Error message and Handling
36 MODE
If the error is detected while perform the "non-image area erase check" mode, following error message will be displayed on the operation panel.
Adjust for Moderate Brightness. The Non-image area erase function may not operPlease confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns of Service manual. Handling 1 When the "non-image area erase" function is not used very frequently, or when copy originals that have a dark background are not copied very frequently in the "non-image area erase," the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, when copy originals that have a dark background are frequently copied, install the copier in a location or in a direction where less external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area erase check mode" again. (2) Error message 2 Adjust for Extreme Brightness. In many case, the non-image area erase function will not operate correctly. Please confirm "adjustment" - "36 MODE", columns of Service manual. Handling 2 When the "non-image area erase" function is not used very frequently, the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, the outsideoriginal erasure function is frequently used, install the copier in a location or in a direction where less external light get in (darker) than the present installation location, and check the "non-image area erase check mode" again. At this time, when there is a bright light source such as a fluorescent light installed directly above the copier, reconsider the installation location or direction, or take some measures to shield the light source and check the "nonimage area erase check mode" again.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Non-image area erase check] key. 4. "Non-image area erase check screen" Press the [Start] key. 5. Make sure that a message "Normal adjustment selected ..." is shown on the operation panel. When a message "Does not function satisfactorily ..." is shown, refer to "B. Error message and Handling," to conduct the non-image area erase check again. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image adjustment menu screen."
2-79
II ADJUSTMENT
ate correctly with dark (density) originals.
36 MODE 7.3.6 Recall standard data Reset the adjustment values of image adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data) Note: Data for the printer vertical magnification, RADF registration loop, auto. color registration, color registration manual, RADF original
II ADJUSTMENT
size, RADF original stop position and RADF sensor adjustment cannot be reset to standard data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [2. Image adjustment] key. 3. "Image adjustment menu screen" Press the [5. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data (image adjustment data) screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard data. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the "Image adjustment menu screen" without recalling the standard data.
2-80
36 MODE 7.4.1 Scanner gamma adjustment Conduct the gradation correction of the scanner. When color reproduction is in a poor condition, usually conduct the printer gamma correction. When changing the CCD unit, exposure lamp (L1), original glass or each scanner mirror, conduct this adjustment. Note:
7.4
Image quality adjustment
Conduct various image quality adjustments. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" For the image quality adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] [2. Printer gamma adjustment] [3. Sharpness adjustment] [4. Contrast adjustment] [5. Image judge adjustment] [6. ACS adjustment] [7. Density adjustment] [8. Tone adjustment] [9. Recall standard data] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
Scanner gamma has been adjusted for each machine. Please be noted that the scanner gamma data is rewritten to the mean value if the [Adj. data reset] key in the "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" is pressed. A. Procedure 1. After replacing a part, place a test chart on the original glass, select A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the START button. 2. Check for the foggy background or color balance. 3. If there is abnormality, enter the 36 mode. 4. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 5. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [1. Scanner gamma adjustment] key. 6. "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" Press the [Adj. data reset] key. Press the [YES] key when rewriting the scanner gamma mean value. Press the [NO] to return to the "Scanner gamma adjustment screen" without rewriting. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
2-81
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.4.2 Printer gamma adjustment When the color reproduction is in poor condition, conduct this adjustment to correct gradation. A. Procedure Note: 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen"
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (1) Printer gamma offset adjustment Conduct this adjustment when the color reproduction varies with copy modes to correct the gradation in a high light density section and adjust the density in the background.
For the printer gamma offset adjustment, adjustment methods of 0 to 5 are available for each screen type. It is possible to divide the gradation in 256 into 6 parts of 0 to 5 and adjust the entire ranges from "0: Low density section" to "5: High density section." In default, adjustment is limited only to "0 (low density section)." When setting DIPSW 28-4 to 1, adjustment can be made on the entire ranges of 0 to 5. a. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. For the printer gamma adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of adjustment screen to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Printer gamma offset adj.] key.
2-82
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0) screen" For the printer gamma offset adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS200) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (LS150) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS200) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (DS150) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-8) (0 to 5)" "Printer gamma offset adj. (ED-2) (0 to 5)" The following shows the copy mode to which each adjustment is reflected. (LS200): Line screen/High resolution (LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone (DS200): Dot screen/High resolution (DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone (ED-8): Text section to be used together with the screens above. (ED-2): High compression 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray and press the START button to print a test pattern.
36 MODE 10. "Printer gamma offset adjustment screen" Press the key of a color (C or K) you want to adjust, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Note: There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3] provided for each line speed. Be sure to use by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into keys [1/2] and [1/3]. 11. Repeat steps 6 to 10 until the standard value is obtained. 12. Take notice of the gray gradation pattern [1] created in C, M and Y, make sure that the gray balance at the square marks line [2] and [3] is the same.
Y M C K
[1] [6]
8. Check the test pattern that has been outputted. Make sure that the high light density starting section of C and K is uniform, and even between the gray reference lines [1].
[5] [4] [2]
[3]
8050fs1016
[1]
Y M C K
8050fs1015
9. When they are not even, press the C button while pressing the P button.
2-83
II ADJUSTMENT
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered
36 MODE 13. When the gray balance is not the same, press the key of a color (Y or M) you want to adjust, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 (lighter) to +127 (darker) Note: There are three keys: [1/1], [1/2] and [1/3] provided for each line speed. Be sure to use
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) Printer gamma sensor adjustment When a poor color reproduction results even after the automatic gamma adjustment, conduct this adjustment to correct gradation. The printer gamma correction that is carried out automatically and periodically uses a gamma sensor to read patterns on the transfer belt. So, there is a possibility of the gamma sensor not being accurately adjusted due to the change in characteristic of the gamma sensor. This adjustment use the scanner to correct the gamma sensor for accurate printer gamma adjustment. This adjustment can be shown in the key operator mode by setting the DIPSW12-1 to 1. a. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
the key [1/1] for adjustment. A value entered by the key [1/1] is automatically inputted into keys [1/2] and [1/3]. How to match the gray balance Take notice of the gray patches [4] made up of 49 colors of C, M and Y. In the 49 patches, M gets darker as going right to left. And Y gets darker as going down from up. However, C is fixed. The patch [5] at the center is the same color as the gray [2]. The patches [6] positioned at the four corners of the patch [5] is the same color as the gray [3]. Out of the 49 patches, select a gray of the same gray balance as the gray [6]. e.g.) When a patch on the lower right side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the positive direction. When a patch on the upper left side is more suitable than the patch [5] at the center: Adjust M and Y in the negative direction. 14. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 15. Set A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray and press the START button to print a test pattern. 16. Repeat steps 13 to 15 until you can get a satisfactory result. 17. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma sensor adj.] key.
2-84
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. "Printer gamma sensor adj. (LS200) screen" For the printer gamma sensor adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select an item you want to adjust. "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS200)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (LS150)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS200)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (DS150)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (CONTONE)" "Printer gamma sensor adjustment (ED)" The following shows the copy mode to which each adjustment is reflected: (LS200): Line screen/High resolution (LS150): Line screen/Smooth tone (DS200): Dot screen/High resolution (DS150): Dot screen/Smooth tone (CONTONE): Text section to be used together with the screens above. (ED): High compression Note: A screen in which the screen selection is turned off by the key operator mode-memory switch is not displayed. 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. With the A4 (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11 (for inch machine) paper set in the by-pass tray, press the START button to output a test pattern.
36 MODE 8. "Please load output paper ... screen" After completion of the test pattern output, the display returns automatically to the adjustment scren. The outputted test pattern [1] pressed securely against the original positioning plate /L [3] and the original positioning plate /R [4], set it to the original glass. Note: Put the green triangular mark [2] on the left side.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1017
9. With 10 sheets of copy paper (white) placed on the test chart, close the RADF or platen cover. Note: Be sure to use white copy paper. Otherwise, the printer gradation cannot be corrected properly. 10. Press the [Start] key. Note: Start cannot be made when paper is not set in the by-pass tray. 11. When the chart is scanned with no problem found, the gamma sensor is adjusted, the printer gamma correction is made and a message "Complete" is displayed.
2-85
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 12. If any trouble should be found, an error code is displayed for each cause. Repair the error referring to the below. Error 1: Improper positioning of the chart. Error 2: The setting direction of a chart is upside down. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 3: A chart pattern cannot be detected. A different type of chart. Error 4: Adjustment is impossible. Software bugged. Error 5: Not within the standard value. Re-adjust it. Error 6: Nonvolatile data abnormality. Check the installation of memory board. Error 7: Memory other than those specified is accessed. Software bugged. Error 8: Memory related error. Software bugged. Error 9: Program errorSoftware bugged. Error 10: The chart is skew. Improper positioning of the chart. Error 11: Image header information read error. Software bugged. Error 12: RGB data abnormality. Chart is wrong, or software is bugged. Error 13: Argument set error. Software bugged. Error 31: Sensor value abnormality - Re-adjust it. Error 51: Regression calculation abnormality Re-adjust it. Error 52: Array number overflow - Software bugged. Error 53: Regression order abnormality - Software bugged. Error 54: Selected screen information abnormality - Software bugged. Error 55: Color information abnormality - Software bugged. 13. "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen" Press the [Adj. data reset] key if you want to return to the factory default data. Press the [YES] key to reset the adjusted printer gamma sensor data and return to the factory default data. Press the [NO] key to return to the "Printer gamma sensor adj. screen" without data reset.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 14. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen."
(3) Printer screen gradation adjustment Adjust a tone jump (in which gradation is not continuous). a. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Printer gamma adjustment] key. 4. "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen" Press the [3. Printer screen gradation adj.] key. 5. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y) screen" For the printer screen gradation adjustment, the following items are provided. "Printer screen gradation adj. (Y)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (M)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (C)" "Printer screen gradation adj. (K)" 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Set the A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper in the by-pass tray and press the START button to output a test pattern. 8. Five sheets of test pattern are automatically outputted. Check them to see if there is a tone jump found in them. 9. When a tone jump is found in them, press the C button while pressing the P button. 10. "Printer screen gradation adj." Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a color in which a tone jump has occurred.
2-86
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 11. Enter one less numeric value than the current and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -3 to +1 12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the tone jump disappears. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Printer gamma adjustment menu screen." 7.4.3 Sharpness adjustment
36 MODE
Conduct the sharpness adjustment or, this is carried out when moire reproduced. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the sharpness adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [3. Sharpness adjustment] key. 4. "Sharpness adjustment menu screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (soft/less moire) to +5 (sharp/ more moire) 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
2-87
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE 7.4.4 Contrast adjustment Adjust the contrast. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the contrast adjustment in the user mode.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.4.5 Image judge adjustment Adjust the threshold value of the original image judgement. A. Procedure
A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen"
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [4. Contrast adjustment] key. 4. "Contrast adjustment menu screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass.
Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen" For the image judge adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Dot detect adjustment] [2. Color text adjustment] [3. Dot/Text area adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return 7. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (contrast increased) to +5 (contrast reduced) 8. Repeat steps 4 to 7 until it becomes suitable. 9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen." (1) Dot detect adjustment Adjust the dot discrimination threshold value of the original image. a. Procedure from each of the adjustment screens to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen" Press the [1. Dot detect adjustment] key. 5. "Dot detect adjustment R screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
2-88
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A dot detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot. White section: Discriminated as a picture. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. a. Procedure (2) Color text adjustment
36 MODE
Adjust the color text discrimination threshold value of the original image. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the color text adjustment in the user mode.
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" 9. "Dot detect adjustment R screen" For the dot detection adjustment, the following items are provided: [Dot detect adjustment R] [Dot detect adjustment G] [Dot detect adjustment B] 10. Select a color you want to adjust as necessary, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (dot area reduced) to +5 (dot area increased) 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen." 4. "Image judge adjustment menu screen" Press the [2. Color text adjustment] key. 5. "Color text screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A color text detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Color text screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (color text area reduced) to +5 (color text area increased) 10. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen." Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key.
2-89
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
36 MODE (3) Dot/Text area adjustment Adjust the dot discrimination and text discrimination threshold values of the original image. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the letter adjustment in the user mode. a. Procedure
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.4.6 ACS adjustment Conduct this adjustment when the ACS (Auto color selection) does not function properly. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality adjustment menu screen" Press the [6. ACS adjustment] key. 4. "Set the chart and push [SCAN] screen" With an original in which the ACS does not function properly set to the original glass, press the [SCAN] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [5. Image judge adjustment] key. 4. "Image judge adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Dot/Text adjustment] key. 5. "Dot/Text adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. A dot and text detection pattern is outputted. This output pattern shows how the original image is discriminated as an image. Cyan section: Discriminated as a dot. White section: Discriminated as a picture. Black section: Discriminated as a black text. Magenta section: Discriminated as a color text.
5. In the "JUDGE," the result of the ACS is shown as "COLOR" or "MONOCHROME." 6. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (MONOCHROME) to +5 (COLOR) 7. Repeat steps 4 to 6 until it becomes suitable. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Dot/Text area adjustment screen" 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (dot area and text area increased) to +5 (dot area increased and text area reduced) 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until it becomes suitable. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image judge adjustment menu screen."
2-90
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.4.7 Density adjustment Adjust the AE (AES) density, copy density and the background density. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" For the density adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. AE (AES) adjustment] [2. Copy density adjustment] [3. Background adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screens to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen." a. Procedure (2) Copy density adjustment Adjust the copy density.
36 MODE 6. A numeric value is shown in the "RESULT." 7. When the adjustment result is other than 0, enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key (e.g.: if the adjustment result is 2, input -2). Setting range: -5 to +5 8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until the adjustment result
9. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the density shift function in the user mode.
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
(1) AE (AES) adjustment Conduct this adjustment when you want to change the center value selected by the AE (Auto density selection) in the user mode. a. Procedure
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Copy density adjustment] key. 5. "Copy density adjustment screen" For the copy density adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select an item you want to adjust. "Text/Photo (Full color)" "Photo (Full color)" "Text (Full color)" "Map (Full color)" "Text/Photo (Mono color)" "Photo (Mono color)" "Text (Mono color)" "Map (Mono color)" "Text/Photo (Monochrome)" "Photo (Monochrome)" "Text (Monochrome)" "Map (Monochrome)"
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. AE (AES) adjustment] key. 5. With a chart in which you want to change the AE density set to the original glass, press the [SCAN] key.
2-91
II ADJUSTMENT
becomes 0.
36 MODE 6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test chart set to the original glass, press the START button. a.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen"
8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker)
Press the [7. Density adjustment] key. 4. "Density adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Background adjustment] key. 5. "Background adjustment screen"
II ADJUSTMENT
10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
For the background adjustment, the following items are provided. Press the arrow key to select an item you want to adjust. "Text/Photo (Full color)" "Photo (Full color)" "Text (Full color)" "Map (Full color)" "Text/Photo (Mono color)" "Photo (Mono color)" "Text (Mono color)" "Map (Mono color)" "Text/Photo (Monochrome)" "Photo (Monochrome)" "Text (Monochrome)" "Map (Monochrome)"
(3) Background adjustment Adjust the copy background density. The background adjustment in the user mode only supports the batch adjustment. It is not possible to adjust the background for each color mode or original mode.
6. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 7. Select a mode you want to adjust and then select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper. With the test chart set to the original glass, press the START button. 8. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 10. Repeat steps 6 to 9 until it becomes suitable. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Density adjustment mode menu screen."
2-92
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.4.8 Tone adjustment Conduct the tone adjustment of red, green or blue. Use this adjustment for changing the center value for the tone adjustment in the user mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" For the tone adjustment, the following items are provided: [1. Red adjustment] [2. Green adjustment] [3. Blue adjustment] 5. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 6. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return from each of the adjustment screen to the "Image quality mode menu screen." (2) Green adjustment Adjust the density of green. a. Procedure
36 MODE 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality adjustment menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
(1) Red adjustment Adjust the density of red. This adjustment is not reflected to the IP. a. Procedure
4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Green adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen."
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key. 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Red adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
2-93
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (3) Blue adjustment Adjust the density of blue.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.4.9 Recall standard data Reset the adjustment values of image quality
a.
Procedure
adjustment to the standard data. (factory default data)
1. Enter the 36 mode. Note: 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key. Data for the scanner gamma adjustment and the printer gamma sensor adjustment cannot be reset to standard data. A. Procedure 4. "Tone adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Blue adjustment] key. 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper and press the START button with a test chart set to the original glass. 7. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys as necessary, and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -5 (lighter) to +5 (darker) 9. Repeat steps 6 to 8 until it becomes suitable. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Image quality mode menu screen." 3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [9. Recall standard data] key. 4. "Recall standard data: Image quality adj. screen" Press the [YES] key when recalling the standard date. Pressing the [NO] key or [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key returns to the [Image quality mode menu screen] without recalling the standard data. 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [3. Image quality adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Image quality mode menu screen" Press the [8. Tone adjustment] key.
2-94
36 MODE 7.5.1 Setting method A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [4. Running test mode] key. 3. "Running test mode menu screen"
7.5
tion.
Running test mode
Conduct a test while in the continuous copy operaSelect [4. Running test mode] in the 36 mode menu screen to show the running mode menu screen. For this adjustment, the following items can be selected: A. Intermittent copy mode After completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the same operation. B. Paperless running mode Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. In the same manner as the intermittent copy mode, after completion of the copy operation for the set copy count, the copier changes into the copy ready state and waits for 0.5 sec. before resuming the same operation. C. Paperless mode Without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. D. Paperless endless mode The copier operates with the copy count infinitely set automatically. In the same manner as the paperless mode, without detecting paper or jam, the copy operation is made nearly at the same timing as the normal copy operation. E. Running mode The copy operation is made in the paperless endless mode plus the scanner each-time scan and the auto paper feed tray switching.
4. "Basic screen" Press the [Start] key. 5. After confirmation of the copy operation, press the STOP button and turn OFF the main switch (SW2).
2-95
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the mode key of one of the modes 1 to 5.
36 MODE
7.6
Test pattern output mode
Output various test patterns to separate abnormalities. Select [5. Test pattern output mode] in the 36 mode screen to show "Test pattern output mode screen." Note: As for modes specifically not given in the
II ADJUSTMENT
SHB, be sure not to output test patterns. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Test pattern output mode] key. 3. "Test pattern output mode screen" After entering an output pattern number through the numeric keys, press the [SET] key. 4. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. "Basic screen" Select the A3 or 11 x 17 paper, and press the START button to output a test pattern. 6. When outputting another test pattern, repeat steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with the P button being pressed at the same time. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
2-96
36 MODE
No.1 Overall halftone

[Check Items] When the density is set to 70 (halftone) When there are image stripes or uneven density found, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended checkpoints]: Developing unit, cleaning unit and transfer belt unit. When the density is set to 0 (white) When there is image foggy back ground, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, and high voltage contact. When the density is set at 255 (Y, M, C, K) When the density is light, check the printer system for any abnormality. [Recommended check point]: Write unit * For information about setting the density, see "7.7 Test pattern density setting."
Test Pattern When the density is set to 70 When the density is set to 0 When the density is set to 255
8050fs1019
2-97
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE
No.11 Beam check

[Check Items 1] For development and analysis of the write unit [Check Items 2] Check the solid black pattern [1] to see if there is uneven density found in the main scanning and subscanning directions. [Recommended checkpoints]: Charging corona, developing unit, transfer belt unit, and 2nd transfer unit [Check Items 3] Check to see if there is any image repelling in the gradation pattern [2] at the leading/trailing edge of the test pattern in the feed direction. [Recommended checkpoint]: Transfer/separation corona unit
II ADJUSTMENT
Test Pattern
[1]
[2]
8050fs1020
[1] Solid black pattern
[2] Gradation pattern
2-98
36 MODE
No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern

[Check Items] Judge from this test pattern which of the scanner system and the printer system is abnormal. Items that can be checked include horizontal magnification, vertical magnification, skew, and leading edge timing, etc. of the printer system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
Test Pattern
[1]
30mm 237mm 20mm
[1]
205.7mm
28
0m
190mm
190mm
190mm
8050fs1021
[1] Edge of paper
2-99
II ADJUSTMENT
28 0m m
36 MODE
7.7
Test pattern density setting
7.8
Finisher adjustment
Set the density of the test pattern. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [6. Test pattern density setting] key.
Adjusting the FNS, PI, PK, TU. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" [1. Stitch & Fold stopper adj.] [2. Fold stopper adjustment] [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] [4. Trimming stopper adjustment] [5. Punch adjustment] [6. Three-Fold position adj.] [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Test pattern density setting-Y screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] key or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select one of the colors: "Y, M, C and K" that you want to adjust. 4. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 0 (lighter) to 255 (darker) 5. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return 6. "Basic screen" Select the paper size and press the START button to output a test pattern. 7. When outputting another test pattern, repeat steps 3 to 5 while pressing the C button with the P button being pressed at the same time. 8. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] to return to the "36 mode menu screen." from each of the adjustment screen to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
2-100
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.8.1 Stitch and fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only)
36 MODE 7.8.2 Fold stopper adjustment (FN-9 only) Adjusting the fold position when stitch and fold or
Adjusting the stapling position when stitch and fold mode.
folding mode. A. Procedure
A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Stitch and Fold stopper adj.] key. 4. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the paper center and folding position. 6. Check the paper center and stapling position. Standard value: 1mm 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Fold stopper adjustment screen" 8. "Stitch and Fold stopper adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen." obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen." Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm Standard value: 1mm 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. and press the START button. Press the [2. Fold stopper adjustment] key. 4. "Fold stopper adjustment (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key.
2-101
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "36 mode menu screen"
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
36 MODE 7.8.3 Cover sheet tray size adjustment (Cover Inserter D only)
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.8.4 Trimming stopper adjustment (TMG-3 only) Adjusting the trimming amount.
This adjustment should be performed when the cover sheet tray size cannot be detected properly and when centring adjustment for cover sheet tray is performed. A. Procedure A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [4. Trimming stopper adjustment] key. 4. "Trimming stopper adjustment (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF and press the START button. 6. Check the trimming amount. Standard value: 2.5 to 4.5 mm Note: Setting a trimming amount of 2.5mm or less may cause a trimming error. 7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "Trimming stopper adjustment screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired
8050fs1022
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [3. Cover sheet tray size adj.] key. 4. Set a A4R (for metric machine) or 8.5 x 11R (for inch machine) paper on the cover sheet tray (upper/lower) [1] and press the [Start] key. A complete message appears on the screen.
[1]
paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1 mm 10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is obtained. 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment menu mode screen."
5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment menu screen."
2-102
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.8.5 Punch adjustment (PK-5 only) This adjusts the punch vertical positions, punch horizontal positions, and punch registration loop amount. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 3. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Punch adjustment includes the following items: [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] [2. Punch kit horizontal pos. adj.] [5. Punch registration loop adj.] 4. Press the key of an item you want to adjust. 5. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return each adjustment screen to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
36 MODE (1) Punch kit vertical position adjustment (PK-5 only) Adjusting the punch vertical position. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [1. Punch kit vertical pos. adj.] key. 5. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. (A3) screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 7. Check the punch vertical position. 8. When the value is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing down the P button. 9. "Punch kit ver. pos. adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 until the value is appropriate. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen."
2-103
II ADJUSTMENT
36 MODE (2) Punch kit horizontal position adjustment (PK-5 only) Adjusting the punch horizontal position. a. Procedure a. 1. Enter the 36 mode.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (3) Punch registration loop adjustment Adjusting the registration loop amount for the reversed paper exit, the ADU paper exit (straight exit) and cover sheet upper/lower. Procedure
1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key. 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [2. Punch kit Horizontal pos. adj.] key. 5. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 6. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 7. Check the position of punch holes. Specification (Length between the edge of paper and the center of punch hole): 10.5mm (2 holes/4 holes/swedish 4 holes), 9.5mm (3 holes/inch 2 holes) 8. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button. 9. "Punch kit horizontal position adj. screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 10. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -50 to +50, 1 step = 0.1mm 11. Repeat steps 5 to 9 until the value is obtained. 12. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch adjustment mode menu screen." 4. "Punch adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch registration loop adj.] key. 5. Press [1. Punch registration loop adj. (main body)] key. or [2. Punch registration loop adj. (PI)] key. 6. "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select the item to be adjusted. The screen changes as follows; reverse ADU or upper tray lower tray. 7. Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 8. Press the START button to make a copy. 9. Check the punch registration loop amount. 10. When the value is not appropriate, press the C button while pressing the P button. 11. "Punch registration loop adj. screen" Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -20 to +20, 1 step = 0.8mm 12. Repeat steps 6 to 11 until the value is appropriate. 13. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Punch registration loop adj. menu screen." 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [5. Punch adjustment] key.
II ADJUSTMENT
2-104
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7.8.6 Three-folding adjustment (FN-9 only) Adjusting the folding positions during the threefolded copy. a. Procedure
36 MODE 8. "Three-Fold adjustment screen" Press the [NEXT ADJUSTMENT] or [PREVIOUS ADJUSTMENT] key to select a desired paper size. 9. Enter a numeric value through the numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: -128 to +127, 1 step = 0.1mm
obtained. 3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [6. Three-fold position adj.] key. 4. "Three-Fold adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the three-folded position "a." Note: See "9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS" to adjust the folded positions "b" and "c." 11. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
c a
8050fs1023
Folded positions a b c
Standard value A4R 95 mm 101 mm 101 mm 8.5 x 11R 89.4 mm 95 mm 95 mm
Specification 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm
7. When the value is not within the standard, press the C button while pressing the P button.
2-105
II ADJUSTMENT
Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
10. Repeat steps 4 to 9 until the standard value is
36 MODE 7.8.7 2 positions staple pitch adjustment Adjusting the pitch of the 2 positions staple. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [7. Finisher adjustment] key.
7.9
List output mode
Output a variety of data. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 36 mode. 2. "36 mode menu screen" Press the [8. List output mode] key. 3. "List output mode menu screen" List output mode items are as follows: [1. Machine management list 1] [2. Adjustment data list] [3. Page fill data list] [4. Machine management list 2] [5. Parameter list] [6. Memory dump list] [7. Font pattern] Note: Setting DPSW 30-1 to 1, [4. Machine management list 2] and later appear.
II ADJUSTMENT
3. "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen" Press the [7. 2 positions staple pitch adj.] key. 4. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen" Press the [COPY SCREEN] key. 5. Set paper in the tray, set originals on RADF, and press the START button. 6. Check the pitch of the 2 positions staple.
4. Press the key of an item you want to output. 5. Select A4 or 8.5 x 11 paper and press the
8050fs1024
START button. 6. Press the C button while pressing the P button. 7. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "36 mode menu screen."
7. When changing the dimension A, press the C button while pressing the P button. 8. "2 positions staple pitch adjustment screen" Enter a value with numeric keys and press the [SET] key. Setting range: 120 to 160, 1 step: 1mm 9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until the dimension A is appropriate. 10. Press the [PREVIOUS SCREEN] key to return to the "Finisher adjustment mode menu screen."
2-106
47 MODE
8. 47 MODE
8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method
5. Input check result will appear in the input check result display area. 6. Repeat steps 2 to 5 to perform the other signal input check. *1 See "8.5 Input check list".
A. 47 Mode This mode provides self-diagnostic functions (input/ output check function) to check and adjust the various signals and loads. B. Operation method for 47 mode (1) Starting 47 mode a. Turn off the main switch (SW2). b. c. Turn on the SW2 while holding down 4 and 7 of the numeric keys. The 47 mode is activated if the moment "I/O check mode" is displayed in the message display area at the center of the screen. "47 mode menu screen"
(3) Output check method Follow the following procedure. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Enter the output check code with the numeric keys. *2 3. Press the P button when using the multi mode. 4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys.* 2 5. Press the [Start] key to perform the output check. 6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output
[2] [1] [3]

[1] [2] [3] [4]
check.
[4]
8050fs1001
Input/Output check code Multi code Input check Output check
7. Repeat steps 2 to 6 to check other signal output check. *2 See "8.6 Output check list".
(4) Exiting from the 47 mode Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
(2) Input check method Follow the following procedure. a. Procedure
1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Enter the input check code with the numeric keys. *1 3. Press the P button when using the multi mode. 4. Enter the multi code with the numeric keys. *1
2-107
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE
8.2
Adjustment data display
8.3
Hard disk check
Lists the adjustment values of the machine (factoryset values and current values). No adjustment value can be changed in this mode. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 47 mode.
Perform this operation if you want to check the HDD total capacity, the HDD remaining capacity, and the error code related to HDD. A. Procedure 1. Enter the 47 mode. 2. "47 mode menu screen" Press "99" with the numeric keys. Check that "99-00" appears in the message display area. 3. Press the P button. 4. Enter one of the followings with the numeric keys. Check that "99-xx" (xx represents the input number) appears in the message display area. 01: HDD total capacity check 02: HDD remaining capacity check 03: HDD bad sectors check and recovery 5. Press the [Start] key. At checking the total capacity: the total capacity is displayed At checking the remaining capacity: the remaining capacity is displayed At checking and recovering the bad sectors: During the operation-"NOW" appears The operation succeeded-"OK" appears The operation failed-"NG" appears Press the [Start] key to perform the HDD bad sectors check and recovery again when "NG" appears. 6. Press the [STOP] key to exit from the output check. 7. Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode. Note: The operation can not be canceled during the HDD bad sectors check and recovery (the [STOP] button or the [Change Mode] key are disabled). The hard disk is vulnerable to vibrations and physical shocks. Be sure to remove the hard disk when you move the main body.
II ADJUSTMENT
2. "47 mode menu screen" Press "94" with the numeric keys. Check that "94-00" appears in the message display area. 3. Press the [Start] key. 4. Press the [STOP] key at the lower right corner of the screen. 5. Turn off the main switch (SW2) to exit from the 47 mode. Note: Turn off the SW2 to exit from the 47 mode.
2-108
47 MODE
8.4
Input check list

Multi code 0 1 2 01 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 HV2 03 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 HV2 PS11 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K 04 05 06 0 1 2 6 0 1 2 3 Name Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside humidity) Temp/humidity sensor (machine-inside temperature) Temp detection board Remaining toner detection sensor /Y Remaining toner detection sensor /M Remaining toner detection sensor /C Remaining toner detection sensor /K Waste toner door sensor Waste toner full sensor High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) One or more High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) color is abnormal High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y, M, C, K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer K) High voltage unit/2 (separation) High voltage unit/2 (separation) Gamma sensor Gamma sensor Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K Abnormal Normal Abnormal Normal Abnormal Normal Box FULL Abnormal No box EMPTY Normal Display and signal source 001 0 to 255 000
Classification Symbol Code High voltage, TEMP/ analog signal HUM TEMP/ HUM TDB TLD Y TLD M TLD C TLD K PS53 PS52 HV1 00
Normal
0 to 255
2-109
II ADJUSTMENT
0 to 255 Toner No toner
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code High voltage, analog signal HV2 07 Multi code 4 5 6 7 HV2 08 0 1 2 3 HV1 09 4 0 1 2 Paper feed, conveyance PS31 PS37 PS43 PS47 PS108 PS32 PS38 PS44 PS102 to 105 PS33 PS34 PS39 PS40 PS45 PS46 PS48 PS49 VR1 VR2 VR3 VR4 PS30 PS36 PS42 PS25 PS109 17 16 14 13 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 Paper size /S1 Paper size /L1 Paper size /S2 Paper size /L2 Paper size /S3 Paper size /L3 Paper size /SBP Paper size /LBP Paper sizeVR /1 Paper sizeVR /2 Paper sizeVR /3 Paper sizeVR /BP Tray upper limit sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP Upper limit sensor (C-208) Tray set detection /1 Tray set detection /2 Tray set detection /3 12 11 3 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Display and signal source 001 High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) Abnormal 000 Normal
High voltage unit/2 (2nd transfer)
Abnormal
Normal
II ADJUSTMENT
High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) No paper sensor /1 No paper sensor /2 No paper sensor /3 No paper sensor /BP No paper sensor (C-208) Remaining paper sensor /1 Remaining paper sensor /2 Remaining paper sensor /3 Remaining paper sensor /1 to /4 (C-208)
Abnormal
Normal
Paper
No paper
Paper
No paper
0 to 7 Paper No paper
0 to 255
Upper limit Not at upper limit
Upper:1, lower:2, middle:0 Yes No
2-110
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code Paper feed, conveyance PS29 PS35 PS41 PS26 PS106 PS107 PS23 PS20 PS27 PS28 PS22 PS50 PS13 PS19 PS21 PS12 PS30 PS36 PS41 PS25 PS101, PS109 PS24 24 23 20 19 Multi code 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 PS18 PS51 PS54 PS14 PS100 PS115 SW100 M41 28 25 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 Front door open/close sensor Vertical conveyance door open/close sensor Toner supply door open/close sensor Toner supply unit open/close sensor Fixing unit set detection Top cover open/close sensor1 (C-208) Front door open/close sensor (C-208) Tray down switch (C-208) Paper feed motor Installed Open ON Abnormal Open Pre-registration sensor /1 Pre-registration sensor /2 Pre-registration sensor /3 By-pass conveyance sensor Feed sensor (C-208) Paper feed sensor (C-208) ADU pre-registration sensor Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 Registration sensor Vertical conveyance sensor Paper exit sensor Reverse paper exit sensor ADU paper reverse sensor Paper exit full sensor Tray upper limit sensor /1 Tray upper limit sensor /2 Tray upper limit sensor /3 Tray upper limit sensor /BP Lower limit sensor (C-208) Upper limit sensor (C-208) 2nd transfer HP sensor Paper ADU conveyance sensor Paper Name
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 Paper 000 No paper
No paper
No paper
Other than full Upper limit Other than upper limit
Full
Upper limit:1, lower limit:2, middle:0 Home position Other than home position Close
Not installed Close OFF Normal
2-111
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Light PS1 30 Multi code 0 Scanner HP sensor Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Display and signal source 001 Home position Paper OPEN Abnormal 000 Other than home position No paper CLOSE Normal
PS3 PS4 PS2 M3 32
1 2 3 0 1 2 3 4
APS detection sensor /S APS detection sensor /L APS timing sensor Polygon motor /Y (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /M (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /C (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /K (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal rotation detection) Polygon motor /Y (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /M (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /C (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /K (abnormal temperature detection) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (abnormal temperature detection) Index sensor /Y Index sensor /M Index sensor /C Index sensor /K Index sensor /Y, /M, /C, /K
II ADJUSTMENT
M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 INDX SB Y INDX SB M INDX SB C INDX SB B INDX SB Y, M, C, K PS5, PS6, PS7 PS5 PS6 PS7 35 33
One or more colors are abnormal Abnormal
Normal
5 6 7 8 9
Normal
0 1 2 3 4 5 0
One or more colors are abnormal Abnormal
Normal
Normal
One or more colors are abnormal
Normal
Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C
1 2 3
Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C
Edge Edge detected undetected from one or more color Edge Edge detected undetected
2-112
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code Light PS5, PS6, PS7 PS5 PS6 PS7 PS5, PS6, PS7 PS5 PS6 PS7 PS8 PS9 LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K PS1 38 36 37 9 10 11 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Scanner HP sensor Home position Abnormal 5 6 7 8 Laser correction HP sensor /Y Laser correction HP sensor /M Laser correction HP sensor /C Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C 35 Multi code 4 Laser correction HP sensor /Y, /M, /C Name
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 000 Edge Edge detected undetected from one or more color Edge Edge detected undetected Edge Edge detected undetected from one or more color Edge Edge detected undetected 0 to 255 0 to 255
Other than home position Normal
Main body
PS60, PS61 PS62, PS63 PS64, PS65 PS66, PS67 PS69, PS68 PS15
41
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Encoder sensor /Y1, /Y2
Encoder sensor /M1, /M2
Encoder sensor /C1, /C2
Encoder sensor /K1, /K2
Encoder sensor /belt 1, /belt 2
1st transfer HP sensor
Home position
Other than home position
2-113
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Main body M2 M42 M10 M48 M47 M43, M44, M45, M46 M24 M28, M27, M26 M12, M13 M11 M25 DCPS1 DCPS2 43 10 11 0 1 2 3 4 C (T) C (K) 5 6 Transfer belt cooling fan 9 Drum cooling fan /1, /2 7 8 IP cooling fan Paper exit fan /F, /M, /R 42 Multi code 0 2 3 4 5 6 Scanner cooling fan DCPS cooling fan Fixing cooling fan /1 Charger intake fan Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Display and signal source 001 Abnormal 000 Normal
Drum unit fan Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2
II ADJUSTMENT
ICP cooling fan DC power supply unit /1 (12VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC) Total counter Checking to see if the key counterequipped machine is provided with a key counter or not. Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /3 Fixing temperature sensor /2 Fixing temperature sensor /4 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /1 Fixing temperature sensor /2 TH1 correction temperature TH2 correction temperature TH1 correction temperature Fixing motor
Abnormal
Normal
Yes Yes
No No
TH1 TH3 TH2 TH4 TH1 TH1 TH2 M29
45
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2
0 to 255
47
Abnormal
Normal
PS16
3 4 5 9 10 11
Fixing pressure release sensor
Home position Abnormal
Other than home position Normal
M29
Fixing motor
2-114
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code Main body PS15 48 Multi code 0 1 2 3 Intrinsic functions PRCB M20 49 50 0 1 M21 3 4 5 M22 6 7 8 M23 9 10 TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K PCL Y PCL M PCL C PCL K TDS Y 54 51 11 12 13 14 15 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 TDS M 3 4 5 TDS C 6 7 8 TDS K 9 10 TDS Y TDS M TDS C TDS K 58 57 11 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 FN-120, FN-9 C-208 AFR-20 Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Connected Toner density sensor /K Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C Pre-charging lamp /K Toner density sensor /Y Abnormal Developing motor /K Developing motor /C Developing motor /M 2 Printer control board (drum motor control) Developing motor /Y 1st transfer HP sensor Name
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 Home position 000 Other than home position
Displays abnormal code Abnormal Normal
0 to 255
Normal
0 to 255
Unconnected
0 to 255
2-115
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Intrinsic functions AFR-20 PS17 PS304 PS301 PS302 PS305 PS306 59 60 Multi code 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 76 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Fixing paper exit sensor No paper sensor Registration sensor Timing sensor Reverse sensor Paper exit sensor Paper feed cover sensor Paper feed tray sensor Paper exit cover sensor AFR-20 open/close sensor Sub-tray paper exit sensor Tray upper limit sensor Tray lower limit sensor FNS entrance sensor Stacker entrance sensor Main tray paper exit sensor Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Display and signal source 001 Paper Paper 000 No paper No paper
II ADJUSTMENT
PS303 PS308 PS307 RS1 FN-120, FN-9 PS701 PS702 PS703 PS704 PS705 PS706 PS707
Open
Close
Paper
No paper
Upper limit Other than upper limit Lower limit Other than lower limit No paper Paper Paper No paper
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor
PS708
Alignment HP sensor /U
Other than Standby standby position position Home Other than position home position Other than home position Home position Home position Other than home position
PS709
Paper exit belt HP sensor
PS713 PS711 PS712
9 10 11
Stapler rotation HP sensor Stapler movement HP sensor Paper exit opening HP sensor
PS714
12
Clincher rotation HP sensor
Other than Close close posiposition tion Home Other than position home position Paper Other than home position Paper No staple Other than home position No paper Home position No paper Staple Home position
PS715 PS718
13 14
Counter reset sensor Shift HP sensor
PS720 SW702 PS730
15 16 17
Stacker no paper sensor Staple switch /R Stapler HP sensor /R
SW701
18
Cartridge switch /R
No cartridge Cartridge
2-116
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code FN-120, FN-9 M710 PS732 76 Multi code 19 20 21 Clincher motor /R Clincher HP sensor /R Name
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 Other than start Other than home position Full Front door opened No staple Other than home position Other than start Other than home position Other than control speed Connected Home position Other than home position Paper Full Other than control speed 000 Start Home position Other than full
PS719 MS701 SW704 PS731
22 23 24 25
Sub-tray full sensor FNS interlock switch Staple switch /F Stapler HP sensor /F
Home position
SW703 M715 PS733
26 27 28 29
Cartridge switch /F Clincher motor /F Clincher HP sensor /F
No cartridge Cartridge Start Home position Control speed Unconnected Other than home position Home position No paper Other than full Control speed
M707
30
Paper exit roller motor lock detection
PS722 PS723 PS724
31 32 33 34
FNS connection detection Folding knife HP sensor Stopper HP sensor Alignment HP sensor /L
PS725 PS726 PS729 M720
35 36 37 38 39
Folding exit sensor Folding passage sensor Folding full sensor Folding conveyance motor
40 41 42 43
2-117
II ADJUSTMENT
Front door closed Staple
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Cover Inserter D M203 76 Multi code 44 PI conveyance motor Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Display and signal source 001 000 Other than Control control speed speed Other than Single opersingle operation ation Paper Unconnected No paper No paper Connected Paper
45
DIPSW0
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78
PI passage sensor /U PI passage sensor /L Folding connection detection Gate HP sensor No sheet sensor /U Sheet set sensor /U Tray lower limit sensor /U Tray upper limit sensor /U Sheet feeder manual start/clear switch Sheet feeder manual punch button switch Sheet feeder manual function selection button switch PI interlock switch No sheet sensor /L Sheet set sensor /L Tray lower limit sensor /L Tray upper limit sensor /L Sheet size sensor /L
II ADJUSTMENT
PS201 PS206 FN-120, FN-9 PS716 Cover Inserter D PS202 PS203 PS205 PS204 MS201 PS207 PS208 PS210 PS209 PS212
Lower limit Other than lower limit Upper limit Other than upper limit Switch OFF Switch ON
Open No paper
Close Paper
Lower limit Other than lower limit Upper limit Other than upper limit
2-118
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code Cover Inserter D PK-5 PS801 76 Multi code 79 80 81 82 83 PI connection detection Punch HP sensor Name
47 MODE Display and signal source 001 Unconnected Other than home position Other than full Set No paper 000 Connected Home position Full Other than set Paper
PS802 PS804
84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92
Punch scraps full sensor Punch scraps box set sensor PK rocking End face detection 1 PK rocking End face detection 2 PK rocking End face detection 3 PK rocking End face detection 4 PK rocking End face detection 5 PK rocking Punch movement home position PK connection detection
PS803
93
Home position Unconnected
Other than home position Connected
94 95
2-119
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code TMG-3 PS101 PS102 PS103 PS104 PS105 77 Multi code 0 1 2 3 4 Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Display and signal source 001 Cutting entrance detection Cutting conveyance detection Cutting end stopper HP detection Cutting clear HP detection Cutting press HP detectin Paper Home position Other than home position Home position Paper 000 No paper Other than home position Home position Other than home position No paper
II ADJUSTMENT
PS106
Cutting knife upper limit HP detection
PS108 PS110 PS111 PS112
6 7 8 9
Cutting booklet discharge Holder board of upper limit detection Holder board of lower limit detection Pusher HP
Other than Upper limit upper limit Lower limit Other than lower limit Home position Open Locked Not set Other than full No paper Unconnected Other than home position Close Unlocked Other than set Full Paper Connected
PS114 MS2 PS107 PS109 PS113
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
Cutting stacker cover detection 24 V Cutting front door detection 24 V Cutting conveyance M lock signal under operation Cutting end scraps box set detection Cutting end scraps box full detection Cutting stucker full detection TU connection detection
2-120
47 MODE Do not output items with "x" in the "Cannot be set or change in the field" column. These items are only for the developping/manufucting process. Outputs of them may damage the machine.
8.5
Note:
Output check list
Do not output items which cannot be set or changed in the field and codes which are not described in the output check list." Classification Symbol Code High voltage, analog signal L1 M53, MC14 00 01 Multi code 0 0 1 2 M53, MC15 4 5 M53, MC16 7 8 M53, MC17 9 10 11 HV1 02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 6 3 Exposure lamp
Name
Cannot be set or changed in the field
Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle motor (low speed), toner bottle clutch /K Toner bottle motor (high speed), toner bottle clutch /K Toner bottle motor (nonvolatile value), toner bottle clutch /K High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K) High voltage unit /1 (charging /Y: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /M: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /C: for current measurement) High voltage unit /1 (charging /K: for current measurement) x x x x x x x x
2-121
II ADJUSTMENT
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code High voltage, analog signal HV2 03 Multi code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 L1 10 11 12 HV2 PS11 DRPS Y DRPS M DRPS C DRPS K HV2 07 04 06 0 1 2 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 08 0 1 2 3 4 5 HV1 09 0 1 2 3 15 1 2 98 Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Cannot be set or changed in the field High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y, /M, /C, /K) x x x x x
II ADJUSTMENT
High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /Y: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /M: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /C: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode) High voltage unit /2 (1st transfer /K: for current measurement at color mode) High voltage unit/2 (separation) High voltage unit /2 (separation, measurement) Gamma sensor Gamma sensor (for individual check) Drum potential sensor /Y Drum potential sensor /M Drum potential sensor /C Drum potential sensor /K High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning+output: for individual check) High voltage unit /2 (belt cleaning-output: for individual check) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output1: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output2: for current measurement) High voltage unit /2 (2nd transfer output3: for cleaning consideration)* High voltage unit /2 (guide plate) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /Y) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /M) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /C) High voltage unit /1 (developing bias /K) Counter reset Job memory clear RD mode setup
x x x x x x x x x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
2-122
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code Paper feed, conveyance SD7 SD8 SD9 SD5 SD100 MC7 MC9 MC11 MC6 MC101 MC8 MC10 MC12 MC102 M40 M39 M38 M35 M100 M34 24 23 22 21 20 Multi code 0 1 2 4 5 0 1 2 4 5 0 1 2 5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 M30 25 0 1 2 3 4 M31 26 0 1 2 M31 M33 27 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M41 M101 28 0 1 Pick up solenoid /1 Pick up solenoid /2 Pick up solenoid /3 Pick up solenoid /BP Paper feed solenoid (C-208) Paper feed clutch /1 Paper feed clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /BP Paper feed clutch (C-208) Pre-registration clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch (C-208) Tray up drive motor /1 Tray up drive motor /2 Tray up drive motor /3 Tray up drive motor /BP (down) Tray up drive motor /BP (up) UP/DOWN motor (C-208: down) UP/DOWN motor (C-208: up) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (continuous rotation) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (pressure) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (release) Registration motor (1/3 speed) Registration motor (1/2 speed) Registration motor (1/1speed) Registration motor (paper feed line speed) Registration motor (hard timer on: 1/1 speed) Loop roller motor (1/3 speed) Loop roller motor (1/2 speed) Loop roller motor (1/1speed) Loop roller motor (paper feed line speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/3 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/2 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:1/1 speed) Reverse/exit motor (normal rotation:3 times speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/3 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/2 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:1/1 speed) Reverse/exit motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed) Paper feed motor Paper feed motor (C-208) 2-123 Name
47 MODE Cannot be set or changed in the field
II ADJUSTMENT
Paper feed clutch /3
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Paper feed, conveyance MC13 MC4 MC5 SD1 M136, M137 SD6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 M3 M4 M5 M6 M3, M4, M5, M6 LDB Y LDB M LDB C LDB K LDB Y, M, C, K PS8 PS9 M1 37 38 34 36 3 4 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Main body ACDB 40 0 1 M14 41 0 33 0 1 2 3 4 32 29 Multi code 0 1 2 3 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Cannot be set or changed in the field Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 Transfer belt separating claw Paper feed assist fan /F, /R (C-208) ADU lock solenoid Polygon motor /Y (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /M (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /C (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /K (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (1/1 rotation) Polygon motor /Y (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /M (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /C (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Polygon motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (rotates at nonvolatile setting) Laser drive board /Y Laser drive board /M Laser drive board /C Laser drive board /K Laser drive board /Y, /M, /C, /K Shading correction Color registration sensor /F Color registration sensor /R LD alarm level detection all colors Scanner motor (back and forth drive 1: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 2: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 3: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 4: continuous) Scanner motor (back and forth drive 5: continuous) Scanner motor (HP search) Scanner motor(moves to the back scan position) Scanner motor (back scan AGS operation+scan operation: one operation) AC drive board (RL1 (main relay)ON) AC drive board (HTR1, 2 (HTR1, 2(heater/1, / 2)OFF) Drum motor /Y (1/3 speed)
II ADJUSTMENT
2-124
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code Multi code 1 2 M15 3 4 M16 5 6 7 8 M17 9 10 11 M18 12 13 14 15 M18 41 16 17 M2 M25 M42 M10, M36, M37 M48 M47 M43, M44, M45, M46 M24 M26, M27, M28 M12 M13 M11 T (C) T (BK) Main body T (K) DCPS2 L2, L3, L4 44 45 0 1 2 2-125 43 9 10 11 1 2 6 Drum cooling fan /1 Drum cooling fan /2 Transfer belt cooling fan Total counter Black counter Key counter DC power supply unit /2 (24VDC breaking) Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp 7 8 IP cooling fan Exhaust fan/R, /M, /F 4 5 6 Charger intake fan Drum unit fan Writing intake fan /1, /2, Writing exhaust fan /1, /2 42 0 1 2 3 Drum motor /Y (1/2 speed) Drum motor /Y (1/1speed) Drum motor /M (1/3 speed) Drum motor /M (1/2 speed) Drum motor /M (1/1speed) Drum motor /C (1/3 speed) Drum motor /C (1/2 speed) Drum motor /K (1/3 speed) Drum motor /K (1/2 speed) Drum motor /K (1/1speed) Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed) Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed) Transfer belt motor (1/1speed) Transfer belt motor (1/3 speed: for nip measurement) Transfer belt motor (1/2 speed: for nip measurement) Transfer belt motor (1/1 speed: for nip measurement) Scanner cooling fan IPB cooling fan DCPS cooling fan Fixing cooling fan /1, /3, /2 Name
x x x
II ADJUSTMENT
Drum motor /C (1/1speed)
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Multi code L2 L3 L4 L2, L3, L4 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 M29 47 0 1 2 3 4 5 M29 47 9 10 11 M29, L2, L3, L4 M54 M19 48 15 0 1 2 3 M18 49 0 1 2 3 4 5 Intrinsic functions M20 50 0 1 2 M21 3 13 Fixing motor (1/3 speed) Fixing motor (1/2 speed) Fixing motor (1/1speed) Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, Fixing lower lamp Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Cannot be set or changed in the field
II ADJUSTMENT
Fixing motor (reverse rotation: release operation on, full-time rotation) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the pressure position) Fixing motor (reverse rotation: moves to the release position) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/3 speed) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/2 speed) Fixing motor (pressure continuous rotation: 1/1 speed) Fixing motor, Fixing upper lamp/1, /2, fixing lower lamp (fixing roller pressure+all heater lamps on) Web motor 1st transfer pressure/release motor (full-time rotation) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at the release position) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at black and white pressure position) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (stops at color mode pressure position) Transfer belt motor (for checking photosensitive material control 1: 1/1 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 2: 1/2 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 3: 1/3 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 4: 1/1 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 5: 1/2 speed) 1st transfer pressure/release motor (for checking photosensitive material control 6: 1/3 speed) Developing motor /Y (1/1speed) Developing motor /Y (1/2 speed) Developing motor /Y (1/3 speed) Developing motor /M (1/1speed) 2-126 x x x x x x
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code Multi code 4 5 M22 6 7 M23 8 9 10 11 PCL Y PLC M PCL C PCL K PCL Y PCL M PLC C PCL K M49 54 52 51 51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0 1 2 3 4 5 0 1 2 M50 3 4 M51 5 6 7 8 M52 9 10 11 MC14 MC15 MC16 MC17 Intrinsic functions SD2 SD3 55 56 12 13 14 15 0 1 0 1 Developing motor /M (1/2 speed) Developing motor /M (1/3 speed) Developing motor /C (1/1speed) Developing motor /C (1/2 speed) Developing motor /C (1/3 speed) Developing motor /K (1/1speed) Developing motor /K (1/2 speed) Pre-charging lamp /Y Pre-charging lamp /M Pre-charging lamp /C Pre-charging lamp /K Pre-charging lamp /Y (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp //M (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp /C (turns on the control signal) Pre-charging lamp /K (turns on the control signal) L detection reference for all colors L detection reference for colors (Y, M, C) L detection reference for K L detection reference for Y L detection reference for M L detection reference for C Toner supply motor /Y (high speed) Toner supply motor /Y (low speed) Toner supply motor /Y (setting value) Toner supply motor /M (high speed) Toner supply motor /M (low speed) Toner supply motor /M (setting value) Toner supply motor /C (high speed) Toner supply motor /C (low speed) Toner supply motor /C (setting value) Toner supply motor /K (high speed) Toner supply motor /K (low speed) Toner supply motor /K (setting value) Toner bottle clutch /Y Toner bottle clutch /M Toner bottle clutch /C Toner bottle clutch /K Color registration shutter solenoid Gamma sensor shutter solenoid Indicator lamp (PAT1 on) Indicator lamp (PAT2 on) Name
x x x x x x
2-127
II ADJUSTMENT
Developing motor /K (1/3 speed)
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code Multi code 2 3 TDS Y TDS M TDS C AFR-20 TDS K M301 60 58 57 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 M302 7 8 9 10 11 12 M303 13 14 15 16 17 SD302 SD301 MC301 FN-120, FN-9 M701 M702 75 18 19 20 21 1 2 3 4 Indicator lamp (PAT3 on) Indicator lamp (PAT4 on) Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Cannot be set or changed in the field
FN-120, FN-9 connection check C-208 connection check AFR-20 connection check Toner density sensor /Y Toner density sensor /M Toner density sensor /C Toner density sensor /K Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec) Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec) Paper feed motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/ sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/ sec) Paper feed motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/ sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 300mm/ sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 400mm/ sec) Conveyance motor (normal rotation: 900mm/ sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/ sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/ sec) Conveyance motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/ sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 300mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 400mm/sec) Paper exit motor (normal rotation: 900mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 300mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 400mm/sec) Paper exit motor (reverse rotation: 900mm/sec) Reverse solenoid Paper exit solenoid Registration clutch FNS conveyance motor Shift motor (HP search) Shift motor (moves to the shift position) Shift motor ( rotation)
II ADJUSTMENT
2-128
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Symbol Code FN-120, FN-9 M703 75 Multi code 5 6 7 M705 M707 M708 M708 M709 M714 M711 M713 M718 M716 M719 M720 SD704 SD705 M705 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 24 31 32 33 34 35 M716 36 37 38 M718 TMG-3 M101 M102 M103 M104 39 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 M105 Cover Inserter MC202 D M202 SD202 M801 75 62 63 64 65 66 PK-5 67 78 Tray up/down motor (HP search) Tray up/down motor (down) Tray up/down motor (up) Alignment motor /U (HP search) Paper exit roller motor (HP search) Paper exit roller motor (reverse rotation) Paper exit opening motor (HP search) Stapler motor /R (initianl operation) Stapler motor /R (stapling) Stapler motor /F (initianl operation) Stapler motor /F (stapling) Stapler movement motor (HP search) Stapler movement motor (movement by size) Stacker entrance motor Stopper motor (HP search) Alignment motor /L Folding knife motor Folding conveyance motor Paper exit opening solenoid By-pass gate solenoid Alignment motor /U (open) Alignment motor /U (close) Alignment motor /U (rocking) Alignment motor /L (open) Alignment motor /L (close) Alignment motor /L (rocking) Stopper motor (moves to the A4R position) Conveyance motor Cutter motor (normal rotation) Cutter motor (reverse rotation) Stopper motor (HP search) Stopper release motor (HP search) Stopper release motor (release) Stopper release motor (set) Press motor (HP search) Press motor (press) Conveyance clutch /L Tray up/down motor /L (down) Tray up/down motor /L (up) Sheet feed solenoid /L Punch motor Name
2-129
II ADJUSTMENT
Paper exit opening motor (moves to opening)
47 MODE Classification Symbol Code M802 Cover Inserter MC201 D M201 SD201 M203 FN-120, FN-9 M712 Multi code 79 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 M721 M704 M706 SD706 ADU SD4 MC2 MC1 MC3 M32 84 80 81 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 99 0 1 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 M32 Others 97 98 99 84 94 9 0 1 2 1 2 3 Name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Cannot be set or changed in the field Punch shift motor (HP search) Conveyance clutch /U Tray up/down motor (down) Tray up/down motor (up) Sheet feed solenoid /U PI conveyance motor Gate drive motor (HP search) Gate drive motor (stacker direction switching) Gate drive motor (straight direction switching) Sub-tray paper exit motor Clincher rotation motor (HP search) Clincher rotation motor (skew shift) Stapler rotation motor (HP search) Stapler rotation motor (skew shift) Three-folding gate solenoid FNS paperless running mode Reverse/exit solenoid ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/3 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/2 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 1/1 speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: paper feed line speed) ADU reverse motor (forward rotation: 3 times speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/3 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/2 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: 1/1 speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation: paper feed line speed) ADU reverse motor (reverse rotation:3 times speed) Adjustment data display Illuminate all LEDs on the operation board Message display E-RDH (DRAM) capacity display E-RDH (DRAM) check HDD bad sectors check and recovery
II ADJUSTMENT
2-130
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
Caution: Make sure the power cord of the copier is unplugged from the power outlet
9.1
Paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment

II ADJUSTMENT [1] [3] [2]
8050fs1050
Perform the paper feed roller/BP pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the by-pass feed. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Install the piled plate [3] on the paper feed roller/ BP [2] with 2 screws [1]. 3. Replace the ADU. 4. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 5. Repeat steps 1 to 4 if the no feed jam continues to occur at the paper feed. Note: The weight plate is a supply part. It should be purchased separately. Up to 4 plates can be used at a time. Perform "9.3 Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass)" when the weight plate is added.
2-131
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.2
Paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled paper. Note:
II ADJUSTMENT
This adjustment affects the pick-up movement amount. When the adjustment is complete, perform "9.3 Pick-up adjustment (by-pass)". A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed solenoid cover [2]. movement amount
[1]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1051
2-132
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the tray upper limit sensor/BP (PS25) [2]. Note: Take note of the original scale. (1) If it is not within the standard value: Adjust the vertical position of the sensor mounting bracket to make the height of the entrance guide to be within the standard value. When raising the height of the up/down plate: lower the sensor mounting bracket. When lowering height of the up/down plate: lower the sensor mounting bracket. (2) If any problem occurs: When the edge of the fed paper is folded: raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket. When paper with a concave curl is fed: raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket. When paper with a convex curl is fed: lower the position of the sensor mounting bracket. 1. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover. 2. Replace the ADU. 3. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 4. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of PS25 again if the problem continues to occur.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
[1]
8050fs1052
2-133
II ADJUSTMENT
upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.3
Pick-up movement amount adjustment (by-pass)
Perform the pick-up movement amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the ADU. 2. Remove 6 screws [1] and remove the paper feed
II ADJUSTMENT
solenoid cover [2].
[1]
[2]
3. Loosen a screw [1] and adjust the position of the pick-up solenoid/BP (SD5) [2]. Note: Take note of the original scale. 4. Replace the paper feed solenoid cover. 5. Replace the ADU. 6. Perform the copy to check the paper feed operation. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 to adjust the position of SD5 again if the no feed jam continues to occur.
[1]
8050fs1053
[2]
[1]
8050fs1054
2-134
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.4
Paper feed tray /1 to /3 miscentering adjustment
Perform this adjustment when the mis-centering occurs even after "Printer-centering adjustment" in the 36 mode, has been performed. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the paper feed tray. 3. Move the guide plate and adjust the center position. 4. Tighten 3 screws [2]. 5. Print the test pattern (No.16).
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1055
6. Fold the output in half vertically and check whether the mis-centering [3] of the center of image [2] against the center of paper [1] is within the standard value. Standard value: 3 mm or less 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 until the mis-centering amount is within the standard value.
[2] [3] [1]
8050fs1056
2-135
II ADJUSTMENT
2. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the up/down plate [1].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.5
Paper feed tray/1 to /3 sheet feed pressure adjustment
Perform the sheet feed pressure adjustment when the no feed jam or the double feed jam occurs at the paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and the double feed is likely in the high tem-
II ADJUSTMENT
perature environment). Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom. A. Procedure 1. Pull out the paper feed tray [1]. 2. Remove 4 screws [2] and remove the paper feed unit cover [3].
[3]
[2]
[1] [2]
8050fs1057
2-136
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. Unplug the connector [1]. 4. Remove a screw [2] and loosen a hold-down shaft screw [3]. 5. Slide the paper feed unit [4] toward the rear side and lift it up. Then, unplug the connector [5] and remove the paper feed unit [4].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[3]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1058
6. Change the hook position of the spring [1] at the bottom of the paper feed unit. Weak[2]: Double feed jam is corrected. Strong [3]: No feed jam is corrected. 7. Replace the paper feed unit and the paper feed tray.
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1059
2-137
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.6
FNS adjustment of the bypass conveyance guide plate magnet
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Check whether the stopper piece [4] of the bypass conveyance guide plate is in contact with the by-pass conveyance guide plate/L [5] when
[1] [2]
[5]
[3]
II ADJUSTMENT
the magnet [2] for the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1] is attached to the front panel [3]. If not, perform the following adjustment.
[4] [1]
[5]
[2] [4]
8050fs1075
3. Loosen the magnet screw [1]. 4. Push the by-pass conveyance guide plate [2] toward the arrow until the stopper piece [4] comes into contact with the conveyance guide plate/L [4]. 5. Attach the magnet [5] to the front panel [6]. Then, tighten the magnet screw [1]. 6. Close the finisher door.
[2] [5] [6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
8050fs1076
2-138
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.7
FNS adjustment of the bypass gate
A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door. 2. Pull out the stacker unit [1]. 3. Remove 2 rail stopper screws [2]. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid FNS from falling, make sure to place a support [3] under the stacker unit.
[2] II ADJUSTMENT [1] [2] [3]

8050fs1077
4. Open the by-pass conveyance guide plate [1]. 5. Visually check whether the clearance between the by-pass gate [2] and the by-pass conveyance plate [3] is within the standard value when the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) is off. Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5 mm If not, perform the following adjustment.
[2] [1]
A=
3.2
0.5
mm
[3]
[2]
8050fs1078
2-139
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 6. Remove the rear cover. 7. Unplug all connectors [2] from the FNS control board (FNSCB) [1] and remove the wiring harness from the clamp [3]. 8. Remove 5 screws [4]. Then, remove the FNSCB [1] with the bracket [5].
[2]
[3] [4] [5]
II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
8050fs1079
9. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the by-pass gate solenoid (SD705) [1] and adjust the position of SD 705 [1] based on the mark [5] to make the clearance between the by-pass gate [3] and the bypass conveyance plate [4] to be within the standard value when SD705 [1] is off. Standard value: A = 3.2 0.5 mm 10. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[4]
A=
3.2
0.5
mm
[3] [2]
[5]
[1]
8050fs1080
2-140
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.8
FNS adjustment of the shift position
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts. Top cover or optional PI (if installed) Top cover/2 2. Turn on the main body, and then drive the shift motor (M702) in the 47 mode (code 75-2/75-3). 3. Check whether the edge of the actuator [5] for the slide gear is placed in the notched hole [3] at the slide stay [2] for the shift unit [1] for both the HP search (home position) and the shift position. If not, perform the following adjustment.
[3] [4]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1081
4. Loosen the bracket screw [2] for the shift HP sensor (PS718) and adjust the position of the bracket [4] based on the mark [3]. 5. Tighten the bracket screw [2] when the adjustment is complete. 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
8050fs1082
2-141
II ADJUSTMENT
[5]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.9
FNS adjustment of the paper exit opening solenoid
A. Procedure 1. Remove the following parts. 2. Top cover/1 or optional PI (if installed) Top cover/2 Rear cover Turn on the main body, and then turn on the paper exit opening solenoid (SD704) in the 47
II ADJUSTMENT
mode (code 75-31). 3. Check whether the clearance between the plunger [2] on the solenoid and the stopper [3] on the bracket is within the standard value when SD704 [1] is on. Standard value: A = 6.5 0.5 mm If not, perform the following adjustment.
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
[2]
8050fs1083
4. Remove 2 solenoid bracket screws [1] and remove the solenoid [2] with the bracket [3].
[1]
[2]
[3]
8050fs1084
2-142
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Loosen 2 solenoid screws [1], adjust the position of the solenoid [2], and then tighten the screws. Standard value: A = 6.5 0.5 mm
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
A=6.5 0.5mm
[1]
8050fs1085
6. Replace the solenoid bracket [1] and tighten the solenoid bracket screws [5] at the position where the paper exit guide [2] is in contact with the stopper (rubber) [4] on the paper exit guide stay [3]. Note: There should be the gap of 1 mm or more between the paper exit guide [2] and the paper exit guide stay [3].
[1] [4]
[5]
[3] [2]
[3]
7. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
1mm
[2]
8050fs1086
2-143
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.10 FNS adjustment of the position of paper exit arm

A. Procedure 1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 2. Check whether the upper face of the paper exit belt arm [4] is located at the center of 2 marks [5] when the edge of the actuator [2] for the belt
[3]
II ADJUSTMENT
detection gear [1] is placed in the notched hole [3] at the rear panel. If not, perform the adjustment. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further.
[2]
Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit.
[1]
[4]
[5]
8050fs1087
2-144
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 4. Remove a screw [2] for the belt detection gear [1]. Place the paper eject belt arm at the specified position. Then, fix the detection gear [1] at the specified position. 5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[2]
8050fs1088
2-145
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.11 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/U

A. Procedure 1. Turn on the main body. Once the finisher completes its initial operation, turn off the main body. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker
II ADJUSTMENT
unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Check whether the actuator [2] for the alignment HP sensor/U (PS708) [1] is aligned with the home position.
[1] [2]
8050fs1089
5. Check whether the clearance A for the alignment plate/U [1] is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in) If not, perform the following adjustment.
A=340.6 mm
[1]
PS708
8050fs1090
2-146
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Loosen 2 screws [1]. Align the rear side of the alignment plate/U [2] with the long line at the center of the marking lines [3]. Then, adjust the front side of the alignment plate/U [4] to be within the standard value based on the rear side.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[4]
[1]
[2]
[2] [1] [3]

8050fs1091
2-147
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.12 FNS adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L (only for FN-9)
A. Procedure 1. Check whether "Adjustment of the position of FNS alignment plate/U" has been completed. 2. Turn on the main body. In the 47 mode, use one of the following codes to drive a motor and turn
II ADJUSTMENT
off the main body. Code 75-8: alignment motor/U (M705) home position search Code 75-21: alignment motor/L (M716) home position search Code 75-39: stopper motor (M718) moves to the A4R or larger position 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 5. Remove the stapler unit cover. 6. Check whether the actuator for the alignment HP sensor/U (PS708) is aligned with the home position. 7. Check whether the actuator [3] for the alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) for the alignment plate/L [1] is aligned with the home position.
[1] [2] [3]

8050fs1092
2-148
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 8. Place a sheet larger than A4R in the stacker section and check the position of the alignment plate/U (rear) [1] and alignment plate/L (rear) [2] by placing a sheet [3]. Check whether the space A between the alignment plate/L (rear) [2] and the alignment plate/L (front) [4] is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 340.6 + 0/ -0.5 mm (in to in) If not, perform the following adjustment.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[3]
[1]
A=340.6
mm
8050fs1093
9. Loosen 2 screws [1] and adjust the position of the alignment plate/L [2] to be within the standard value.
[2]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[1]
8050fs1094
2-149
II ADJUSTMENT
[4]
[2]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.13 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling)

Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause the teeth to skip between the belt and gear). A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it is performed within the standard value. Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at rear) [1]: A = 8.5 3mm Standard value for the one-corner stapling (at front) [2]: B = 8.5 3mm Standard value for the flat stapling [3]: C= B=8.5 3mm (In the flat stapling, the paper edge and the line [4] connecting 2 staples must become parallel) If not, perform the following adjustment. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
B=8.5 3mm
[1]
A=8.5 3mm
[2]
[3]
C=8.5 3mm
[4]
8050fs1095
2-150
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Loosen the adjustment screws [3] for the clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2] and adjust the position of the flat-stapling stopper [5] based on the mark [4]. 6. Perform a stapling operation to check whether it is performed within the standard value.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[5]
[1]
[2]
[1]
[2]
[4] [4] [3]

8050fs1096
2-151
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.14 FNS adjustment of the stapling position in a vertical direction

A. Procedure Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause the teeth to skip between the belt and gear).
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Perform a stapling operation to check for the If clinch failure. Buckled staple-needles [1] Floating stapling [2] (standard value: L = 1mm or less) Height of belt staple-needle [3] (standard value: L = 0.7mm or less) there is a failure, perform the following adjust-
[1]
ment. Note: Adjust the clincher or stapler if it is replaced or removed. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover. 5. Remove the cartridge [1], open the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding it.
[2]
L=1mm
[3]
L=0.7mm
8050fs1097
[1]
[3]
[2]
8050fs1098
2-152
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler positioning jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then close the cover [5]. 7. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[5] [3] [2] II ADJUSTMENT
[4]
8050fs1099
8. Loosen 4 screws [3] for the clincher/F [1] and the clincher/R [2].
[1]
[2]
[3] [1] [2]
[3]
[3]
8050fs1100
2-153
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 9. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2 guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] into the holes [5] on the clincher [4]. Note: The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be hooked on the clincher.
[2]
[1]
II ADJUSTMENT
[5]
[4]
[2] [3]
8050fs1101
2-154
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 10. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler downward. Adjust the position of the clincher [4] for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Rotate the gear [1] downward further. Then, place the plate [2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into the clincher unit [4]. 11. Tighten 4 screws for each clincher. 12. Remove the jig by rotating the gear for the stapler upward. Note: Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the clincher when removing the stapler positioning jig. 13. Remove the cartridge and plate. Then, replace the staple sheet removed at the step 5. Replace the cartridge. 14. Check the operation of the stapler.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1] [3] [2] [4] II ADJUSTMENT
[1]
8050fs1102
2-155
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.15 FNS adjustment of the stapling position (flat stapling) (only for FN-9)
A. Procedure Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip between the belt and gear).
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Perform a stapling operation to check whether the paper edge and the line [2] connecting 2 staples [1] becomes parallel [3] and the discrepancy L is within the standard value. Standard value: discrepancy L = 1 mm or less If the discrepancy is not within the standard value, perform the following adjustment. 2. Check whether "adjustment of the position of FNS alignment plate/U" and "adjustment of the position of alignment plate/L" has been complete. 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 4. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 5. Remove the stapler unit cover. 6. Loosen 3 screws [2] for the alignment plate/L [1].
[1] [2]
[3]
8050fs1103
[1]
[2]
8050fs1104
2-156
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7. Adjust the position based on the mark [3] to make the upper edge [1] and lower edge [2] of paper to be horizontal. 8. Tighten the 3 screws, then perform a stapling operation to check whether the stitch-and-fold position is within the standard value.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[3] [2] [3]

8050fs1105
2-157
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.16 FNS adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper (only for FN-9)
Note: Never move the stapler unit in a horizontal direction manually (it may cause teeth to skip between the belt and gear). Never loosen the screw [1] that must not be
II ADJUSTMENT
removed.
[1]
8050fs1106
A. Procedure 1. Perform a folding operation with A3 paper to check whether the discrepancy at the folding edge is within the standard value. Standard value: A = 1mm or less If the discrepancy is not within the standard value, perform the following adjustment. 2. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 3. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 4. Remove the stapler unit cover.
8050fs1107
2-158
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Loosen 5 screws [2] for the folding stopper [1] and adjust the angle based on the mark [3]. Note: Never loosen the screw [4] that must not be removed. 6. Tighten the 5 screws [2], then perform the folding to check whether the discrepancy is within
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[4] [2] [1] [3]

8050fs1108
2-159
II ADJUSTMENT
the standard value.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.17 FNS adjustment of the folding force (only for FN-9)

A. Procedure 1. Perform the followings to change the pressure of the folding roller. 2. Remove the rear cover. 3. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit.
II ADJUSTMENT
4. Remove the stacker unit cover. 5. Change the positions of each 2 pressure springs [3] at front [1] and rear [2]. Note: The 4 pressure springs [3] must be hooked on the hook holes with same symbol.
A B
[3]
C B A
[1]
C B A C B A
[3]
[2]
8050fs1109
2-160
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.18 FNS adjustment of the threeholding position (only for FN-9)

A. Procedure 1. Check whether "adjustment of the angle of the folding stopper" has been completed.
Folding position a b c
Standard value A4R 95 mm 101 mm 101 mm 8.5 x 11R 89.4 mm 95 mm 95 mm
Specification 2 mm 2 mm 2 mm
a c
2. Perform a three-folding operation to check whether the three-folding position is within the specification. If it is not within the specification, perform the following adjustment. 3. Turn on the main body, adjust the first folding position (standard value a) in "Finisher adjustment" "Three-holding position adjustment" in the 36 mode. Then, perform the three-folding for confirmation. 4. Once the first folding line is adjusted within the specification, open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 5. Open the three-folding guide plate [1], loosen 2 three-folding stopper screws [2], and then adjust the position of the three-folding stopper [4] based on the mark [3]. 6. Tighten the 2 screws [2], then perform the threefolding to check whether the three-folding position is within the standard value.
b
8050fs1110
[3]
[2] [4] [2] [1]

8050fs1111
2-161
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.19 FNS adjustment of the stapler drive belt position

A. Procedure Note: This adjustment is performed only if the position between the drive belt and the gear is displaced during another adjustment by mistake. 1. Open the finisher door and pull out the stacker unit. 2. Remove the rail stopper screws for the stacker unit. Then, pull out the stacker unit further. Note: To avoid the finisher from falling, make sure to place a support under the stacker unit. 3. Remove the following parts. 4. 5. Rear cover Stapler unit cover Insert the stacker unit. Loosen 2 screws (M3) [2] for the staple slide pulley/B [1] from the rear side with the hexagonal wrench [3]. 6. Move the stapler and clincher simultaneously toward center until they contacts with the bearing. Note: Make sure to move them simultaneously. The flat-stapling stopper may be damaged at the metal frame of the stapler if they are moved individually.
II ADJUSTMENT
[2]
[1]
[3]
8050fs1112
2-162
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7. Remove the cartridge [1] for the stapler/R, open the cover [2], and then remove the staple sheet [3] by sliding it.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[3]
[2]
8050fs1113
8. Remove the plate [2] from the stapler positioning jig [1], insert the hooks [3] on the plate into the hook holes [4] on the cartridge, and then close the cover [5]. 9. Attach the cartridge onto the stapler/R.
[1]
[5] [3] [2]
[4]
8050fs1114
2-163
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 10. Fold the stacking assist unit [1] and insert 2 guide pins [3] on the stapler positioning jig [2] into the holes [5] on the clincher [4]. Note: The stapler positioning jig is adequate to be hooked on the clincher.
[2]
[1]
II ADJUSTMENT
[5]
[4]
[2] [3]
8050fs1115
11. Rotate the gear [1] for the stapler/R downward. Adjust the horizontal position of the clincher [4] for the plate [2] attached to the cartridge to be inserted into the slot [3] on the jig smoothly. Then, adjust the horizontal position of the stapler/R and the clincher/R. Then, rotate the gear [1] downward further. Place the plate [2] onto the slot [3] on the jig and fully insert the jig into the clincher unit [4]. Note: Do not loosen the screws for the clincher at this time. The stapler/R and the clincher/R must be finely adjusted if the position is not matched.
[3] [2] [4]
[1]
8050fs1116
2-164
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 12. Insert the stacker with the jig attached (with the plate and the jig joined). Then, tighten 2 screws for the staple slide pulley/B from the rear side. 13. Pull out the stacker unit. Then, remove the jig by rotating the gear for the stapler upward. Note: Make sure not to snag on Mylar on the clincher when removing the stapler position-
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
14. Remove the cartridge for the stapler/R and plate. Replace the staple sheet removed at the step 7 and replace the cartridge. Then check following 3 stapling operations. 1-staple (at rear) 1-staple (at front) 2-staple 15. Replace the rear cover and the stapler cover.
2-165
II ADJUSTMENT
ing jig.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.20 TU adjustment of the sheet cutting parallelism

A. Procedure 1. Measure the length between the folding face [1] and trimming surface [2] and calculate the parallelism. Then, check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: parallelism = A-B = 1 mm or
A
II ADJUSTMENT
less If not, perform the following adjustment.
[1]
[2]
8050fs1117
2. Open the front door [1]. 3. Push up the pressure release lever [2]. 4. Loosen the screw [3]. Then adjust the conveyance guide plate [5] based on the mark [4]. 5. Tighten the screw [3].
[2] [1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
8050fs1118
2-166
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.21 LCT tray adjustment
mis-centering
Perform this adjustment when the positioning correction cannot be done (the mis-centering amount exceeds the automatic adjustment range of 5mm) even if "Printer centring adjustment (tray 4)" in the 36 mode, has been performed. A. Procedure 1. Print the test pattern No.16 to check the miscentering amount. 2. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 3. Open the top cover [2]. 4. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the top of LCT. Then, slide the guide plate/front [4] and the guide plate/rear [5] in the same direction at the same amount.
[4]
[3]
[3]
[5]
[2]
[1]
8050fs1064
2-167
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 5. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the center positioning bracket [1] at the bottom of LCT. Then, slide the guide plate in the same direction at the same amount with step 4 6. Tighten the 2 screws [2]. 7. Replace the LCT and print the test pattern No.16 again. 8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 until the mis-centering amount becomes within the automatic adjust-
II ADJUSTMENT
ment range.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1065
2-168
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.22 LCT skew adjustment

Perform the LCT skew adjustment when the paper skew is different with paper supplied from the other tray in such case as LCT is placed on the inclined surface. However, it has just a little effect because all paper is corrected at the second paper feed section. A. When all printouts are skewed: 1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous copy mode to check the skew amount. 2. Open the front door of the LCT. 3. Loosen 2 screws [2] for the positioning bracket [1] at the bottom of the LCT. 4. Adjust the position of the positioning bracket [2]. 5. Tighten the 2 screws [2].
[1]
[2]
8050fs1066
2-169
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS B. When some printouts are skewed: 1. Print the test pattern No.16 in the continuous copy mode to check the skew amount. 2. Open the top cover [1]. 3. Loosen 6 screws [2] at the top of LCT to loosen the guide plate/front [3], the guide plate/rear [4], and the guide plate/right side [5]. 4. Tighten the 6 screws at the position where each guide plate is in contact with paper.
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
II ADJUSTMENT
Reference: The size indicator on the guide plate is approximately 2mm wider than the actual standard size paper. It may cause the skew for some paper. The skew amount is reduced if paper is fixed with each guide plate in tight.
[1]
[2] [5]
8050fs1067
2-170
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.23 LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed roller pressure adjustment when the no feed jam occurs at the paper feed. Note: The weight plate is a supply part. It should be
A. Procedure 1. Open the top cover [1]. 2. Remove the spring [2]. 3. Install the weight plate [4] on the paper feed roller [3] with 2 screws [5]. 4. Replace the spring [2]. 5. Close the top cover. 6. Perform the continuous copy to check the paper feed. 7. Repeat steps 1 to 6 if the no feed jam continues to occur at the paper feed.
[5]
[4] [2]
[3]
[1]
8050fs1068
2-171
II ADJUSTMENT
purchased separately.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.24 LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment

Perform the LCT up/down plate horizontal adjustment when the paper feed jam occurs frequently or the up/down wire is replaced. A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1].
II ADJUSTMENT
2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Loosen 4 screws [3] at the front and rear side. 4. Position the mark [5] to make the up/down plate to be horizontal with 2 adjusting screws [4] at the front and rear side. 5. Tighten the 4 screws [3].
[5] [2]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[5]
8050fs1069
2-172
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.25 LCT sheet adjustment
feed
pressure
Perform the LCT sheet feed pressure adjustment when a no feed jam or a double feed jam occurs at the paper feed. The sheet feed pressure is affected by the paper type and the operating environment (the no feed jam is likely in the low temperature environment and environment). A. Procedure 1. Remove LCT from the main body. 2. Check the adjusting spring mechanism [2] from the top left side of the LCT (paper exit side) [1]. 3. Change the spring hook position [2] depending on the symptom. The load of the spring changes approximately 10% for a change in its position. Note: Excess adjustment may reverse the symptom. For example, a no feed jam becomes a double feed jam. Weak: Double feed jam is corrected. Strong: No feed jam is corrected.
[2]
[1]
8050fs1070
2-173
II ADJUSTMENT
the double feed is likely in the high temperature
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.26 LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment

Perform the LCT paper feed height (upper limit) adjustment when the no feed jam occurs, the edge of the fed paper is folded, or you want to feed curled paper. The adjustment is performed by changing the vertical position of the upper limit sensor (PS109).
II ADJUSTMENT
A. Procedure 1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Measure the height of the entrance guide upper surface [3] and up/down plate upper surface [4] with a scale to check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 2 to 5mm Perform the following adjustment if it is not within the standard value or the edge of the fed paper is folded even if it is within the standard value. Note: This adjustment affects the pick-up release amount. When the adjustment is complete, perform "9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment". 4. Remove the sprint [6] from the paper feed unit [5]. 5. Remove 4 screws [7]. 6. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [8] toward right.
[6]
[3]
[5] [1] [4]
[2]
[8]
[7]
8050fs1071
2-174
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 7. Loosen a screw [1]. 8. Move the sensor mounting bracket [2] vertically to make the height of the entrance guide upper surface and the up/down plate upper surface to be within the standard value. If it is not within the standard value and the height of the up/down plate has to be raised: When paper with a convex curl is fed: Lower the position of the sensor mounting bracket If it is not within the standard value and the height of the up/down plate has to be lowered: When the edge of the fed paper is folded: When paper with a concave curl is fed: Raise the position of the sensor mounting bracket 9. When the adjustment is complete, tighten a screw [1].
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[1]
[2]
8050fs1072
2-175
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
9.27 LCT pick-up release amount adjustment

Perform the LCT pick-up release amount adjustment when a no feed jam occurs frequently. The adjustment is performed by changing the horizontal position of the paper feed solenoid (SD100). A. Procedure
II ADJUSTMENT
1. Lift up the up/down plate [1]. 2. Open the top cover [2]. 3. Remove the sprint [4] from the paper feed unit [3]. 4. Remove 4 screws [5]. 5. Remove the paper feed pick-up cover/B [6] toward right.
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[5]
8050fs1073
2-176
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Pull the moving section of SD100 (paper feed solenoid) [1] and measure the distance between the paper feed roller [2] and the upper surface of the up/down plate [3] to check whether it is within the standard value. Standard value: 0.5 to 2.5mm Perform the following adjustment if it is not within the standard value. 7. Loosen a screw [4]. Note: Before starting the operation, note the original position of the solenoid. 8. Move the paper feed solenoid (SD100) [1] horizontally to make the distance between the paper feed roller and the upper surface of the up/down plate to be within the standard value. 9. Tighten the screw [4] for the paper feed solenoid.
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
[2]
[1]
8050fs1074
2-177
II ADJUSTMENT
[3]
[4]
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. Remove the punch unit cover by removing three screws Punch unit cover
9.28 PK Adjusting the tilt of the punch hole position

A. Preparation 1. Check the following items: The finisher is connected to the main body. The main body is loaded with the paper based on the punch specifications. 2. Check the skew of output paper in advance.
II ADJUSTMENT
Slide the side guide plate and the rear guide plate for the main body's feed tray, and align the paper loaded on the main body's tray. Check the skew by using the platen copy or adjustment mode. 3. To check the tilt of the punch hole position, make a sample copy in the punch mode. 4. Make three copies each in single side copy mode and double side copy mode with the punch mode to check the skew. B. Procedure 1. Measure the position of the sampled punch holes to check the tilt of the position.
A
Screws
7165field135i
4. Loosen the four adjustment screws of PK. 5. Using the mark scale as a guide, move the punch unit horizontally by the amount of tilt for the punch hole position. 1 scale: 0.5%
Adjustment screws Adjust to the left or right
Mark Adjustment screws

7165field128i
2. Open the front cover.
6. Retighten the screws. 7. Reinstall the punch unit cover. 8. Make a sample copy of punch mode and recheck the tilt of the punch hole position.
2-178
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 4. Turn the volume fully clockwise and then turn it back counterclockwise until the LED corresponding to each volume lights up
9.29 Sensitivity adjustment for the PK paper edge sensor

A. Preparation 1. Check that the finisher is connected to the main body.
Volumes B. Procedure 1. Open the front door of the finisher. ing one screw Punch drive board cover
Punch drive board (PKDB)
Screw 3. Power on the main body.
7165field129i
LED
7165field130i
5. Perform the procedure of step 4 for all five volumes. 6. Power off the main body after completing the adjustment. 7. Reinstall the punch drive board cover. 8. Close the front door of the finisher.
2-179
II ADJUSTMENT
2. Remove the punch drive board cover by remov-
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2. When adjusting for the lower tray, remove two screws and slide rightward to remove the side guide plate (rear)
Pi-W-2
9.30 PI Centering Adjustment

Note: PI Centering adjustement must be performed on the upper tray first, then on the lower tray. When it is necessary to slide the side guide plate (rear) a lot, perform step 11 before step 3 and subsequent procedures. When tightening two screws of the side guide
II ADJUSTMENT
plate (rear), be careful not to tighten them too much. (Tightening torque: less than 5kg/cm) A. Preparation 1. Check that PK adjusting the punch hole vertical position has been completed. 2. Perform Tray 1/2/3 centering adjustment. 3. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch mode. 4. Check the position of each punch hole on the three sheets.
Side guide plate (rear)
Screws
3. Loosen two adjustment screws securing the side guide plate (rear), and slide it by the twice the difference. (ie: If there is 1.5mm difference in direction of rear side, slide by 3mm to rear side.) 1 scale : 2 mm

B. Procedure 1. Release the hook and remove the adjustment cover of the side guide plate (rear)
Adjustment cover
Adjustment screws
Pi-W-3
4. Fasten the two adjustment screws securely to fix the side guide plate (rear). 5. In case of the lower tray, install the side guide plate (rear). 6. Set a sheet on the tray and fit the side guide plate (rear) to the sheet to check that the side
Pi-W-1
Hock
guide plate (rear) is parallel to the sheet. 7. Feed the three sheets from PI with the punch mode. 8. Check the position of each punch hole. 9. Repeat step 2 to 8 until the difference of the holes is improved. 10. Install the adjustment cover to the side guide plate (rear). 11. Set A4R size paper to the tray and perform the cover sheet tray size adjustment in 36 mode.
2-180
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS 4. Using the mark as a guide, move the guide plate laterally by the amount of tilt in the position of punch holes.
9.31 Adjusting the tilt of PI (when PK punch is used)

A. Preparation 1. Check the following items: PI is connected to FNS. The tray of PI is loaded with paper. 2. Check the tilt of output paper in advance. Feed 3 sheets from PI with the Punch mode selected to check the tilt of punch holes. 3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate. B. Procedure 1. Fold each of the fed 3 sheets into two as illustrated below and find out in which direction the punch holes tilt.) Tilting toward the right edge of the sheet Tilting toward the left edge of the sheet
Screw securing the guide plate
Tilting toward the right edge of the sheet
Tilting toward the left edge of the sheet

7165field143i
7165field142i
2. Open the FNS front cover. 3. Loosen one screw securing the guide plate.
5. Retighten the screw securing the guide plate. 6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 until the amount of tilt in the position of punch holes is improved.
2-181
II ADJUSTMENT
OTHER ADJUSTMENTS
II ADJUSTMENT
Blank page
2-182
ISW
III SERVICE TOOL

1. ISW
1.1 Description of the ISW
1.2
Installing the USB driver for ISWTrns
Note: It is required to install the USB driver for ISWTrns to perform ISW via USB on this machine. See the installation procedure file attached to ISWTrns for the installation procedure. Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and press the OK button. Only ISWTrns is supported for ISW in this machine.
ISW (In-system Writer) is an operation to rewrite the control program stored in the flash ROM on a variety of control boards in Minolta's digital copier without removing the boards from the main body of the copier. ISW allows you to update the version of the control program without replacing the board or to install the latest program when replacing the board. [ISWTrns (PC software)] is provided to execute ISW, which rewrite the program by connecting a PC to the digital copier. The software rewrites the control program stored in the flash ROM in the copier main body directly.
3-1
III SERVICE TOOL
ISW
1.3
1.3.1
Setup
Board used for the ISW
B. HELP + CHECK mode The HELP + CHECK mode is started when the main switch (SW2) is pressed while pressing "HELP" and "CHECK button." This mode is designed specifically for ISW to be started when the overall control program is installed but the operation board control program is not installed because the 25 mode cannot be started in such case. C. 25 mode The 25 mode is available only if both the overall control program and the operation board control program are installed.
ISWTrns supports the following boards for rewriting the control program in CF5001. Overall control board (OACB) Printer controller board (PRCB) Operation board/1 (OB1) RADF control board (DFCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) See IP SHB for the printer controller. ROM replacement is needed for boards other than the above. 1.3.2 Data flow
III SERVICE TOOL
The following shows the ISW data flow. PC OACB OB1 PRCB DFCB FNSCB
Note: The control program on other boards cannot be written until that for the overall control board (OACB) is written. 1.3.3 ISW transfer type
The copier supports three ISW transfer modes as follows. A. Power ON mode The power ON mode is used if no program is installed on the overall control board (OACB) or it is faulty. If no program is installed on OACB, the OACB program becomes possible to be written at power ON. No display appears on the operation panel and the timer LED flashes even if the operation board control program is installed because the OACB controls the power for the operation board.
3-2
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 1.3.4 Instances of ISW transfer
ISW
A. When writing a new program (because replacing a board or failed to rewrite the program) Normal startup display ISW transfer method Overall control board Operation board /1 Flashing timer LED No display on the operation panel Error code display Power ON mode Condition Overall control program is not installed or faulty The overall control program is installed but the operation board program is not installed or faulty Both the overall control program and the operation board program is installed
HELP + CHECK mode 25 mode
Others
Error code display
B. When updating the version of the program Normal startup display ISW transfer method Overall control board Operation board /1 Others Normal Normal Normal 25 mode 25 mode 25 mode Condition
3-3
III SERVICE TOOL
All program has been installed
ISW 1.3.5 Setup procedure
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 B. Power on mode a. Procedure
A. Connecting a PC a. Procedure 1. Turn ON the main switch (SW2). 2. Check the timer LED is flushing. The control program becomes possible to be written in this state. 3. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH ISW Trns." Note: Do not turn OFF the copier while writing the ISW data is being rewritten. 4. The operation screen appears if it is completed
[1]
1. Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/2 [2].
successfully. If it is terminated abnormally, see "E. The relationship between ISW resulting operation and the operational LEDs."
III SERVICE TOOL
[2]
2. Connect either of IEEE1284 port [1] or USB (Type B) port [2] to the PC via a cable. C. HELP + CHECK mode a. Procedure
1. Turn ON the copie while pressing "HELP" and "CHECK button." 2. "ISW write mode select menu screen" Press 1 (PC) with the numeric keys.
ISW WRITE MODE SELECT MENU
1.PC
[1] [2]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
9.EXIT
Note: Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and press the OK button.
3-4
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3. "ISW device select menu screen" Select 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) with the numeric keys. Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
ISW DEVICE SELECT MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. GRAPHIC CONTROL PRINTER CONTROL OPERATION CONTROL ADF VIF [MODE:PC]
ISW 6. "ISW executing screen" Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH ISW Trns." "Result screen" appears once ISW is complete.
EXECUTING
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. PREVIOUS
9. EXIT
Note: Rewrite programs other than 3 (OPERATION CONTROL) in the 25 mode because this mode does not support them. 4. "Operation control - item select menu screen" Select an item from 1 - 5 to rewrite it individually or select 6 (ALL) to rewrite all items at a time. Press 9 (EXIT) to exit from the menu or press 0 (PREVIOUS) to return to the previous screen.
OPERATION CONTROL - ITEM SELECT MENU 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 01 02 03 04 05 [MODE:PC] PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 0. CONTINUE 9. EXIT *** NORMAL END ***
7. "Result screen" The operation is completed successfully "NORMAL END" appears.
The operation is terminated abnormally "ABNORMAL END" appears. Check the error code on the screen if the rewriting is terminated abnormally.
6. ALL
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY
0. PREVIOUS
9. EXIT *** ABNORMAL END *** INPUT DEVICE ERROR (ERROR CODE : XX)
5. "ISW start screen" Select 1 (YES) to start ISW. Select 2 (NO) to cancel.
OPERATION CONTROL - 01 [MODE:PC]
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY ISW START OK ?
0. CONTINUE
9. EXIT
8. Select 0 (CONTINUE) to continue ISW or select 9 (EXIT) to exit. "PLEASE TURN OFF A POWER SUPPLY"
PLEASE PUSH TEN-KEY 1. YES 2. NO
appears when pressing 9, then turn OFF the main switch (SW2).
3-5
III SERVICE TOOL
ISW b. Error code Causes
Error code 01 1F 41 42 43 81 C1 C2 C3 C4 E1 E2 E3 E9 EA EB F0 F1 F2 F3 F8 F9 FA FB FC
No. of resulting operation (1) (1) (2) (2) (2) (3) (5) (5) (8) (6) (9) (9) (4) (4) (4) (4) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (7) (4)
Error in the instruction against the ISW processing unit Program error Input data format error (at ISW for the operation board program) Model name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) Board name error in input data (at ISW for the operation board program) Input device error such as the input time out (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM erasing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) Flash ROM writing failure (at ISW for the overall control program) ROM check sum error (at ISW for the overall control program) Output device error such as the input time out Erase error Write error Communication error I/F communication parameter error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F command sequence error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F communication timeout error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM verify error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM write error (at ISW for the operation board program) Flash ROM erase error (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive checksum error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive header code error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive parity error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive framing error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program) I/F receive overflow error between the overall control board and the operation board (at ISW for the operation board program)
III SERVICE TOOL
Resulting operations (1) The program is not operating normally. Turn OFF and ON the main switch (SW2) and then start ISW again. (2) Check the ISW transfer data file. (3) Check the connection of the communication cable from the input device (PC). (4) Check I/F between the overall control board and the operation board. (5) The flash ROM on the overall control board is faulty. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the flash ROM on the overall control board may be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace the overall control board. (6) An error is detected from the board on which you want to rewrite the program. Check the board on which you want to execute ISW.
3-6
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (7) The flash ROM on the operation board/1 is faulty. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the flash ROM on the operation board/1 may be faulty or it may have reached its life. Replace the operation board/1. (8) The checksum calculated after the program is written does not become equal to the ROM checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file may not be downloaded properly. (9) It cannot write/erase data to/from area on which ISW is executed. The flash ROM may be faulty or have reached its life. Replace the object board. The checksum calculated after the program is written does not become equal to the ROM checksum data. Execute ISW again. If the same error occurs, the ISW transfer data file may not be downloaded properly. Note: If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the overall control board, the operation panel cannot be displayed even if the main switch is ON because the program controlling the whole components has been lost. Execute ISW in the power ON mode if such is the case. If an error occurs during rewriting the program on the operation board/1, it cannot be started in the 25 mode because the error code is displayed. Execute ISW in the HELP + CHECK mode if such is the case. a. Procedure D. 25 mode
ISW
1. Enter the 25 mode. 2. "25 mode menu screen" Press the [11 ISW] key. 3. "ISW mode menu screen" Select a program for which ISW is executed. 4. Pressing the [Start] key, cause the machine to be data waiting condition. Note: See "C. HELP + CHECK mode" since selecting "Operation panel" switches to the HELP + CHECK mode. 5. Execute the operation according to the procedures specified in the "2.UPDATING WITH ISW Trns." Note: Do not turn OFF the copier while rewriting the ISW data is being written.
3-7
III SERVICE TOOL
ISW E. The relationship between ISW operation and the operational LEDs The following shows the display of the operation panel in the power ON mode with ISW executed. No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 CPU initialization During memory check Memory check error (waiting data from PC) ISW processing (receiving data) ISW processing (writing to flash ROM) Transfer data error Flash ROM write error Memory check successful and reboot Operation
Timer LED OFF OFF Blink OFF OFF Blink Blink OFF
Power save LED OFF OFF OFF Blink Blink Blink Steady lit OFF
III SERVICE TOOL
3-8
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns 2.1.2 Setting up ISW Trns
2. UPDATING WITH ISW Trns

2.1 Setting Up ISW Trns
When the ISW Trns program has been installed on the PC, run it to set up a folder in which the transfer file (update data) is stored. When this setting completes, the ISW Trns program is ready to run. Step 1 2 3 Boot the PC. [Select [ISW Trns] from the start menu to run the ISW Trns program. [ISW Trns dialog box] Procedure
Note: The explanation screen here is used based on another model. Therefore, there is a thing different from an actual screen. 2.1.1 Installing the application program
Install the ISW Trns on the PC. Step 1 2 Boot the PC. Mount setup disk 1 on the PC and doubleclick the [Setup.exe] icon to start the installer. If an old version ISW Trns program is present, uninstall it first, then start the setup operation. [ISW Trns setup window] Confirm the installation folder as instructed by on-screen guidance and click Next. By default, the program installs in [C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for Minolta]. To change the installation folder, click Browse and type a new folder name. [Program folder confirmation window] Confirm the ISW Trns program installation folder as instructed by on-screen guidance and click Next. By default, the ISW Trns program installs in [ISW Trns for Minolta]. To change the installation folder, either type a new folder name or select one from the list of existing folders on display. [Next disk insertion request window] Mount setup disk 2 as instructed by onscreen guidance and click OK. [Information dialog box] Click OK as instructed by on-screen guidance. This procedure will add an ISW Trns icon to the Start menu. [Setup completion window] Click Complete as instructed by on-screen guidance. The ISW Trns install exits automatically. Procedure
Click OK to set up a folder in which the transfer file (update data) is stored. This dialog box will not appear when ISW Trns is run next time. 4 [Option window]
Set up a folder in which the transfer file (update data) is stored and click Make Folder. By default, the folder in which the ISW Trns program has installed (C:\Program_File\Minolta\ISWTrns for Minolta) has been set up as a storage folder (data folder). To change the storage folder, click Browse and select a new folder or type its full-path name in directly the edit box.
3-9
III SERVICE TOOL
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns
Step Note:
Procedure Clicking Make Folder will create the following hierarchy of folders branching off from the new storage folder:
ISWTrns for Minolta CF5001 Adf Graphic control Euro Japan Usa Printer Vif Operation Fns
III SERVICE TOOL
[Option window] Click OK. Note: This procedure will save the data folders created in Step 4 to the INI file for the ISW Trns program.
[ISW Trns main window] The ISW Trns main window opens.
3-10
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2.1.3 ISW Trns Main Window Overview
The ISW Trns program, when run, comes up with the ISW Trns main window. The ISW Trns main window lets you select, verify, and transfer a transfer file (update data) and display information in it. A detailed description of its functions follows:
50img_dc0001 2003/ 9/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001 50img_dc0001.b01 50img_dc0001.b00
* Sample display : Display information may be different from what you actually will see on your machine. 1 A Select Type frame Select conditions for a transfer file (update data). When you select all the four combo boxes, folder 5 is set up on the basis of the information set in the INI file. The settings of the combo boxes selected are saved to the ISW Trns.INI file when you click File Send. The ISW Trns program comes up with the ISW Trns main window prefilled with these combo box settings when runs next time. 2 Version selection frame This frame lets you select which version of a transfer file you want transmitted when more than one version is stored in a single folder. 3 Send file information frame List the files that are transferred actually on the basis of the information specified in frames 1 and 2 . Click File Check to view a checksum of each file and its consistency (OK, NG or ??). 4 File Status frame View detailed information about the version file as it is selected in 6 . The table below presents differences in the ways transfer files are displayed according to their data distribution types.
3-11
III SERVICE TOOL
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns Data sources appearing in the detailed file information list Display title File Name File Date File Time File size ROM Version SP ROM Version Message Conversion Machine Name Country Board Name Data Format ORIGINAL (Batch data) Date of the version selection file Time of the version selection file File size of the version selection file Footer information Footer information For development use Header information + INI file Combo box display Header information + INI file Header information (Binary)
DIVIDE (Divided data) Date of the version selection file Time of the version selection file File size of the version selection file Footer information (last file) Footer information (last file) For development use Header information + INI file Combo box display Header information + INI file Header information (Binary)
File name of the version selection file File name of the version selection file
III SERVICE TOOL
5 Version Folder edit box When Select Type frame 1 is established, the full-path folder name is displayed to reflect the data folder and the INI file information set up in the option window. If the transfer file exists in a folder different from the data folder, change the folder name to that folder by using Browse 7 or rewriting the folder name directly. Those transfer files in the folder that meet the INI file conditions are listed in File list box 6 . 6 Version File selection list box Lists those display files existing in the folder set in 5 . Display Files are marked by a wildcard name (such as 85img*.b01) in the ISWTrns.INI file. If multiple versions of a file exist in the folder, therefore, multiple versions would appear in this list box accordingly. Example: 50img_dc0001AAA.bol 50img_dc002AAA.bol The files in this list are sorted by name. When the list opens, the last display item in the list is preselected. Change the choice to establish the version of transfer files to transmit.
7 Browse Version File button Click Browse button to open the folder selection window and select a folder for 5 . 8 Send file information display list List the names of files that are actually transmitted when a version file is selected in 6 . A count of the number of files that are actually transmitted is indicated in a checksum file attached to each transfer file (write data). If not all the transfer files are stored in folder 5 or if extra files are included in it, the error message Send files not found or invalid file name in the folder is displayed. This check is not made. Clicking the File Check button in 9 calculates a checksum of the display files as a whole and compares it with the checksum stored in the checksum file (*.SUM) attached to the transfer file (write data), displaying the result of that comparison.
3-12
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 9 File Check button Click this button when send files are listed in the Send File Info list in 8 , and a file checksum of the transfer files displayed (file checksum) is calculated and attached to each file. Further, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum storage file (*.SUM) attached to the transfer file (write data) to display the result of the comparison in the following format: [OK] = Matched [NG] = Unmatched [??] = Checksum file (*.SUM) not found 10 File Send Button Perform transmission of transfer files 2.1.4
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns Parallel port setup
If a parallel data transfer is to be executed with the ISW Trns program, the ECP mode setting of the PC parallel port should be cleared. ISW Trns does not support parallel data transfers. If a parallel data transfer is launched with the PC set in ECP mode, the transfer could be aborted by an error occurring in between. It would be necessary, therefore, to disable ECP mode before run ISW Trns on a PC with the ECP setting. Instructions on how to disable ECP mode are given below. Step 1 2 Boot the PC. Open the System icon in the Control Panel and click the Device Manager tab. Then, search for LPT1 in Ports (COM/LPT1). Note: If LPT1 appears as ECP Printer Port (LPT1), then it is an ECP port. If LPT1 appears as Printer Port (LPT1), then it is a regular parallel port. With an ECP printer port, change the BIOS setting of the PC to disable the ECP port. Note: Because the BIOS setting depends on the PC, check with your system administrator on how to disable ECP mode. 4 When the BIOS change is complete, open the System icon in the Control panel and change the parallel port driver. Run a send test to verify the successful operation. Note: If a transfer succeeds on one copier model, then transfers would be successful on all models. Procedure
3-13
III SERVICE TOOL
2.2
Copying Transfer (Update Data)
Data
Run the ISW Trns program to copy transfer data (update data) to the PC. Step 1 2 3 4 Boot the PC. Select ISW Trns from the Start menu to run the ISW Trns program. Click the Option menu. [Option window] Procedure
Click Copy to copy the selected transfer files (update data) to the folder created at ISW Trns setup. Note: To copy all the files (update data) displayed in the Original Files field, click Copy All, instead of Copy. The folder name created at ISW Trns setup is displayed above the Copied File field. The transfer files that have been copied successfully so far are listed in fullpath name in the lower part of the Copied File list view. The transfer files that have not been copied successfully are listed in the Failed to Copy Files list view. Causes of copy errors: 1. A file with the same name existed and the O/W (overwrite) check box was not checked. 2. The storage destination folder could not be found.
III SERVICE TOOL
Click Data Copy. 5 [File Copy window]
3. Attempted to overwrite an overwrite protected file. To update existing transfer files (update data), check the O/W (overwrite) check box. 9 10 When the copying completes, click Refresh. If more update disks are involved, repeat Steps 5 to 9. Click Cancel to return to the option window. [Option window] Click OK.
Mount an update disk on the PC and click Browse. 6 Select the folder on drive A that contains the transfer file (update data) as a source file. Note: The selected folder is displayed in the upper section in the Original Files field. The transfer files (update data) that are stored in the selected folder are displayed in the lower section in the Original Files field. 7 Select the transfer files (update data) you want copied from the lower section in the Original Files field. Note: You can select multiple transfer files (update data). To copy all the files (update data) displayed, skip this step to go to Step 8 directly. 3-14
11 12
2.3
Connecting the CF5001
2.4
2.4.1
Updating
Update operation overview
The ISW connector is hidden under the drum cover. Detach this cover to run ISW. A. Procedure (1) Loosen 4 screws [1] and remove the side cover/ 2 [2]
Follow the steps below to update the ROM data on each control board using ISW Trns. For more operational details, see the relevant parts of this section. Step 1 Procedure Check the ROM version of the copier before proceeding with updating. (See 2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier (before updating).) Run the ISW Trns program. (See 2.4.4 Running ISW Trns.). Set the copier in ISW receive mode. (See 2.4.3 Preparing the copier to transfer.)
2 3
[1]
[2]
(2) Connect the PC port and the copier ISW connector with interface cable.
IEEE1284 port
Select a version of transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.6 Selecting a version of transfer files (update data).) Verify the transfer files (update data) selected with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.7Verifying transfer files (update data). Transmit the transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data).) To update ROM data on more control boards, repeat Steps 3 to 7. Exit the ISW Trns program. (See 2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns.) Verify the ROM version of the copier after updating. (See 2.4.10 Verifying the ROM version of the copier (after updating).)
PC
8 9 10
USB (TypeB) port
Interface cable Note: Before performing ISW via USB, be sure to turn on the USB radio button in [Setting (S)] [Set Communication (C)] in ISWTrns and press the OK button.
3-15
III SERVICE TOOL
Select conditions for transfer files (update data) with IWS Trns. (See 2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions.)
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns 2.4.2 Checking the ROM version of the copier 2.4.5
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Selecting transfer file (update data)
(before updating) Before updating ROM data, check the ROM version of the existing control program in the 25 mode. Step 1 2 Procedure Turn OFF the copier main switch. Turn ON the copier main switch while holding down the copy count setup buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode. [25 mode menu window] Check the ROM version by following the copier-specific procedure. Note: For operating instructions, refer to the Adjustment section of the service manual supplied for the copier.
conditions Select various conditions for selecting the transfer files (update data) in the ISW Trns main window. Conditions to select are: (Machine) The name of the model on which ROM data is updated. (Country) The destination of the transfer files (update data) (Board) The name of the board on which ROM data is updated (Divide) The type of the transfer files (update data) Step 1 Procedure [ISW Trns main window] In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Machine] field in [Select Type] and select the name of the model on which to update ROM data from the pulldown menu.
CF5001
III SERVICE TOOL
2.4.3
Preparing the copier to transfer.
Start the copier with 25 mode enabled to put the copier into ISW transfer wait state. Step 1 2 Procedure Turn OFF the copier main switch. Turn ON the copier main switch while holding down the copy count setup buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode. [25 mode menu window] Put the copier into ISW transfer wait state by following the copier-specific procedure. Note: ISW transfer wait state is the state of the copier with the START key being shown in the display area. For operating instructions, refer to the Adjustment section of the service manual supplied for the copier. 2.4.4 Running ISW Trns.
In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Country] field in [Select Type] and select the destination of the transfer files (update data) from the pulldown menu.
CF5001 Euro Japan USA
Run the ISW Trns program. Step 1 2 Boot the PC. Select ISW Trns from the Start menu and run the ISW Trns program. Procedure
3-16
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2.4.6 Step 3 Procedure In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Board] field in [Select Type] and select the name of the board on which to update ROM from the pulldown menu.
CF5001 USA
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns Selecting a version of transfer files
(update data) When a transfer file (update data) has been chosen to meet a given set of conditions, it may be available in multiple versions. Here, select a particular version of a transfer file (update data) for use in the actual data transfer. Step 1 Procedure [ISW Trns main window] In the ISW Trns main window, select a transfer file (update data) of the version that is used in the actual data transfer from among the files listed in the [File] field in [Version].
50img_dc0001.b01 50img_dc0001.b00
CF5001 USA
C1/C4(ALL) ORIGINAL DIVIDED
Note: The version of a transfer file (update data) can be determined from its file name. Example: 50img_DC001AAA.b01 .. Version 1 50img_DC002AAA.b01 .. Version 2 2 The target file (update data) may not be shown in the [File] field in [Version], if it exists in a folder different from the data folders set in the Option screen. Click Browse and find the appropriate file to select.
CF5001 Di850
Note: Normally, select ORIGINAL as the method of division. Select DIVIDED for large ROM data (e.g. for Main Control Unit), that is divided into several files (extension .001.b01, etc.) to be stored to several floppy disks for distribution.
Note: Clicking Browse will open the Select File window.
3-17
III SERVICE TOOL
In the ISW Trns main window, click in the [Divide] field in [Select Type] and select a method of dividing the transfer files (update data) from the pulldown menu.
50img_dc0001 2003/ 8/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns 2.4.7 Verifying transfer files (update data) 2.4.8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Transmitting transfer files (update data)
Once a particular version of a transfer file (update data) is selected, the transfer files (update data) that are transmitted actually are listed in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main window. Verify the validity of the transfer files (data) for transfer. Step 1 Procedure [ISW Trns main window] In the ISW Trns main window, click File Check in [Send File Infor]..
When transfer files (update data) are established, run a data transfer to the copier. Step 1 Procedure Press the START key on the copier while it is in ISW transfer wait state. Note: The START key is displayed in the display area on the copier. [ISW Trns main window] Click File Send in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main window.
50img_dc0001 2003/ 8/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01 50img_dc0001 2003/ 8/15
CF5001
50img_dc000.b01
CF5001 50img_dc0001.b01 50img_dc0001.b00
CF5001 50img_dc0001.b01 50img_dc0001.b00
III SERVICE TOOL
Check to see if OK appears in the [File Sum] field in [Send File Infor] in the ISW Trns main window. Note: A file that is labeled NG is inappropriate as a transfer file (update data). Try to copy the file again. If you can not succeed to copy it again, the original file may be corrupted. Transfer files (update data) may be marked ?? when enough information is not available to verify their validity. When a transfer file is labeled, check if the checksum file (*.sum) was copied correctly.
Transfer files (update data) are transmitted to the copier. Note7: While data is being transferred to a copier, an LED or indicator flashes to indicate a data transfer in progress. The mode of such indication varies from one copier to another. Note8: ISW Trns produces an indication to designate a data transfer in progress. Note9: If a data transfer is aborted due to any trouble occurring with the copier or ISW Trns, turn the copier main switch OFF, then ON to retry the data transfer by ISW Trns. In this case, a condition indication and necessary operation vary depending on each model. Please refer to service manual for the copier. To update ROM data on more control boards, repeat the step in 2.4.5 Selecting transfer file (update data) conditions, to 2.4.8 Transmitting transfer files (update data).
3-18
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2.4.9 Exiting ISW Trns. When the update of the ROM data on the control boards completes, exit the ISW Trns program. Step 1 2 3 4 Procedure Exit the ISW Trns program. Turn OFF the PC. Turn OFF the copier main switch. Disconnect the parallel interface cable from the PC and the copier. Note: Turn OFF the PC and copier before disconnecting the parallel interface cable from them. Step 1 2 2.4.10
UPDATING WITH ISW Trns Verifying the ROM version of the copier
(after updating) When the update of the ROM data completes, verify the ROM version of the control program in the 25 mode. Procedure Turn OFF the copier main switch. Turn ON the copier main switch while holding down the copy count setup buttons 2 and 5, to enable 25 mode. [25 mode menu window] Check the ROM version by following the copier-specific procedure. Note: For operating instructions, refer to the Adjustment section of the service manual supplied for the copier.
3-19
III SERVICE TOOL
2.5
ISW Trns Messages
The ISW Trns program displays dialogue messages when errors occur and when processing ends. Definitions of these messages are listed below, along with the associated display status. Message Cannot open a checksum file Cannot read a checksum file Display status Opening of a checksum file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use. Loading of a checksum file into memory failed. Possible causes include a shortage of memory and an OS problem. Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use. File transfer completed. Opening of the LPT port failed. A call to GetCommSate failed. A call to GetCommSate failed. Opening of a send file failed. Possible causes include a corrupted file and a file in use. Transmission of a communications test block failed. 1. The copier is not ready to receive. 2. The cable is out of position. 3. Transmission of the wrong send file was attempted. The transmission of a send file failed. Possible causes include a cable out of position. Output to the LPT port failed. Possible causes include a cable out of position. A message seeking confirmation at the start of file transmission. No files exist on the send file list. Transmission of a file in progress was canceled. CANCEL is normally hidden. Its setting can be altered with the INI file. A data folder was created by clicking Create Folder. An invalid folder name was entered. Start a folder name with a drive name, such as C:\. A data folder is not set in ISWTrns.INI. This message is displayed when ISW Trns launches for the fist time. The creation of a thread failed. File copy start message File copy start message No file to copy file is selected or exists in the folder.
Cannot open a file File transmission complete Cannot open the LPT port Communications port setup acquisition error Communications port setup error
III SERVICE TOOL
Cannot open a send file Cannot send a Term Test file
Unsuccessful file transmission Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT port Starting file transmission. OK? Send file not selected Canceled
Default data folder created Invalid folder name Default data folder not set. Set a folder. Unsuccessful thread creation Copying the selected file. OK? Copying all files to the default data folder. OK? No send file available
3-20
Message Unable to copy several files
Display status 1. The destination folder does not exist. 2. When the Overwrite check box is not checked, an attempt is made to copy to a file having the same file name. 3. An attempt is made to overwrite a protected file 4. Any other cause (such as a file being used by another application or OS problem) File copying completed. The number of divisions of a send file recorded in the folder. Check. checksum file and the number of files actually existing do not match. 1. A file having an invalid file name exists in the data folder. Delete possibly invalid file names from the folder list. 2. The number of files in a divided file is wanting. Identify the wanting files in the folder list and recopy them.
File copying end Send file not found, or invalid file name in the folder. Check.
3-21
III SERVICE TOOL
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2.6.5 Unsuccessful file transfer
2.6
Troubleshooting ISW Trns
A. Cannot open a file error If errors occur while running the ISW Trns program, take the actions suggested below to correct them. 2.6.1 Unable to run ISW Trns Corrupted ISWTrns.EXE file Set up again. The setup disk is corrupted. Verify the setup disk and then set up again. 2.6.2 Send file is not displayed when a combo box item is selected The send file is not stored in the folder. Check to see if the send file is stored in the folder appearing in the [Folder] text box in [Versions]. Use the [File Copy] function if the file storage The file is used by any other program or by the system. Close that other program. If the file transfer. still fails, reboot Windows. B. Cannot send a Term Test file error The cable is not in firm position. Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm position or if the cable is not impaired. The copier is not ready to receive. Check to see if the copier is ready to receive. C. Unsuccessful transmission to the LPT port error The cable is not in firm position. Check to see if the cable is inserted in firm. position or if the cable is not impaired. Invalid data has been transmitted. Check to from the file information window to see if the receive mode (receiving board type) of the copier and the send file on the PC match. If the file is transmitted for the first time, check with its vendor. The PC parallel port is set in ECP mode. Consulting the manual, free the parallel port from ECP mode. Compatibility between the PC parallel port and the copier port. Verify by testing on a PC with proven trans mission performance. Use a cable shorter than 2 meters in length.
III SERVICE TOOL
location is unknown. Check to see if the base data folder setting in the option window is not wrong. Verify the base folder setting. Use the [File Copy] function if the file storage location is unknown. Invalid file name (altered) The file name of a file must be used exactly as it is delivered. If a file is renamed, it cannot be displayed or selected. If a file name has been altered, return it to its original file name. Invalid folder name (altered) If a folder as created with [Make Folder] in the option window is renamed, it cannot be located. Restore the original folder name and check. 2.6.3 NG produced by a file check
Corrupted send file Copy the file again and recheck. If NG recurs, check with the vendor of that file. 2.6.4 ?? produced by a file check
2.7
Connecting to the ISW connector
The ISW connector is at the right side of the copier. 2.7.1 Procedure Connect the PC port and the copier ISW port with a interface cable. Connect port is correct. Use the USB port or Parallel port.
With any other model, the checksum file (*.SUM) had not been copied when the send file was copied to the PC. Copy the checksum to the same folder as the file is copied. It would be copied automatically if the [File Copy] function is used.
3-22
INTERNET ISW
3 INTERNET ISW
3.1 What is the Internet ISW?
The Internet ISW is the system to perform ISW, by indicating ISW using the Internet mail (E-mail) or browser to let copier automatically acquire the subject program from program server and rewrite its own program. With this Internet ISW, you can update copier's programs just by transmitting E-mail with simple keyword described, without visiting customer's office. With the Web function, you can perform the ISW on customer site, without carrying the actual programs with you.
3.2
Operating environment
To use the Internet ISW function, the following conditions must be satisfied. A. The copier is connected to a built in network where programs can be downloaded from the Internet using ftp or http protocol. *1 B. The Internet ISW does not function in copier under the following conditions. (1) The reset switch (SW1) is OFF. (3) The copier is shut OFF by the auto shut off function. *1 Programs can be downloaded using Firewall. Note: The Internet ISW does not function even if the copier receives the Internet ISW designating mail, as long as it is in any of the above conditions. The Internet ISW starts when the above conditions are released. However, the mails are able to have period of validity. The Internet ISW continues to function in the condition of a paper jam or SC occurs, or in the low power mode. (2) The main switch (SW2) is OFF.
3.3
Main features
With the Internet ISW, the following functions are available. A. Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system *2 By sending simple keywords to a copier by E-Mail, the programs in the copier are rewritten automatically. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. *3 (1) Overall control board (I) (2) Printer control board (C) (3) Operation board /1 (O) (4) RADF control board (F) (5) FNS control board (N)
* *
2 3
To use the function, the E-Mail remote notification system must be setup separately. The available boards are different depending on the copier models. B. Internet ISW using Web utility By accessing copier main body's homepage via PC web browser, programs in the copier are rewritten
automatically. To use the function, a Web terminal that is networked to the copier is necessary. *4 4 In case it is connected to a LAN, it can only be used within the LAN.
3-23
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.4
Initial setting
To use the Internet ISW, the related settings such as network parameter, program server address, firewall address must be performed in the copier main body beforehand. Also, to use the [1.1 Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system], the related settings such as account registration must be set on the mail server separately. For the details, please refer to "3. Mail remote notification system". 3.4.1 Setting on Control panel
First, set the copier's IP address on the control panel, to network the copier. If it has already been set, go to "2.4.2 Setting on Web brouser". a. Procedure 1. Select "Key operator mode" on the control panel. 2. Select "[1] System initial setting". 3. Select "[3] IP address setting".
III SERVICE TOOL
4. Enter [IP address], [Subnet mask] and [Gateway address]. *5 5. Reboot the copier.
*
Copier's IP address, etc. are usually assigned by the system administrator. For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. Setting on Web browser
3.4.2
Next, set the program server, etc. from the Web browser. To use the Web browser, prepare a networked PC *6.
*
Prepare a PC by borrowing customer's PC or carrying laptop PC, for example. (Considerations) In any setting item, space cannot be set. If there is a mistake in input process on the Web browser, be sure to correct it according to error message displayed. If the mistake is left without correction, program download error may occur. Web's layout may change without prior notice.
3-24
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 a. Procedure 1. Start the Web browser. *7
INTERNET ISW
2. Specify the copier's IP address that you have entered at "2.4.1 Setting on Control panel".
*
If you access the copier's http address, the [Main page] as the top figure on next page appears. If proxy is set on the web browser, it may not be able to access the copier's http address (web page). For the details, please contact the customer's system administrator. As Web browser, Internet Explorer or Netscape is recommended. Do not perform setting from two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web Utility Main Page 3. On the [Main page], click the [Environment setup], to display [Login to Environment setup] page.
Login window to Environment setting
3-25
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
4. On [Login to Environment setup] page, enter the key operator password (the same password as key operator mode password) and click Apply. The environment setup list appears. Then click [Extension for maintenance].
Environment setup screen
III SERVICE TOOL
5. On [Login to Extension for maintenance] page, enter the password (the same password as mode change menu password) and click Apply. The environment setting list appears. Then click [Internet ISW].
Login window to Extension for maintenance
Extension for maintenance screen
3-26
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 6. Click [Initial Setting].
INTERNET ISW
Internet ISW main screen 7. Set proxy server. When you don't use proxy server (firewall), go to Step 9.
3-27
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
Enableproxy
Select [no] if you do not use proxy Select [Use ftp proxy] if you use ftp proxy Select [Use http proxy] if you use http proxy
Proxy server Type *8
If you selected [Use ftp proxy] for [Use of proxy], select the type of proxy from the following. Type1 [USER USER@HOST] Type2 [OPEN HOSTNAME] Type3 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDSITE HOSTNAME] Type4 [FW USERNAMEFW PASSWORDUSER USER@HOST]
Proxy server IP Address Port Number User name on the proxy server
If you use proxy server, enter the IP address of the proxy server. If you use proxy server, set the port No. that is used by the proxy server. If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set an account name for the proxy server.
Password for the proxy server If you selected Type1 or Type2 for [Type of proxy server], set a password for the proxy server.
*
III SERVICE TOOL
Types 2, 3 and 4 are not guaranteed. When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Next]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 8. Set the program server. (Proxy server is used)
3-28
INTERNET ISW
Program server address
Enter the address of the server where programs to download are stored. Select the protocol you use from the drop down list at the left and enter the following address in the test box at the right. In case of ftp, it is the relative path from the home directory. Example: ftp://210.226.5.5/EUR/8050/
User name on the program server Password for the program server Receiving time out
Enter the account name of the program server. Enter the program server password. Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes) If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 9. Set the program server. (Proxy is not used.)
Protocol Program server IP Address Target directory
Select a protocol to receive programs. Enter the IP address of the server where programs to download are stored. For http, enter path that follows the host domain. For ftp, enter the relative path from the home directory. Example: EUR/8050/
User name on the program server Password for the Program server Receiving time out
Enter the account name of the program server. Enter the program server password. Set the program reception timeout. (Default: 30 minutes) If timeout occurs, the program downloading is forcibly terminated. Without performing ISW, the machine recovers to normal mode.
3-29
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
When you finish entering all items, click [Next] and check the contents on the setting confirmation screen. If all are fine, click [Finish]. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. 10. Perform the download test. This test downloads "test.dat" from the program server set in the initial setting, to ensure all items have been set appropriately. If the download test fails, check the setting items again according to the error message. When the test finished successfully, the communication speed and estimated download time are displayed as shown below. Draw upon the data to decide [Reception timeout].
III SERVICE TOOL
3-30
INTERNET ISW
If the download test fails, response error code sent from the server is displayed as follows. There may be input errors. Check the initial setting again.
3-31
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.5
3.5.1
Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system

Function
Customer engineer sends an E-mail with simple keyword description. Then, the copier that received the mail downloads specified program from the program server and rewrites its program. This function is executed by a different command (keyword) from the list print acquisition function of the [EMail remote notification system]. A. The boards of which programs can be rewritten with the Internet ISW are as follows. (1) Overall control board: I0 (2) Printer control board: C0 (3) Operation board /1: O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5 (4) RADF control board: F0 (5) FNS control board: N0 B. You can acquire version information of programs to be rewritten. C. You can find out how to use [Internet ISW] by mail. To use the above functions, it is necessary to send the copier E-mail with the specified simple keyword (command) description. The following are the commands and the options. Command ISW Option Subject board name Description Specifies name of a board to ISW. (must be entered) The specifiable boards are as follows. [I0, C0, O0, O1, O2, O3, O4, O5, F0, N0] The available boards are different depending on models. File name can be specified with "=" as [Subject board name=File name]. Timeout Specifies period of validity of mail. (From 5 to 1,440 minutes. Unit is minute. If none is specified, timeout takes place at 90 minutes.) When the time from mail transmission by CE to mail reception at copier exceeds the specified period, ISW is not performed due to expiration. ISWHELP Returns a help mail with the above command use descriptions.
III SERVICE TOOL
When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set beforehand. I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 bootO0.bin bootO1.bin bootO2.bin bootO3.bin bootO4.bin bootO5.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin
3-32
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 3.5.2 Transmitting E-Mail
INTERNET ISW
The following is an example of transmitting an E-mail with the aforementioned command to a copier. You can use either upper and lower case characters when typing a command (option) in E-mail. *9 When transmitting an E-mail to a copier, take care of the following. The ISW-designated mail has the period of validity. Therefore, set the date of mailer and time zone of the copier *10 accurately. One mail can be described with only one ISW command. If two or more commands are described, the second and later ones are ignored. Any mail software can be used. For example, mobile device mail, browser mail and so on. With the mail software in use, transmit mails in text mode. (Commands in mails in HTML mode cannot be handled correctly.) Place at least one space or TAB *11 between command and option, and option and option described in mails. Type every command in mails only with alphanumeric one-byte characters (ASCII characters). If other characters *12 are typed, an error mail with [Command not found] is returned. Type every command in mails from the line head. Line head starting with a space or TAB is ignored. Do not attach files or others to the mails transmitted to copiers. Depending on the size of files, such mails may be handled as illegal mails and copier may refuse to receive. Do not type signatures in the mails transmitted to copiers. If auto signature addition is set on the mail software, turn off the setting. Signatures may be handled as commands and error mails may be returned from the copier.
* *
Case sensitivity is on for the file name. Take care when typing. Set in the E-mail transmission setting for [E-mail transmission setting]. Linefeed is not available. Two-byte characters also cause errors. Take care not to use them.
10 * 11
*
12
(1) Transmitting ISW command The transmission mail must have the following descriptions. In Subject, type a CE password that has been entered in the mail reception setting. For the details, please refer to the "3. E-Mail remote notification system". In To, type mail address of a copier. In Body, type a command.
3-33
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW An example of I0 ISW:
Copier's mail address
Password for authentication

aaaaa.com
Command
An example of return mail (ISW start) *13
III SERVICE TOOL
When the copier allows the ISW, it moves into the ISW mode, displaying [Remote ISW executing] on the operation panel. The copier cannot be used while it is in the ISW mode. *14 Then, a mail like the following is returned from the copier.
13 14
The return mail is in English regardless of the language selected for the copier's main body operation panel display. During the ISW, main switch (SW2) of the copier does not function. The copier cannot be shutdown.
3-34
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 An example of return mail (ISW complete)
INTERNET ISW
When ISW completes and copier reboots automatically, a mail like the following is returned from the copier. You can confirm that the ROM version is upgraded.
However, if transmission of the above two kinds of return mails fails, the mails are not retransmitted. When specifying a file name When specifying a file name for ISW command, type the name with "=" following the subject board name. In this case, "65FAI012UGH0.bin" must exist in the program server address that has been set in the Internet ISW setting. Transmission mail ISW I0 = 65FAI012UGH0.bin 30 When transmission mail exceeds the period of validity On ISW command, period of validity (timeout) can be changed set for every mail. (Default: 90 minutes) If period from the mail transmission to mail reception at copier (duration) is longer than the timeout period, ISW is not performed by that mail.
3-35
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW Transmission mail
aaaaa.com
5 minutes is set for timeout
III SERVICE TOOL
Return mail
aaaaa.com
Timeout took place as 6 minutes had passed.
3-36
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) Transmitting ISWHELP command Manual that shows how to use command is returned by mail. It is useful if you forget how to use command and options. Transmission mail ISWHelp Return mail
INTERNET ISW
3-37
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.6
3.6.1
Internet ISW using Web utility

Function
Using the copier's web utility, just by clicking on the browser *15, customer engineer can let the copier automatically download programs from the program server and rewrite its own programs. The boards of which programs can be rewritten are the same as those of [Internet ISW using E-mail
*
remote notification system]. 15 Usually, it is not possible to access company-inside copier from outside exceeding firewall. How to use
3.6.2
A. Going to Internet ISW page The same as instructed in "2.4 Initial Setting", go to the [Internet ISW] page on the Web browser.
III SERVICE TOOL
aaaaa.com
Internet ISW main screen Next to each board name, the program version is displayed.
3-38
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 B. Performing ISW
INTERNET ISW
From the [ISW] items, select a board to ISW and check the box. When specifying a name of file to download, type the name in the text box of [File name]. When no file name is specified, the following files are acquired from the program server address set beforehand. I0 bootI1.bin C0 bootC1.bin O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 When the above input completes, click [ISW]. C. Starting ISW When ISW starts, the following screen appears. If there is any input error, click [Back] and reset the item according to the message in red. bootO0.bin bootO1.bin bootO2.bin bootO3.bin bootO4.bin bootO5.bin F0 bootF1.bin N0 bootN1.bin
ISW execution screen When ISW completes successfully, the copier automatically reboots. If you click [Check status], you can check the current ISW status. If you click [Cancel], you can stop the ISW only while program is being downloaded
3-39
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW D. Checking ISW status
III SERVICE TOOL
ISW status check screen This screen shows the current performance or error. The display items are as follows. ISW is downloading
*
ISW is writing Finished *16 ISW was cancelled due to transferring problem ISW was cancelled due to transferring overtime ISW was cancelled due to writing problem to flash memory Copier reboots after ISW completes normally. Do not click [Refresh] on the browser.
16
E. Ending ISW When ISW completes and copier reboots, ensure that the program version is upgraded on the [Internet ISW main screen].
3-40
INTERNET ISW
3.7
3.7.1
Precautions for use

Prior announcement to administrator
When performing the Internet ISW, be sure to contact the copier's administrator or the like and get his/her agreement beforehand. Perform ISW in condition that the copier is not being used. If the copier is being used (a job is being processed), the Internet ISW is not performed. 3.7.2 If power failure occurs during data rewriting
While ISW rewriting is in progress *17, the operation panel and main switch (SW2) are locked. However, if the main power goes down due to power failure or other, the copier becomes unable to start up. *18 This is only the problem on rewriting the overall control board and the operation board/1. Even if errors occur on rewriting other boards, the boards can be overwritten again with the Internet ISW. If the copier becomes unable to start for the above reason, go to the copier's site and rewrite the program using the ISWTrns. <How to recover> Overall control board : Turn ON the main switch (SW2) and then perform ISW. Operation board /1: Turn ON the main switch (SW2) while pressing HELP and CHECK button and then perform ISW. For the details, please refer to "1. ISW"
* *
17 18
Rewriting takes maximum 10 minute. No problem is cased by power failure during program downloading process. ISW of multiple programs
3.7.3
It is not possible with the Internet ISW to ISW several programs concurrently. Always perform ISW one by one. If several programs must be rewritten at the same time, perform ISW from board of higher priority. *19 Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 RADF control board (F), FNS control board (N) Printer control board (C), Operationboard/1 (O) Overall control board (I)
When rewriting several programs, SC may occur during rewriting intervals between programs. However, such SC will clear when all the subject programs are rewritten.
*
19
In case of the Internet ISW using the E-mail remote notification system, the sequence of transmitted ISW designating mails and mails received by copier may change. Transmit multiple mails while ensuring reception of completion mail or putting enough intervals.
3.7.4
If ISW fails in low power mode
If ISW fails due to errors in program download, data check, and so on, the copier recovers into normal mode. Only in low power mode, the copier reboots when ISW fails.
3-41
III SERVICE TOOL
INTERNET ISW
3.8
3.8.1
Proxy server authentication in Internet ISW

What is a proxy server?
It is a server that receives request (HTTP or FTP etc) from a client inside the firewall, and represents the client. With this server, access to outside the firewall is enabled. 3.8.2 Authentication of proxy server
Following are the lists of commands of each authentication type: All the 4 types below are supported in the Internet ISW. 3.8.3 Type and command list for authentication on proxy server
The following shows the brief description of each authentication type and the list of commands being used. A. Type 1: USER user@host
III SERVICE TOOL
This type does not require an authentication to the proxy sever when accessing outside via proxy. In case it is possible to access outside via proxy server without entering user name and password of the proxy server, this type may be used. Command Command USER PASS Parameter user@host password Reply Code 331 230 Description Sends user name of the program server and program server's address Sends password for the above user name
B. Type 2: OPEN host It is almost the same as Type 1. The only difference is a command at the authentication. Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 1. Command Command OPEN Parameter host Reply Code ftp expanded function: Defined by each server USER PASS user password 331 230 Sends user name of the program sever Sends password for the above user name Description Sends program server's address
3-42
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 C. Type 3: FW user FW password SITE host This type requires an authentication to the proxy server itself when accessing outside.
INTERNET ISW
It is necessary to enter information of the server that you wish to access, user name and password of the proxy sever (firmware). In case the user name and password of the proxy server are required when accessing outside via proxy sever, this type may be used. Command Command USER PASS SITE Parameter FW user FW password host Reply Code 331 230 ftp expanded function: Defined by each server USER PASS user password 331 230 Sends user name of the program sever Sends password for the above user name Description Sends user name of the proxy server Sends password for the above user name Sends program server's address
D. FW user name FW password USER user@host It is almost the same as Type 3. The only difference is a command at the authentication. Apply this type when all the settings are set properly but communication fails with Type 3. Command Command USER PASS USER PASS Parameter FW user FW password user@host password Reply Code 331 230 331 230 Description Sends user name of the proxy server Sends password for the above user name Sends user name of the program server and program server's address Sends password for the above user name
3.8.4
Remarks For fwtk2.1 (for unix) and Black Jumbo Dog (for Windows), authentication Type 1 is used. Type 1 is used in many proxy servers. If you are not sure about the authentication type of the proxy server, KC recommends that you use Type 1 in the meantime.
3-43
III SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM
4 MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM

4.1 What is the Mail remote notification system?
Mail remote notification system allows to acquire machine data, that have been available as "List Output Mode" in 36 mode from copier, through internet mail (E-mail). This function is achieved without visiting customer site and printing on paper if the simple keyword is e-mailed.
4.2
Operation environment
Following conditions should be satisfied in order to use mail remote notification system. The function works during JAM, SC or Low power mode, but does not work during shut-off. However, the sent mail does not disappear and the copier process the mail after next starting up. During low power mode, the machine operation is as usual. A. The mail server *1 that allows copier to receive mail in POP3 or IMAP protocol. (It is preferred that mail server can receive external mail and service constantly.) B. The mail server *2 that allows copier to transmit mail in SMTP protocol. (It is preferred that mail server can send external mail and service constantly.). C. Mail remote notification system disabling conditions on copier are as follows. (1) Main power switch is OFF. (2) Sub power switch is OFF.
*
III SERVICE TOOL
Popper, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. Assign one account per one copier. It can be the same machine to the SMTP server. "Mail remote notification system" corresponds to "POP before SMTP". Sendmail 8.9, qmail, Lotus Notes, Mercury Mail etc. It can be the same machine to the receiving server.
*2
4.3
Initial setting
In order to use Mail remote notification system, settings such as network parameter on copier and account registration on mail server are necessary. A. Setting on operation panel In order to connect the copier main body to network, IP address of the copier should be set on operation panel. If it is already set, please go to "B. Setting on Web. a. Procedure 1. Select [Key operator mode] on operation panel. 2. Select [1. System initial setting]. 3. Select [3. IP address setting]. 4. Input [IP address], [Subnetmask] and [Gateway address]*1. 5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
*
System administrator usually assigns IP address and network related setting to copier. Please ask system administrator for details.
3-44
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 B. Setting on Web
Next, input setting for mail server from Web browser. Please use PC*2 connected to the network in order to use Web browser.
*
Prepare PC; borrow the customer's one or bring notebook computer. Note: No blank space should be entered for any column. Following characters cannot be used for the E-mail address. ()<> ;:"[] When the error message is displayed on the web browser, correct the input error following to the message. If the error is not corrected, mail sending or receiving may fail. Web design is subject to change without notice. (1) How to set a. Procedure 1. Start up Web browser *1. 2. Type IP address of the copier you input to the [A. Setting on operation panel]. When accessing Web, the [main page] (see upper figure in next page) is displayed.
If proxy is set on Web browser, it may not possible to access web utilities of copier. Please ask system administrator for details. KC recommends to use Internet explorer or Netscape as the Web browser. Do not perform setting from the two or more browsers concurrently.
Copyright 2000 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Copier Web utilities main page
3-45
III SERVICE TOOL
3. In [Main] page, click [Environment Setup] button and display [Environment setup log in] page.
Environment setup log in page 4. Input key operator password in [Environment setup log in] page, then click [Apply].
III SERVICE TOOL
[Environment set up] page is displayed. Then click [E-Mail transmission setting]. Even key operator password set "0000" in 25-mode setting, input "0000".
Environment setup page
3-46
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 5. Set the transmission setting.
In order to use Mail remote notification system, registration of E-mail address of manager (machine administrator), and sending (SMTP) server input is mandatory.
Manager Address *1 DNS Server IP Address Time difference *1
To specify E-mail address of machine manager. The e-mail address to notify error from SMTP . Input as needed. If not needed, leave it blank. The send time of mail is calculated referring this value. Input the time difference from UTC within the range -1200 (12h00min) to +1200 (+12h00min). If setting is not made, it is +0000 (the same as UTC). For example, the time difference in New York is -5 hours, - 500 is input.
Sending mail (SMTP) sever *1 Condition Informing Address *1 E-Mail Transmission *1
The IP address of SMTP sever. It is for mail transmission system. *2 You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used. It is for mail transmission system. *2 You may leave it blank when mail transmission system is not used.
*1 *2
The same setting can be set on LCD of the copier. But do not set concurrently from web browser and Web. Please see the "INSTRUCTION MANUAL" of copier if use the mail transmission system.
E-Mail transmission setting page
3-47
III SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM 6. Click [Apply] button to finish input.
III SERVICE TOOL
3-48
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) Test mail sending
Click [Sending test] button and then a test mail is sent to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [Manager address] set on Step5. Click [Sending test] to display result of the test mail. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message. a. Procedure 1. Set the reception setting. In the [Extension for maintenance] column at the bottom of the page, input the password to change the mode then click the initial setting. Use the password for changing modes.
Extension for maintenance page (for customer engineer)
3-49
III SERVICE TOOL
The records of sent and received mails listed on mail log on the [Extension for maintenance] page are the latest 10 mails. Even the main power switch is turned OFF, the communication is logged and kept though there are some restrictions.
III SERVICE TOOL
E-Mail reception setting page
3-50
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 2. Set the e-mail reception screen based on the following. Enable E-mail notification Interval between fetching mails
Select [Yes] to use Mail remote notification system. Default is [No]. Interval between checking mail on receiving mail server from copier. The interval can be set within the range from 1 min. to 60 min. Usually, set around 10 min. considering load for network. The IP address of receiving mail server. Select [POP3] or [IMAP]. Default is [POP3]. The account name for copier assigned on receiving mail server. The password for the above user name. E-mail address of the copier. Usually, the name is [User name@receiving mail server name]. The name added to the mail subject sent from the copier. It can be blank. Input password used for the "Subject" of the mail sent to the copier. The copier uses this password for security check.
Receiving mail server Kind of mail spool User name on the server *1 Password *2 E-Mail Address of this copy machine Nickname *3 CE Password *2
Also Notice to the administrator (CC mail)
- All mails
mail received by copier does not match to the registered password or the mail size is 10 k-byte or larger. Transfer all sending mails from Mail remote notification system. Input address for the transfer if above [Only illegal mail] or [all mails] is selected. Select whether to contain the time difference from CE`s transmission and copier reception on the mail. Default is [No]. Select whether SMTP server transmits the mail after POP (IMAP) server attests. Default is [Yes].
Administrator E-Mail address Announce delay time in reply mail *4 Enable POP (IMAP) before SMTP
* * *
1 2 3
Consult system administrator and create mail account for copier on receiving mail server. No echo back from the password. Use it as identifier, when managing multiple copiers. Use it to check the copier. is turned ON or not. If the time of the copier or the mail application software is not set correctly (including time difference), wrong time is described. In that case, select [No]. 3. Click "Apply" to finish input.
*4
3-51
III SERVICE TOOL
- No - Only illegal mails
Default (Do not send the e-mail to the administrator) Specify whether to transfer mail in following conditions; When the
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM 4. Test mail sending and receiving.
Click [Sending and receiving test] button and then sending and receiving tests are performed by one transaction. It checks whether the sent mail is correctly received. Click [Sending and receiving test] to display result of the test. If it is failed, please re-confirm the setting following to error message. Sending mail test Mail sending test is performed to SMTP server. Test mail is sent to [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2. Receiving mail test Receiving test from receiving mail server is performed. Test mail is received by [E-Mail Address of the copy machine] set on Step2.
5. Turn OFF/ON power switch of copier.
III SERVICE TOOL
3-52
4.4
How to use the Mail remote notification system
A. Function CE can use following functions of Mail remote notification system by e-mailing simple keyword to copier. CE can receive the data of the desired copier data list by the e-mail. JOB memory list User management list Font pattern list Machine management list 1 Adjustment data list Parameter list E.K.C. management list Machine management list 2 Counter list Pixel ratio data list In order to use above function, the simple keyword (command) must be sent by e-mail. The following table shows the command and options. Command GETLOG Options [List output] JOB USER FONT MANAGEMENT ADJUSTMENT PARAMETER EKC 2MANAGEMENT COUNTER PIXEL ALL Not specified CHPASS [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] [OldPasswd] [NewPasswd] HELP Not specified Explanation The [List output] specified by the following is returned by mail. [JOB memory list] [User management list] [Font pattern list] [Machine management list 1] [Adjustment data list] [Parameter list] [EKC management list] [Machine management list 2] [Counter list] [Pixel ratio data list] All of above list data. Edited [Counter list] for the cellular phone display. To change the password used to certify mail. Specify current password Specify new password Help mail explaining usage of the above commands is sent. H C J U F M A P E 2 C PI AL Minimum G
3-53
III SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM B. Send mails
The example of the mail containing the command to the copier is shown. The command and option on the mail are recognized by the top letters without distinction between capital and small letters. Accordingly, not all letters of the command must be typed. It is recognized by the minimum letters in the above table *1. When sending mail to the copier, please note followings. Note: Mail software on any OS, handy terminal, free-mail using browser can be used without any difference. When sending mail on mail software, be sure to use text mode. (Mail in HTML mode cannot be handle properly.) As for the reception on mail software, the desirable maximum displayable letters per one line is 128 and over (single-byte). (The length of the one line reaches to 128 letters in the part of the data list mail. Accordingly, mail may not be easily seen on the cellular phone or other mobile devices.) Put minimum one space or TAB*2 between the command and option on the mail. Use only single-byte alphanumeric character (ASCII character) for the command on mail. Otherwise, an error mail, [Command Not Found], is returned. Type command from the beginning of the line. If the line starts with blank or TAB, the line is ignored. Maximum number of commands that can be contained in one mail is 10. The eleventh and onwards commands are ignored. Do not attach file to the mail sent to the copier. Depending on file size, it is handled as illegal mail. Do not attach signature to the mail sent to the copier. If automatic attachment of the signature is already set to the mail software, change the setting not to attach the signature. The signature is regarded as command and error mail may be returned. While copier is sending or receiving the mail, if the power switch of the copier is turned OFF or list output is performed on the copier, two mails may be returned. The maximum number of the mails that copier receives from the mail server is 5 per one time. If the mail server has more received mails at a time, remaining mails are processed after the [interval between fetching mails].
* *
III SERVICE TOOL
1 2
Example: All of G, GE, GET, GETL, GETLO, GETLOG equal to specify GETLOG. Return cannot be used.
3-54
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (1) Send GETLOG command Following should be described in the sending mail. a. Subject: Input "CE password" set in reception setting. To: Input E-mail address of the copier. Body: Input command. Example of mail requesting counter list
Mail address of the copier CE password
Command
3-55
III SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM b. Example of mail requesting counter list*1
Serial number of copier Mail address of the sender Nickname of the copier
III SERVICE TOOL
Requested counter list
Language of the returned mail is English only.
3-56
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 c. When option is not specified
GETLOG command without option is specified, Counter list for the cellular phone display is returned. Sending mail [GetLog] Example of returned mail
3-57
III SERVICE TOOL
MAIL REMOTE NOTIFICATION SYSTEM d. To receive multiple data list
Data lists in reply to GETLOG command are separately returned by mails; one list per mail. If the same list is requested twice or more in a mail, the list is returned only once. When followings are described in a mail, both counter list mail and machine management list 1 mail are returned. [GetLog Counter] [GetLog Management] When the commands are written in one line continuously, Management (the later command) is ignored and only counter list (the first command) is returned. [GetLog Counter Management] e. When unrecognizable option is specified. Sending mail [GetLog Log] Returned mail [Option Not Found GetLog Log]
III SERVICE TOOL
(2) Send CHPASS command The sending mail password described on the subject can be changed remotely. Specify 20 or less letters to [OldPasswd] and [NewPasswd]. Use ASCII characters except space. Password cannot be changed by mail if you don't remember the old password. Change the [CE password] from the browser, explained in Chapter 2. a. Example of correct password change In this case, old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios]. Sending mail [ChPass U-BIX Sitios] Returned mail [SE's Password was changed successfully. New Password [Sitios]] When the password is changed, use [NewPasswd] from the next mail. When the mail is sent with [OldPasswd], it is treated as illegal mail. b. Example of invalid password change Old password [U-BIX] is changed to new password [Sitios]. Sending mail [ChPass Sitios U-BIX] Returned mail [Old Password is Invalid. ChPass Sitios U-BIX] Then, password was not changed. Accordingly, the password is unchanged and [U-BIX]. Sending mail [ChPass Sitios] Returned mail [Violation on format by new password. ChPass Sitios] When the new password is blank, password is not changed.
3-58
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (3) Send HELP command
The manual describing above usage of the commands is returned by mail. Use this function when you forget how to use command and option. Sending mail [Help] Returned mail
4.5
Disabling system
In order to disable Mail remote notification system, in Mail reception setting, select [No] for the "Enable E-Mail notification" and then click [Apply] button.
3-59
III SERVICE TOOL
III SERVICE TOOL
Blank page
3-60
SERVICE SCHEDULE
IV SERVICE
1. SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.1 Service schedule
Guarantee period (5 years or 5,000,000 copies)
Service item Main body Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 200,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 400,000 copies Periodic check (3) Every 600,000 copies Periodic check (4) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (5) Every 1,500,000 copies Periodic check (6) Every 2,000,000 copies Periodic check (7) Every 2,500,000 copies Periodic check (8) Every 4,000,000 copies Maintenance AFR-20 *1 Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) *1 Every 1,800,000 copies
x 10,000 copies Service 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count 49 times 24 times 12 times 8 times 4 times 3 times 2 times 1 time 1 time 49 times 2 times
*1
Perform the periodic check (1) for the AFR-20 at 2 times (1,800,000 copies and 3,600,000 copies).
4-1
IV SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE

x 10,000 copies Service 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 150 180 200 250 300 350 360 400 450 500 count 49 times 8 times 1 time 49 times 24 times 12 times 4 times 1 time 49 times 9 times 4 times 1 time 49 times 49 times 1 time
Service item Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 600,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 2,500,000 copies Maintenance Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 200,000 copies Periodic check (2) FN-120/ Every 400,000 FN-9 copies Periodic check (3) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (4) Every 2,500,000 copies Cover Maintenance Inserter Every 100,000 D copies
C-208
IV SERVICE
Periodic check (1) Every 500,000 copies Periodic check (2) Every 1,000,000 copies Periodic check (3) Every 3,000,000 copies PK-5 Maintenance Every 100,000 copies
Maintenance TMG-3 Every 100,000 copies Periodic check (1) Every 4,000,000 copies
4-2
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.2
Maintenance items
A. Main body (Every 100,000 copies/prints) ClassificaNo. tion 1 2 Preparations Drum Implementation classification Service item (1) Image check (1) Drum cartridge (2) Drum unit cleaning 4 Setting powder Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available) 4 Blower brush 1 4 Hydro wipe (cleaning pad is not available) 1 1 ( ) Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement Materials Tools used
Charging corona
(1) Charging wire assy /Y, /M, /C, /K (2) Changing grid plate /Y, /M, /C, /K (3) Charging corona dustproof filter
Developer
(1) Developer (Y, M, C, K) (2) Developer unit cleaning
5 6
Transfer belt ADU
(1) Belt cleaning blade (1) Separation corona unit (2) Paper feed roller /BP (3) Feed roller /BP (4) Double feed prevention roller /BP (5) Registration roller cleaning (6) Conveyance roller section cleaning (7) ADU paper through sensor cleaning (1) Ozone filter /1 (2) Dust proof filter /1 (3) Dust proof filter /2
Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Blower brush 1 2 1 1 1 Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240) Multemp FF-RM (or Solvest 240) Roller cleaner 1 *1
Exterior
Fixing
(1) Fixing roller /U *2 (2) Fixing roller /L *2 (3) Cleaning roller
9 *1 *2
Reverse/ exit
(1) Decurler roller 25 mode count reset
Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode to prevent the fixing jam when replacing the decurler roller. When replacing the fixing roller /U or /L, be sure to apply Multemp FF-RM on the heat insulating sleeve /U or /L, respectively.
4-3
IV SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE Classification
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement
No.
Service item
Materials Tools used Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner/ blower brush Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner/ blower brush Hydro wipe Hydro wipe
10
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller /1, /2, /3 (2) Feed roller /1, /2, /3 (3) Double feed prevention roller /1, /2, /3 Vertical (1) Conveyance roller, sensor
11 conveyance Scanner 12 13 14 Write unit (1) Original glass, exposure lamp, reflector, lens, mirror, sensor (1) Dust-proof glass (Y, M, C, K) (1) Toner supply unit cleaning (1) Toner collection box replacing/cleaning (2) Exterior cleaning (3) Image and paper through check (4) PM counter resetting (25 mode) ( )
Toner supply Toner 15 collection
Hydro wipe
16 Final check (1) W.U.T. check Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner
IV SERVICE
B. AFR-20 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Preparations 1 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller (4) Pre-separation rubber (5) Rubber roller (6) Reflective sensor (7) Conveyance belt 2 3 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Blower brush Blower brush Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Service item (1) Paper through check Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement Materials Tools used
Final check (1) Paper through check 4-4
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 C. C-208 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Preparations Paper feed (1)Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller (4) Paper dust removing (5) Sensor (6) Gear 3 4 Exterior (1) Exterior cleaning Service item (1) Paper through check
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement
Materials Tools used
1 2
Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Blower brush Plus guard No.2 *1 Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
( )
Final check (1) Paper through check
D. FN-120 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Preparations Conveyance Drive (1) Main drive unit (2) Tray up/down drive unit (3) Shift drive unit (4) Paper exit drive section (5) Staple unit 4 5 6 *1 Stapler Exterior (1) Staple check (1) Exterior cleaning ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Service item (1) Paper through check (1) Conveyance roller Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Actual durable count: 5,000 Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement Materials Tools used
1 2 3
Final check (1) Paper through check If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
4-5
IV SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE E. FN-9 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Preparations Conveyance Drive (1) Conveyance roller (1) Main drive unit (2) Tray up/down drive unit (3) Shift drive unit (4) Paper exit drive section (5) Staple unit (6) Folding unit 4 5 6 7 *1 Folding Stapler Exterior (1) Folding roller (1) Staple check (1) Exterior cleaning Service item (1) Paper through check
1 2 3
Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Actual durable count: 5,000 Stapler positioning jig Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1
Final check (1) Paper through check If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it.
F.
Cover Inserter D (Every 100,000 copies/prints) Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement
IV SERVICE
No.
Classification Conveyance
Service item (1) Conveyance roller
Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
1 2
Paper feed (1) Feed roller (2) Paper feed conveyance roller (3) Double feed prevention roller Final check (1) Paper through check (2) Exterior cleaning
4-6
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 G. PK-5 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. 1 2 Classification Service item
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used Blower brush Blower brush
Punch unit (1) Punch die Punch scraps section (1) Punch scraps dump (2) Punch scraps full sensor
Final check (1) Paper through check (2) Interior cleaning
Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
H. TMG-3 (Every 100,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Conveyance (2) Conveyance belt 2 Trimmer (1) Trimmer blade /U (2) Trimmer blade /L (3) Trimming box and its periphery 3 Stacker (1) Pusher section (2) Stacker section 4 5 Drive (1) Conveyance drive section (2) Exterior cleaning *1 If abnormal sound is heard due to insufficient oil, lubricate it. Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner ( ) ( ) Plus guard No.2 *1 Plus guard No.2 *1 Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner Service item (1) Conveyance roller Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement Materials Tools used Cleaning pad/ drum cleaner
Final check (1) Paper through check
4-7
IV SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.3
Periodic check items (main body)

Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 4 8 1 3 1 Hydro wipe/ drum cleaner 1 1 1 *1 1
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Charging corona Transfer belt Service item (1) Changing grid plate (2) Changing grid spring 2 (1) 1st transfer roller /K 25 mode count reset (2) 1st transfer roller /C 25 mode count reset (3) 2nd transfer roller /U (4) Belt drive roller cleaning (5) Transfer belt (6) Toner collection sheet /1 3 4 *1 *2 2nd transfer Fixing (1) 2nd transfer roller /L Materials Tools used
(1) Fixing cleaning unit *2 1 25 mode count reset Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" to prevent a image disturbances in the 25 Reset "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mod when replacing the fixing clean-
mode when replacing the 1st transfer roller /Y/M/C/K. ing unit. Otherwise, the message "You need to replace the fixing cleaning unit. Please call the service." appears and the copy/print prohibition state is started.
IV SERVICE
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Service item Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check cation ement ing 3 3 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 125,000 Actual durable count: 125,000
Paper feed (1) Feed rubber (tray/1, /2, /3) (2) Double feed prevention rubber (tray/1, /2, /3)
4-8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 C. Periodic check (III) (Every 600,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Charging corona Developer Transfer belt Registration Fixing Service item (1) Charging corona dustproof filter (1) Developing unit /Y, /M, /C, / K (1) Transfer belt separation claw (2) Belt cleaning brush unit (1) Registration cleaning sheet (1) Ball bearing /U (2) Ball bearing /L (3) Heat insulating sleeve /U 2 (4) Heat insulating sleeve /L 2 (5) Fixing torque limiter 1
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 4 3 1 1 2 2
1 2 3
4 5
Multemp FFRM (or Solvest 240) Multemp FFRM (or Solvest 240)
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Fixing 1 2nd transfer (1) Transfer ground plate unit Quantity Implementation classification Service item (1) Fixing drive gear 1 CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement Materials Tools used Multemp FFRM (or Solvest 240)
E. Periodic check (V) (Every 1,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Registration Transfer belt ADU (1) Separation claw solenoid (1) Feed rubber /BP (2) Double feed prevention rubber /BP Service item (1) Registration roller Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 1 1 1 Actual durable count: 125,000 Actual durable count: 125,000 Materials Tools used
1 2 3
4-9
IV SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE F. No. Periodic check (VI) (Every 2,000,000 copies/prints) Classification Vertical conveyance ADU 2 Service item (1) Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (1) Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (2) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3
Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
G. Periodic check (VII) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. 1 Classification Fixing Service item (1) Fixing upper lamp /1 (2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (3) Fixing lower lamp (4) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (5) Fixing temperature sensor /4 Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (tray/1, /2, /3) Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 1 1 1 1 3 Actual durable count: 800,000 Materials Tools used
IV SERVICE
4-10
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 H. Periodic check (VIII) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Service item
SERVICE SCHEDULE
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 800,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) (2) Pre-registration clutch (tray/1, /2, /3) ADU (1) ADU conveyance clutch /1
2 (2) ADU conveyance clutch /2
1 (3) ADU pre-registration clutch (4) Paper feed roller /BP (5) Paper feed clutch /BP 1
1 1
1.4
Periodic check items (AFR-20)

Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 1 1
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 1,800,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Service item Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 625,000 Actual durable count: 625,000 Actual durable count: 625,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller
4-11
IV SERVICE
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.5
Periodic check items (C-208)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 600,000 copies/prints) ClassificaNo. tion 1 Implementation classification Service item Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 1 1 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed roller (2) Feed roller (3) Double feed prevention roller
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Service item Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 (2) Pre-registration clutch 1 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,000,000 Actual durable count: 2,000,000
Paper feed (1) Paper feed clutch 1
IV SERVICE
4-12
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.6
Periodic check items (FN-120/FN-9)

Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 10 4
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 200,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Conveyance Service item (1) Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) (2) Intermediate conveyance roller /4 (sponge roller) Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 200,000 Actual durable count: 200,000
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 400,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Conveyance Service item (1) Stack assist roller (sponge roller) Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 Materials Tools used
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Stapler 1 Service item (1) Stapler unit 2 Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement Materials Tools used Stapler positioning jig Actual durable count: 200,000
No.
Classification Drive
Service item (1) FNS up/down motor
Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 2,500,000
4-13
IV SERVICE
D. Periodic check (IV) (Every 2,500,000 copies/prints)
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.7
Periodic check items (Cover Inserter D)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 500,000 copies/prints) ClassificaNo. tion 1 Implementation classification Service item Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 2 2 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 100,000 Actual durable count: 100,000
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /B (2) Double feed prevention roller assembly
B. Periodic check (II) (Every 1,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Implementation classification Service item Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 2 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 200,000
Paper feed (1) Feed roller assembly /A
C. Periodic check (III) (Every 3,000,000 copies/prints)0 No. Classification Service item Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 2 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 600,000
Paper feed (1) Torque limiter
1.8
IV SERVICE
Periodic check items (TMG-3)
A. Periodic check (I) (Every 4,000,000 copies/prints) No. Classification Trimmer Service item (1) Trimmer blade /U (2) Trimmer blade /L Implementation classification Quantity CleanLubri- Replac Check ing cation ement 1 1 Materials Tools used Actual durable count: 500,000 Actual durable count: 500,000
4-14
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.9
Note:
Replacement parts list
No. in this list is identical with No. in "5. Parts counter" and "1. Count of special parts" in the 25 mode.
No.
Unit
Parts name Toner collection box Ozone filter /1 Dust proof filter /1 Dust proof filter /2 Charging corona dust-proof filter Drum cartridge /Y Drum cartridge /M Drum cartridge /C Drum cartridge /K Charging wire assy /Y Charging grid plate /Y Charging wire assy /M Charging grid plate /M Charging wire assy /C Charging grid plate /C Charging wire assy /K Charging grid plate /K Charging grid spring Transfer belt 1st transfer roller /Y 1st transfer roller /M 1st transfer roller /C 1st transfer roller /K 2nd transfer roller /U Transfer belt separation claw Belt cleaning brush unit Toner collection sheet /1 Belt cleaning blade 2nd transfer roller /L Separation Discharging board unit Fixing cleaning unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L
Quantity 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Actual durable count 50,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 200,000 600,000 600,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 200,000 100,000 100,000
001 Toner correction 002 Main body 004 005 006 Charging corona 007 Drum 012 017 022 028 Charging corona 029 031 032 034 034 037 038 040 Transfer belt 041 042 043 044 045 046 048 049 050 051 2nd transfer 052 ADU 053 Fixing 054 055
4-15
IV SERVICE
200,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE No. Unit Developer /Y Developer /M Developer /C Developer /K Parts name
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 Actual durable count 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 2,500,000 200,000 200,000 5000 5000 200,000 200,000 400,000 200,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 200,000 100,000 100,000 600,000 500,000 500,000 625,000 625,000 625,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 600,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000
056 Developing 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 069 FN-120/FN-9 070 071 108 109 110 078 Cover Inserter D 079 080 081 083 084 085 086 087 TMG-3
Developing unit /Y (color label included) Developing unit /M (color label included) Developing unit /C (color label included) Developing unit /K (color label included) FNS up/down unit Stapler unit Stapler unit Staple Staple Paper exit roller /A (sponge roller) Intermediate conveyance roller (sponge roller) Stacking assist roller (sponge roller) Feed roller assembly /A Feed roller assembly /B Double feed prevention roller assembly Torque limiter Feed roller assembly /A Feed roller assembly /B Double feed prevention roller assembly Torque limiter Trimmer blade /U Trimmer blade /L Paper feed roller Feed roller Double feed prevention roller Registration cleaning sheet Fixing torque limiter Ball bearing /U (for upper roller) Heat insulating sleeve /U (for upper roller) Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3
IV SERVICE
087 092 AFR-20 093 095 113 Registration 112 Fixing unit 114 115 116 Vertical conveyance 117 ADU 118
4-16
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 No. Unit Parts name Paper feed rubber /1 Double feed prevention rubber /1 Paper feed rubber /2 Double feed prevention rubber /2 Paper feed rubber /3 Double feed prevention rubber /3 Paper feed rubber /BP Double feed prevention rubber /BP Paper feed roller /1 Paper feed roller /2 Paper feed roller /3 Paper feed roller (By-pass) Registration roller Separation claw solenoid Fixing upper lamp /1 Fixing upper lamp /2 Fixing lower lamp Fixing temperature sensor /3 Fixing temperature sensor /4 ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch Ball bearing /L (for lower roller) Heat insulating sleeve/L (for lower roller) Fixing drive gear Decurler roller Paper feed roller Feed roller Double feed prevention roller Paper feed clutch Pre-registration clutch Paper feed clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /1 Paper feed clutch /2 Pre-registration clutch /2 Paper feed clutch /3 Pre-registration clutch /3 Paper feed clutch /BP Transfer ground plate unit
SERVICE SCHEDULE Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Actual durable count 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 125,000 800,000 800,000 800,000 800,000 1,500,000 1,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 600,000 600,000 1,000,000
119 Main body paper feed 119 120 120 121 121 122 122 130 131 132 133 123 Registration 124 Transfer belt 125 Fixing 126 127 128 129 134 ADU 135 136 137 Fixing 138 139 140 Reverse/exit unit 141 C-208 142 143 144 145 Main body paper feed 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 2nd transfer
500,000 500,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000 1,000,000
4-17
IV SERVICE
100,000 500,000
SERVICE SCHEDULE
1.10 Important maintenance parts

The important parts specified by Minolta in order to maintain safety of the products are referred to as "important maintenance parts". The important maintenance parts for this machine are as described below: No. 1 2 Unit Fixing unit Fixing unit Parts name Thermostat /1 Thermostat /L Quantity 1 1
IV SERVICE
4-18
COPY MATERIAL
2. COPY MATERIAL
2.1 Product
A. Drum cartridge
2.2
Materials
A. Single unit supply Drum Toner black Toner yellow Toner magenta Toner cyan
B. Kit a Developer black set Developer black Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer yellow set
Developer yellow Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer magenta set
Developer magenta Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
Developer cyan set
Developer cyan Developer charging funnel/U Developer collection sheet (rubber band)
4-19
IV SERVICE
Developer charging funnel/U
COPY MATERIAL
2.3
PM parts kit
A. 100,000 copies/1 set (total) Name Toner collecting box assy Ozone filter /1 Dust proof filter /1 Dust proof filter /2 Belt cleaning blade Separation corona unit Fixing roller /U Fixing roller /L Decurler roller Charging wire assy Paper for fixing speed adjustment (16 sheets/A3) Dust bag (rubber band) Hand case for collection Cotton swab (x4) Hydro wipe (x10) Quantity North America 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 Europe 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1
B. 200,000 copies/1set (total) Name Transfer belt Quantity *All area 1 1 3 1 1 1 1 4 8
IV SERVICE
1st transfer roller /K 1st transfer roller /Y, /M, /C Toner collection sheet /1 2nd transfer roller /U 2nd transfer roller /L Fixing cleaning unit Changing grid plate Changing grid spring
4-20
SERVICE MATERIAL LIST
3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST

Material No. Name Shape Remark 25g Multemp grease FF-RM Solvest 240 25g Multemp FF-RM is recommended Plasguard No.2 4014-5007-01 Setting powder
4-21
IV SERVICE
CE TOOLS LIST
4. CE TOOLS LIST
Tool No. 4969-1885-01 Name Fixing thermostat positioning jig (for upper roller) 4969-1886-01 Fixing thermostat positioning jig (for lower roller) 4014-5005-01 Mirror positioning jig 2 4014-5006-01 Door switch jig 1 4969-1887-01 Color chart (metric) 1 4969-1888-01 Color chart (inch) 1 4024-2153-01 New Pyramid chart 1 4014-5010-01 Adjustment chart 1 1 1 Shape Quantity Remark
IV SERVICE
4014-5009-01
Stapler positioning jig 1
For adjusting FN-120/FN-9
4-22
JAM CODE LIST
V CODE LIST
1. JAM CODE LIST
ClassifiJam cation code ByJ10-01 pass feed J10-02 Causes During operation After the pickup solenoid /BP (SD5) is turned ON, by-pass feed feeder sensor (PS26) is not turned ON within the specified time. After no paper sensor /BP (PS47) is turned ON, tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is not turned ON within specified time. After the tray up drive motor /BP (M35) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor / BP (PS25) is not turned ON within specified time. By-pass feed conveyance sensor (PS26) was turned ON in the idling condition. Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Correction Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray once, decrease the stacked sheets and set again.
J10-03
When idling During operation When idling
J10-11
Remove the paper from the by-pass feed tray once and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out the paper feed tray /1 and remove jammed paper, if any.
Paper feed tray /1
J11-01
After the pick-up solenoid /1 (SD7) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) is not turned ON within the specified time.
If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
J11-11
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) was turned ON in the idling condition.
During operation
Paper feed tray /2
J12-01
After pick-up solenoid /2 (SD8) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) is not turned ON within specified time.
When idling
J12-11
5-1
V CODE LIST
Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
JAM CODE LIST Classification Paper feed tray /3 Jam code During operation J13-01 Causes After the pick-up solenoid /3 (SD9) is turned ON, pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) is not turned ON.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Correction Pull out the paper feed tray /3 and remove jammed paper, if any.
During operation When idling
J13-11
C-208
J14-01
After the paper feed solenoid (SD100) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within specified time.
Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any.
During operation When idling
J14-11
Feed sensor (PS106) was turned ON in the idling condition.
Paper feed
J17-01
After the loop roller motor (M31) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within specified time.
If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. Printer section stops immediately. If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-02
After the ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) is turned ON, registration sensor (PS22) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time. After the pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) is turned ON, vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) is not turned ON within specified time.
J17-03
Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out the paper feed tray /2 and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-04
V CODE LIST
5-2
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Paper feed Jam code During operation J17-05 Causes After the intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the pre-registration clutch /1 (MC7) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) is turned ON, intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within specified time. After the by-pass feed conveyance sensor (PS26) is turned ON, the intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the pre-registration clutch (MC102) is turned ON, paper feed sensor (PS107) is not turned ON within the specified time. When idling Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50) was turned ON in the idling condition. Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-06
J17-07
Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove paper from the by-pass feed tray and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the LCT top cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the vertical conveyance door and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
J17-08
J17-09
C-208
J17-10
Paper feed
J17-11
J17-12
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) was turned ON in the idling condition. Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) was turned ON in the idling condition. Registration sensor (OS22) was turned in the idling condition.
J17-13
J17-14 C-208 J17-15
5-3
V CODE LIST
Paper feed sensor (PS107) was turned ON in the idling condition.
Open the LCT front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
JAM CODE LIST Classification Others Jam code During operation J19-01 Causes Vertical conveyance door open jam. Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51) was turned OFF when copying / printing.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation If copy is progressing when jam arises, main body stops after completion of paper exit. In case of LCT paper feed, main body stops after completion of paper exit. In case of paper feed other than LCT, main body does not stop. Printer section stops immediately. Correction Close the vertical conveyance door.
Others C-208
J19-02
LCT top cover open jam or LCT front door open jam. Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) or front door open/ close sensor (PS115) was turned OFF when copying/printing.
Close the LCT top cover or LCT front door.
Paper exit
J31-02
After the registration roller motor (M30) is turned ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is not turned ON. After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is not turned ON within the specified time. In the reverse paper exit mode, after the reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS13) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in straight paper exit mode). After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in reverse paper exit mode). When the registration roller motor (M30) is ON, fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is ON. Paper exit sensor (PS13) is ON in the idling condition. Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) is turned ON in the idling condition. Reverse paper exit sensor (PS19) is ON in the idling condition. 5-4
J32-01
J32-02
J32-03
J32-04
J32-05
V CODE LIST
J32-07
J32-08
J32-12 J32-13
When idling
Paper exit
J32-11
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Others Jam code During operation J51-01 Causes Front door open jam. Front door open/ close sensor (PS18) was turned OFF while copying/printing. Paper feed section cover open jam. Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) was turned OFF when copying. Paper feed tray open jam. Tray open/ close sensor (PS308) was turned OFF when copying. Paper exit section cover open jam. Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) was turned OFF when copying. Registration sensor (PS301) is not turned OFF within specified time after paper feed is started. After reversal of paper feed motor (M301) is started, timing sensor (PS302) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the timing sensor (PS302) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. After the reverse/paper exit motor (M303) is turned ON, reverse sensor (PS305) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. In the one-sided original exit mode, paper exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the start of paper exit. In the double-sided original exit mode, original exit sensor (PS306) is not turned ON within the specified time after the reverse sensor (PS305) is turned ON. Resulting operation Printer section stops immediately. RADF stops immediately. If there is paper in or after transfer process, main body stops after paper exit.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Close the front door.
AFR-20
J61-01
Close the paper feed section cover. Close the paper feed tray. Close the paper exit section cover. Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance section, if any.
J61-02
J61-03
J62-01
J62-02
J62-03
J62-04
J62-05
J62-06
Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance section, if any.
5-5
V CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification AFR-20 Jam code During operation J62-07 Causes After the paper exit sensor (PS306) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation RADF stops immediately. If there is paper in or after transfer process, main body stops after paper exit. Correction Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove jammed paper in the main body conveyance section, if any. Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the paper feed section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Open the paper exit section cover and remove jammed paper, if any. Printer section stops immediately. Close the FNS front door. Close the TU front door. Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J65-02
When idling During operation
J65-01
Registration sensor (PS301) is ON in the idling condition.
Reverse sensor (PS305) is ON in the idling condition.
J65-03
Timing sensor (PS302) is ON in the idling condition.
J65-04
Paper exit sensor (PS306) is ON in the idling condition.
Others FN-120 FN-9 Others TMG-3 FN-120 FN-9
J71-01
FNS front door open jam. FNS interlock switch (MS701) was turned OFF when copying/printing.
J71-02
J72-16
TU front door open jam. Front door MS2 (MS2) was turned OFF when copying/printing. After the paper exit sensor (PS13) is FNS/main body turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is stop immedinot turned ON within the specified time. ately. After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling).
J72-17
V CODE LIST
J72-18
5-6
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification FN-120 FN-9 Jam code During operation J72-19 Causes After the stacker inlet motor (M713) is turned ON, stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is not turned ON within the specified time. After paper exit operation is started, main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is not turned ON within the specified time (when stapling). After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode). After the FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is turned ON, sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is not turned ON within the specified time within the specified time (in the sub-tray paper exit mode). After the sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the large-size staple mode). After completion of stapling, folding passage sensor (PS726) is not turned ON. After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. After the stacker inlet sensor (PW705) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the non-staple mode). After the main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time (in the small-size staple mode). Resulting operation FNS/main body stop immediately.
JAM CODE LIST Correction Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-20
J72-21
J72-22
J72-23
J72-24
J72-25
J72-26
J72-28
J72-29
J72-30
5-7
V CODE LIST
JAM CODE LIST Classification TMG-3 Jam code During operation J72-32 Causes After the folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the inlet sensor (PS101) is turned ON, inlet sensor (PS101) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, paper exit sensor (PS108) is not turned OFF within the specified time. After the conveyance clutch /L (MC202) is turned ON, PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is not turned ON within specified time. After the punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the folding passage sensor (PS726) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. After the conveyance clutch /U (MC201) is turned ON, PI passage sensor (PS201) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the PI passage sensor (PS201) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the PI passage sensor /L (PS206) is turned ON, FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the stapler motor /F (M714) and clincher motor /F (M715) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) and clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) are not turned ON within specified time. After the stapler motor /R (M709) and clincher motor /R (M710) are turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) and clincher HP sensor (PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation TU/FNS/main body stop immediately. Correction Remove jammed paper in TU/FNS/main body, if any.
J72-33
J72-34
Cover Inserter D PK-5
J72-35
FNS/main body stop immediately.
Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
J72-43
FN-120 FN-9 Cover Inserter D
J72-48
J72-49
J72-50
J72-51
FN-120 FN-9
J72-81
V CODE LIST
J72-82
5-8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification FN-120 FN-9 Jam code During operation J72-83 Causes Resulting operation
JAM CODE LIST Correction Remove jammed paper in the FNS/main body, if any.
After the stapler motor /F, /R (M714), FNS/main body M709), and clincher motor /F, /R (M715, stop immediM710) are turned ON, stapler HP senately. sor /F, /R (PS731, PS730) and clincher HP sensor /F, /R (PS733, PS732) are not turned ON within the specified time. After operation stop signal is transmitted from the main body to FNS, FNS does not stop within the specified time.
J72-90
J73-02
J73-05 J73-07
When idling
J73-01
Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) is ON in the idling condition. Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) is ON in the idling condition. FNS inlet sensor (PS704) is ON in the idling condition. Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) is ON in the idling condition. Stacker no-paper sensor (PS720) is ON in the idling condition. Folding passage sensor (PS726) is ON in the idling condition. Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) is ON in the idling condition. Inlet sensor (PS101) is ON in the idling condition. Conveyance sensor (PS102) is ON in the idling condition. Paper exit sensor (PS108) is ON in the idling condition. PI passage sensor (PS206) is ON in the idling condition.
Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Remove jammed paper in the sub-tray, if any. Open the FNS front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
J73-08 J73-09 J73-10 TMG-3 J73-11 J73-12 J73-13 Cover Inserter D J73-14
Open the TU front door and remove jammed paper, if any.
Remove paper from the cover sheet feeder /L and remove jammed paper, if any. Remove paper in the cover sheet feeder /U once and remove jammed paper, if any. Pull out ADU and remove jammed paper, if any.
J73-17
When idling During operation
ADU
J92-01
After the reverse paper exit sensor Printer section (PS19) is turned ON, ADU reverse sen- stops immedisor (PS21) is not turned ON within the ately. specified time.
ADU
J92-11
ADU reverse sensor (PS21) is ON in the idling condition.
5-9
V CODE LIST
PI passage sensor /U (PS201) is ON in the idling condition.
JAM CODE LIST Classification Jam code During operation J93-01 Causes After reversal of ADU reverse motor (M32) is turned ON, ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is not turned ON within the specified time.
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation Printer section stops immediately. Correction
When idling
J93-11
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is ON in the idling condition.
During operation
J94-02
After the ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) is turned ON, ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is not turned ON within the specified time.
Printer section stops immediately.
V CODE LIST
When idling
J94-11
ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) is ON in the idling condition.
5-10
ERROR CODE LIST
2. ERROR CODE LIST

Note: In the F code area of warning codes, "Contact the Service Section" is indicated and in the E code area, "Turn ON the power switch again" is indicated. On the actual LCD screen, all the indications are SC codes. Classification Abnormality code F10-10 Causes Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts
Communication abnormality Paper feed motor abnormality LT paper feed motor abnormality Paper feed tray abnormality
F13-01
Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and LT drive board (LTDB) M41 abnormality detection signal was continuoudly detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M41) was ON. M101 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time when the paper feed motor (M101) was ON. After the tray up/down motor /l (M40) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) is not turned ON. After the tray up/down motor /2 (M39) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38) is not turned ON. After the tray up/down motor /3 (M38) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) is not turned ON. After the tray up/down motor / BP (M35) is turned ON, the tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) is not turned ON within the specified time. When the up/down motor (M100) was ON, M100 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Main body
Printer control board (PRCB) LT drive board (LTDB)
Printer control board (PRCB) Paper feed motor (M41)
C-208
F13-02
LT drive motor (LTDB) Paper feed motor (M101)
Main body
F18-01
Printer control board (PRCB) Tray up/down motor /1 (M40) Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray upper limit motor /2 (M39) Tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS38) Printer control board (PRCB) Tray upper limit motor /3 (M38) Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42) Conveyance drive board (CVDB) Tray up/down motor /BP (M35) Tray upper limit sensor /BP (PS25) Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. LT drive board (LTDB) UP/DOWN motor (M100)
F18-02
F18-03
F18-04
LT up/ down motor abnormality
C-208
F18-50
5-11
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code F18-51 Causes
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts
LT up/ down motor abnormality
When the upper limit sensor (PS109) or lower limit sensor (PS101) is OFF, PS101 or PS109 is not turned ON within the specified time after the up/ down motor (M100) is turned ON. When the paper feed assist fan /R (M137) was ON, M137 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the paper feed assist fan /F (M136) was ON, M136 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. 24VDC is not supplied to LCT. 12VDC is not supplied to LCT. Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board / Y (DRDB /Y) or drum drive board /M (DRDB /M). Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and drum drive board / C (DRDB /C) or drum drive board /K (DRDB /K). Communication abnormality between printer control board (PRCB) and transfer belt motor (M18)
LT drive board (LTDB) UP/DOWN motor (M100) Upper limit sensor (PS109) Lower limit sensor (PS101)
C-208
LT paper feed assist fan abnormality
F18-60
LT drive board (LTDB) Paper feed assist fan /R (M137)
F18-61
LT drive board (LTDB) Paper feed assist fan /F (M136)
LT power abnormality Main body Communication abnormality
F18-70 F18-71 F20-10
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2) LT drive board (LTDB) DC power unit /1 (DCPS1) LT drive board (LTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) Drum drive board /M (DRDB / M) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K)
F20-11
F20-12
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt motor (M18)
V CODE LIST
5-12
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Abnormality code F21-01 Causes Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
ERROR CODE LIST Estimated abnormal parts
Precharging exposure lamp abnormality
Main body
Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y) set cannot be detected.
Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /Y (PCL Y)
F21-02
Pre-charging exposure lamp / M (PCL M) set cannot be detected. Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) set cannot be detected. Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) set cannot be detected. When the developing motor /Y (M20) was ON, M20 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the developing motor /M (M21) was ON, M21 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When developing motor /C (M22) was ON, M22 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the developing motor /K (M23) was ON, M23 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the drum motor /Y (M14) was ON, M14 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the drum motor /M (M15) was ON, M15 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /M (PCL M) Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /C (PCL C) Printer control board (PRCB) Pre-charging exposure lamp /K (PCL K) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /Y (M20)
F21-03
F21-04
Developing motor abnormality
F23-01
F23-02
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /M (M21)
F23-03
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /C (M22)
F23-04
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing motor /K (M23)
F23-06
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /M (DRDB / M) Drum motor /M (M15)
5-13
V CODE LIST
Drum motor abnormality
F23-05
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB /Y) Drum motor /Y (M14)
Main body
Drum motor abnormality
When the drum motor /C (M16) was ON, M16 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When drum motor /K (M17) was ON, M17 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the transfer belt motor (M18) was ON, M18 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15) is ON, PS15 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) is turned ON. When PS15 is OFF, PS15 is not turned ON within the specified time after M19 is turned ON. When either of the toner supply motor /Y, /M, /C, /K (M49, M50, M51, or M52), toner bottle motor (M53), or toner bottle clutch /Y, /M, /C, /K (MC14, MC15, MC16, or MC17) was ON, either abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /C (DRDB /C) Drum motor /C (M16)
F23-08
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum drive board /K (DRDB /K) Drum motor /K (M17)
Transfer belt unit abnormality
F23-09
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt motor (M18)
F23-10
Printer control board (PRCB) 1st transfer pressing/releasing motor (M19) 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
Toner supply abnormality
F23-11
V CODE LIST
Printer control board (PRCB) Toner supply drive board (TSDB) Toner supply motor /Y (M49) Toner supply motor /M (M50) Toner supply motor /C (M51) Toner supply motor /K (M52) Toner bottle motor (M53) Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14) Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
L detection abnormality
F27-01
Output of toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) cannot be controlled. Output of toner density sensor /M (TDS M) cannot be controlled. Output of toner density sensor /C (TDS C) cannot be controlled.
F27-02
F27-03
5-14
Main body
L detection abnormality High pressure unit abnormality
Output of toner density sensor /K (TDS K) cannot be controlled. When the charging /Y was ON, charging /Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When charging /M was ON, charging /M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When charging /C is ON, charging /C abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When charging /K was ON, charging /K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the primary transfer Y was ON, primary transfer Y abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the primary transfer M was ON, primary transfer M abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the primary transfer C was ON, primary transfer C abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) High pressure unit /1 (HV1)
F28-01
F28-02
F28-03
F28-04
F29-01
High pressure unit /2 (HV2) 1st transfer roller
F29-02
F29-03
5-15
V CODE LIST
F29-04
When the primary transfer K was ON, primary transfer K abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Main body
Process abnormality
Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the Dmax control. Dmax control /Y resulted in an abnormality. Dmax control /M resulted in an abnormality. Dmax control /C resulted in an abnormality. Dmax control /K resulted in an abnormality. In charging potential control, drum surface potential /Y was out of specification.
Printer control board (PRCB) Gamma sensor (PS11)
F29-07
F29-08
Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /Y Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /M Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /C Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Developing unit /K Gamma sensor (PS11) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M)
F29-09
F29-10
F29-11
F29-12
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /M was out of specification.
F29-13
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /C was out of specification.
F29-14
In charging potential control, drum surface potential /K was out of specification.
V CODE LIST
F29-15
Charging potential control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
F29-16
Charging potential control /M resulted in an abnormality.
5-16
Main body
Process abnormality
Charging potential control /C resulted in an abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRPSB Y) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /M (DRPSB M) Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRPSB C) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) Printer control board (PRCB) Drum potential sensor board /K (DRPSB K) Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Gamma sensor (PS11) High voltage unit /2 (HU2) High voltage unit /2 (HU2) Conveyance drive board (CVDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Printer control board (PRCB) Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
F29-18
Charging potential control /K resulted in an abnormality.
F29-19
Dot diameter adjustment control /Y resulted in an abnormality.
F29-20
Dot diameter adjustment control /M resulted in an abnormality.
F29-21
Dot diameter adjustment control /C resulted in an abnormality.
F29-22
Dot diameter adjustment control /K resulted in an abnormality.
F29-23
Gamma sensor (PS11) improperly adjusted while in the gamma correction control 2nd transfer abnormality Separation abnormality ADU conveyance drive board communication abnormality When the fixing cooling fan /1 and /2 (M10, M36, M37) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. When the drum unit fan /3 (M47) was ON, M36 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
F30-01 Motor abnormality Fan abnormality F30-02 F30-10
F32-01
F32-02
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum unit fan /3 (M47) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36)
5-17
V CODE LIST
Main body
Fan abnormality
When the paper exit fan /F, /M, and /R (M28, M27, and M26) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. When charging air intake fan (M48) was ON, M48 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the drum cooling fan /1 and /2 (M12, M13) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. When the transfer belt cooling fan (M11) was ON, M11 abnormality detection signal was continuoudly detected for the specified time. When the fixing motor (M29) was ON, M29 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the pressure release sensor (PS16) is ON, PS16 is not turned OFF within the specified time after the fixing motor (M29) is turned ON. When PS16 is OFF, PS16 is not turned ON within the specified time after M29 is turned ON. After the 2nd transfer pressing/ releasing motor (M34) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. Abnormality of Web motor (M54) or circuit was detected.
Printer control board (PRCB) Paper exit fan /F (M28) Paper exit fan /M (M27) Paper exit fan /R (M26)
F32-04
Toner supply drive board (TSDB) Charging air suction fan (M48)
F32-05
Printer control board (PRCB) Drum cooling fan /1 (M12) Drum cooling fan /2 (M13)
F32-06
Printer control board (PRCB) Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
Motor abnormality
F33-01
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Fixing motor (M29)
F33-02
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Fixing motor (M29) Fixing pressure release sensor (PS16)
V CODE LIST
F33-03
Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) 2nd transfer pressing/releasing motor (M34) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Web motor (M54)
F33-04
5-18
Fixing high temperature abnormality
Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing high temperature abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detection temperature over 250C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature over 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing compensation high temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature over 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing roller paper seizure abnormality J31-02 occurred 4 continuous times.
F34-02
F34-03
Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
Main body
F34-04
F34-05
WARNING When F34-**, F35-** or F36-** (fixing temperature related abnormality) occurs, be sure to repair a defective part before setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set to 0 without repairing a defective part, this may cause a fire.
F34-06
5-19
V CODE LIST
F34-08
Fixing low temperature abnormality
Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected. Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing low temperature abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detection temperature under 150C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature under 20C was continuously detected for the specified time. Fixing compensation low temperature abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature under 20C was continuously detected for the specified time.
F35-02
F35-03
Main body
F35-04
F35-05
F35-06
V CODE LIST
5-20
Main body
Fixing sensor abnormality
Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing low temperature hardware abnormality (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH4) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time.
F36-04
Printer control board (PRCB) AC drive board (ACDB) Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Fixing lower lamp (L4) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4) WARNING When F34-**, F35-** or F36-** (fixing temperature related abnormality) occurs, be sure to repair a defective part before setting the 25 DIPSW 3-1 to 0. If the 25 DIPSW 3-1 is set to 0 without repairing a defective part, this may cause a fire.
F36-05
F36-06
F36-07
F36-08
F36-09
5-21
V CODE LIST
Main body
Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH1) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing compensation high temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. Fixing compensation low temperature hardware detection abnormality (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detected abnormality signal continuously for the specified time. After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) detection temperature does not reach 150C within the specified time. After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) detection temperature does not reach 150C within the specified time. Fixing section has not been set. At the home position search, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned on within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON. When the polygon motor /Y (M3) is started or when the speed is switched, M3 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. When the polygon motor (M4) is started or the speed is switched, M4 lock signal is not detected within the specified time.
F36-11
F36-12
F38-02
F38-03
F39-01 Scanner abnormality F41-01
Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner motor (M1) Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
V CODE LIST
Motor abnormality
F41-02
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /Y (M3)
F41-03
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /M (M4)
5-22
Main body
Motor abnormality
When the polygon motor /C (M5) is started or the speed is switched, M5 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. When the polygon motor /K (M6) is started or the speed is switched, M6 lock signal is not detected within the specified time. When the optical scanning returns, scanner HP sensor (PS1) is not turned ON within the specified time after the scanner motor (M1) is turned ON. Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /Y (M3) was detected. Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /M (M4) was detected. Abnormal polygon motor /C (M5) was detected. Abnormal temperature of polygon motor /K (M6) was detected. Temperature detection board (TDB) detected temperature abnormality in writing unit /K. When the write intake fan /1, /2 (M43, M44), and write exhaust fan /1, /2 (M45, M46) were ON, abnormality detection signal of either of them was continuously detected for the specified time. When scanner cooling fan (M2) was ON, M2 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /C (M5)
F41-05
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /K (M6)
Scanner abnormality
F41-06
Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner motor (M1) Scanner HP sensor (PS1)
Motor abnormality
F41-07
Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /Y (M3) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /M (M4) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /C (M5) Printer control board (PRCB) Polygon motor /K (M6) Printer control board (PRCB) Temperature detection board (TDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Writing suction fan /1 (M43) Writing suction fan /2 (M44) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46)
F41-08
F41-09 F41-10
F41-11
Fan abnormality
F42-01
F42-02
Scanner drive board (SCDB) Scanner cooling fan (M2)
5-23
V CODE LIST
Main body
Color registration abnormality
Color registration base line correction /F resulted in abnormality. Color registration base line correction /R results in abnormality. When laser correction motor /Y (M7) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) was turned OFF. When the laser correction motor /M (M8) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) was turned OFF, When the laser correction motor /C (M9) was ON, laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) was turned OFF. After the laser correction motor /Y (M7) is turned ON, it is not turned OFF within the specified time. Or, laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) installing position is abnormal. Laser correction motor /M (MB) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) installing position is abnormal. Laser correction motor /C (M9) is not turned OFF within the specified time after it is turned ON. Or, the laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) installing position is abnormal. Color registration correction results in abnormality.
Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /R (PS9) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /Y (M7) Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /M (M8) Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /C (M9) Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7) Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /Y (M7) Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)
F45-03
F45-07
F45-08
F45-09
F45-10
F45-11
Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /M (M8) Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)
F45-12
Printer control board (PRCB) Laser correction motor /C (M9) Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)
V CODE LIST
F45-20
Printer control board (PRCB) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
5-24
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Abnormality code E46-01 Causes Resulting operation Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
When scanning the image, sub-scan beam correction APC cannot be applied. Laser does not light up because 12VDC power to drive the beam is not supplied, MPC is not correct, or because of fault laser. Address abnormality of FIFO for scanner. When scanning the image, compression of scanned image data is not normally completed. Address abnormality of FIFO for printer. Expansion of scanned image data is not normally completed. FIFO interrupt error of compression/expansion chip occurred. Image data expansion abnormality Connection abnormality between A/D conversion board (ADB) and image processing board (IPB) Index sensor output does not change by the execution of APC. Index sensor cannot decect the laser because the polygon mirror does not rotate, or because of the index sensor out of position or defective index sensor Connection abnormality between index sensor /Y, /M, / C, /K (INDX SB Y, M, C, K) or laser drive board (LDB Y, M, C, K) and image processing board (IPB)
Main body
Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB)
E46-02
Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB)
E46-03
E46-05
Image processing board (IPB)
E46-06 E46-07
Image processing board (IPB) Expansion memory Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) A/D conversion board (ADB) CCD wiring harness Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB)
E46-08
E46-09
Writing unit /Y /M /C /K Image processing board (IPB)
5-25
V CODE LIST
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code E46-12 Causes
Main body
After negation of SVV, compression of scanned image and evolution to page memory are not completed. When scanning the image, compression process from scanner to memory is not completed within the specified time. Evolution from scanner to page memory is not completed within the specified time. SVV is not detected within the specified time. When scanning the image, expansion process from memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. Output from page memory to printer is not completed within the specified time. PVV is not detected within the specified time. When scanning the image, access to expansion device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource. When scanning the image, access to compression device or some other improper process took place even though there was no resource. When processing the image, filter coefficient cannot be properly prepared. When accessing the memory device, software fault was detected.
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB)
E46-13
E46-14
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Writing unit /Y /M /C /K
E46-15
Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-16
E46-17
E46-19
V CODE LIST
5-26
E46-23
Expansion process from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time. Compression process from page memory to memory is not completed within the specified time. Evolution from memory to page memory is not completed within the specified time. Compressed data transfer from memory to memory is not completed within the specified time. When scanning the image, SVV is not turned OFF within the specified time and therefore scanning of next page cannot be started. Shading correction abnormality (GA abnormality) AOC/AGC adjustment abnormality Blocking cover and lens cover of scanner section are out of place. A/D conversion board (ADB) connector is disconnected. ADB power cable is disconnected. ADB IC protector is broken. Quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) is excess. L1 does not light up.
Main body
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB)
E46-24
E46-25
Image processing board (IPB) Program of image processing board (IPB) A/D conversion board (ADB) Exposure lamp (L1) Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Scanner drive board (SCDB) L1 inverter board (L1INVB)
5-27
V CODE LIST
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation Abnormality detection process is performed but no abnormality code is indicated on the operation board and main body continues operation. Abnormality code is indicated only for data collection, list output and KRDS. Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts
Main body
There is no correction data which has been reserved by resolution.
Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-31
E46-32
Before completion of MPC, APC initial sampling was attempted. Execution of MPC was attempted during execution of APC. Continuous page imaging range abnormality. Image cannot be evolved on memory due to abnormal image range on memory. When starting APC, PVV was ON (APC was executed during print) Hard disk initialization abnormality. Hard disk failure or improper connector connection. JOB information could not be stored in the hard disk. At the time of automatic hard disk job deletion, route could not be opened. Hard disk access error. Hard disk failure or improper connector connection.
Image processing board (IPB) ICP program
E46-35
E46-36
E46-40
V CODE LIST
Image processing board (IPB) Hard disk (HDD-7) HDD I/F board (HDD IFB)
E46-41 E46-42
E46-43
5-28
Main body
Software failure. CCD board was replaced but I1ROM version is not compliant. A/D conversion board (ADB) bunch or connector is damaged. Before completion of paper mis-centering correction, scanning was started (mis-centering correction cannot be completed). Since the quantity of light of exposure lamp (L1) decreased, AGC was retried, though no error occurred. PWM gammer curve was not properly prepared.
Image processing board (IPB) ICP program CCP wiring harness of A/D conversion board (ADB)
E46-59
F46-62
F46-63
F46-64
Abnormality detection process is conducted but no code is indicated on the operation board and main body continues operation. Abnormality code is indicated only for data collection, list output and KRDS.
Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) LCT drive board (LTDB)
Exposure lamp (L1) Overall control board (OACB) CCD board (CCDB) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y) Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C) Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) Printer control board (PRCB) Image processing board (IPB) Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Program of overall control board (OACB)
E46-66 E46-80 E46-81 E46-82 E46-83 E46-90 E46-91 E46-98 E46-99
Shift failure at repeat. Message cue was not enough or destructed. Parameter value exceeds allowable range. Message cue sender task has an undefined ID. Message receiving event is undefined. Abnormal access to memory Header address scanning abnormality Page memory cannot be secured for printing. Memory initialization abnormality. Memory may not be correctly connected. Main body stops immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Image processing board (IPB) Overall control board (OACB) Expansion memory
5-29
V CODE LIST
Main body
Communication abnormality
12VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time. 24VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal was continuously detected for the specified time after the specified time from REN /2 ON. Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 24VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal of 24VDC for CVDB was detected after specified time from REN /2 ON. Laser correction motor 5VDC abnormality. Abnormal 5VDC for laser correction motor /Y, /M, and /C (M7, M8, and M9) was detected. Conveyance drive board (CVDB) 12VDC abnormality. Abnormality signal of 12VDC for CVDB was detected. Line status error and check sum error was detected between the overall control board (OACB) and image processing board (IPB) and demand for re-transmission was sent but recovery could not be attained. Re-transmission was demanded and answered but recovery could not be attained. Space is not obtained in the transmission ring buffer within the specified time. Communication with the coin vendor cannot be performed.
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1)
E50-02
E50-03
DC power unit /2 (DCPS2) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB)
E50-04
E50-05
DC power unit /1 (DCPS1) Conveyance drive motor (CVDB) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB)
E50-10
V CODE LIST
E50-11
Printer control board (PRCB) Coin vendor
5-30
Main body
Fan abnormality
When the DCPS cooling fan (M42) was ON, M42 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the IP cooling fan (M24) was ON, M24 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. When the IPB cooling fan (M25) was ON, M25 abnormality detection signal was continuously detected for the specified time. After the main switch (SW2) is turned ON, communication between the printer control board (PRCB), overall control board (OACB), and operation board /1 (OB1) is not started. When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 01 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 02 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program 03 of operation board /1 (OB1) was detected. Communication error. Registration sensor (PS301) error. Timing sensor (PS302) error. Reverse sensor (PS305) error. Paper exit sensor (PS306) error.
Printer control board (PRCB) DCPS cooling fan (M42)
F52-02
Printer control board (PRCB) IP cooling fan (M24)
F52-03
Printer control board (PRCB) IPB cooling fan (M25)
Operation board abnormality
E56-02
Printer control board (PRCB) Overall control board (OACB) Operation board /1 (OB1)
E56-11
Operation board /1 (OB1)
E56-12
E56-13
AFR-20
F61-01 F61-02 F61-03 F61-04
RADF control board (DFCB) Timing sensor (PS302) RADF control board (DFCB) Reverse sensor (PS305) RADF control board (DFCB) Paper exit sensor (PS306)
5-31
V CODE LIST
AFR-20 abnormality
E60-01
RADF control board (DFCB) Printer control board (PRCB) RADF control board (DFCB) Registration sensor (PS301)
ERROR CODE LIST Classification Abnormality code F61-05 F61-06 F61-07 Causes
AFR-20
AFR-20 abnormality
Size VR (VR301) error. Non-volatile memory error. When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten control program of RADF control board (DFCB) was detected. Paper feed motor (M301) error. Conveyance motor (M302) error. Reverse paper exit motor (M303) error. Communication error. Shift unit does not reach the shifting position or home position within the specified time. After the tray up/down motor (M703) was turned ON, tray upper limit sensor (PS702) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the alignment motor /U (M705) was turned ON, the alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. After the paper exit roller motor (M707) was turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. After the paper exit motor (M708) is turned ON, paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. After the stapler moving motor (M711) is turned ON, stapler moving HP sensor (PS711) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time.
RADF control board (DFCB) Size VR (VR301) RADF control board (DFCB)
F61-08 F61-09 F61-10
RADF control board (DFCB) Paper feed motor (M301) RADF control board (DFCB) Conveyance motor (M302) RADF control board (DFCB) Reverse paper exit motor (M303) Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. FNS control board (FNSCB) Printer control board (PRCB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Shift motor (M702) Shift HP sensor (PS718) FNS control board (FNSCB) Tray up/down motor (M703) Tray upper limit sensor (PS702)
FN-120, FN-9
FN-120 and FN-9 abnormality
E70-01 F77-01
F77-02
F77-03
FNS control board (FNSCB) Alignment motor /U (M705) Alignment HP sensor /U (PS708) FNS control board (FNSCB) Paper exit roller motor (M707)
F77-04
F77-05
V CODE LIST
FNS control board (FNSCB) Paper exit opening motor (M708) Paper exit opening sensor (PS712) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler movement motor (M711) Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711)
F77-06
5-32
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Abnormality code F77-07 Causes Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
FN-120, FN-9
FN-120 and FN-9 abnormality
After the clincher rotating motor (M704) is turned ON, clincher rotating HP sensor (PS714) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. After the stapler rotating motor (M706) is turned ON, stapler rotating HP sensor (PS713) is not turned ON or OFF within the specified time. After the stapler motor /F (M714) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /F (PS731) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the stapler motor /R (M709) is turned ON, stapler HP sensor /R (PS730) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the clincher motor /F (M715) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /F (PS733) is not turned ON within the specified time. After clincher motor /R (M710) is turned ON, clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the stopper motor (M718) is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS723) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the alignment motor /L (M716) is turned ON, alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the folding knife motor (M719) is turned ON, folding knife HP sensor (PS722) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher rotation motor (M704) Clincher rotation HP sensor (PS714) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler rotation motor (M706) Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler motor /F (M714) Stapler HP sensor /F (PS731)
F77-08
F77-11
F77-12
FNS control board (FNSCB) Stapler motor /R (M709) Stapler HP sensor /R (PS730)
F77-13
FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher motor /F (M715) Clincher HP sensor /F (PS733)
F77-14
FNS control board (FNSCB) Clincher motor /R (M710 Clincher HP sensor /R (PS732) FNS control board (FNSCB) Stopper motor (M718) Stopper HP sensor (PS723) FNS control board (FNSCB) Alignment motor /L (M716) Alignment HP sensor /L (PS724) FNS control board (FNSCB) Folding knife motor (M719) Folding knife HP sensor (PS722)
F77-21
F77-22
F77-25
5-33
V CODE LIST
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF. Estimated abnormal parts
FN-120, FN-9
abnormality
After the folding conveyance motor (M720) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. After the conveyance motor (M101) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. After the cutter motor (M102) is turned ON, cutter HP sensor (PS106) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the stopper motor (M103) is turned ON, stopper HP sensor (PS103) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the stopper release motor (M104) is turned ON, stopper release HP sensor (PS104) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the press motor (M105) is turned ON, press HP sensor (PS105) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the pressure motor (M107) is turned ON, pressure HP sensor (PS112) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the holder motor (M106) is turned ON, upper limit PS sensor (PS110) is not turned ON. After the tray up/down motor /L (M202) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) or tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) Folding conveyance motor (M720)
TMG-3
abnormality
F77-31
FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Conveyance motor (M101) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Cutter motor (M102) Cutter HP sensor (PS106) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Stopper motor (M103) Stopper HP sensor (PS103) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Stopper release motor (M104) Stopper release HP sensor (PS104) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Press motor (M105) Press HP sensor (PS105) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Pusher motor (M107) Pusher HP sensor (PS112) FNS control board (FNSCB) TU drive board (TUDB) Holder motor (M106) Upper limit PS sensor (PS110) FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) Tray up/down motor /L (M202) Tray upper limit sensor /L (PS209) Tray lower limit sensor /L (PS210)
F77-32
F77-33
F77-34
F77-35
F77-36
F77-37
Cover Inserter D
V CODE LIST
abnormality
F77-41
5-34
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 Classification Abnormality code F77-42 Causes Resulting operation Main body and FNS stop operation immediately and main relay (RL1) is turned OFF.
Cover Inserter D
abnormality
After the tray up/down motor /U (M201) is turned ON, tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) or tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205) is not turned ON within the specified time.
FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) Tray up/down motor /U (M201) Tray upper limit sensor /U (PS204) Tray lower limit sensor /U (PS205) FNS control board (FNSCB) PI drive board (PIDB) PI Conveyance motor (M203) FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB) Punch shift motor (M802) Punch shift HP sensor (PS803) FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB)
F77-43
PK-5 abnormality
PK-5
F77-44
After the PI conveyance motor (M203) is turned ON, speed does not reach the specified level within the specified time. After the punch shift motor (M802) is turned ON, punch shift HP sensor (PS803) is not turned ON within the specified time. Communication abnormality between FNS control board (FNSCB) and punch drive board (PKDB) After punch motor (M801) is turned ON, punch HP sensor (PS801) is not turned ON within the specified time. After the gate drive motor (M712) is turned ON, gate HP sensor (PS716) is not turned ON within the specified time. Communication abnormality when sub-CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data Communication abnormality when the main CPU in FNS control board (FNSCB) receives data. When the main switch (SW2) was turned ON, unwritten control program of FNS control Board (FNSCB) was detected. Abnormality other than those known to control program of FNS control board (FNSCB) was detected.
F77-47
F77-54
FNS control board (FNSCB) Punch drive board (PKDB) Punch motor (M801) Punch HP sensor (PS801) FNS control board (FNSCB) Gate drive motor (M712) Gate HP sensor (PS716) FNS control board (FNSCB) Printer control board (PRCB)
FN-120, FN-9
FN-120, FN-9 abnormality
F77-81
F77-91
F77-92
F77-98
F77-99
5-35
V CODE LIST
Main body
Communication abnormality
When the main switch (SW2) is ON, no response is received from the printer control board (PRCB) within the specified time. Printer control board (PRCB) communication abnormality Operation board communication abnormality When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the printer control program. When the main switch (SW2) was ON, unwritten range of ISW was detected in the GIF control program. In the data transfer by ISW, regular header information cannot be received within the specified time. In the data transfer by ISW, check sum error or header error was detected in the downloaded data. When transferring data by ISW, data cannot be correctly written to flash ROM. Engine continued operation without preparing image or process patch for the specified time.
Printer control board (PRCB)
E80-02 E80-03 ISW abnormality E80-11
Operation board /1 (OB1) Printer control program
E80-21
VIF control program
E80-30
Printer cable USB cable PC parallel port PC USB port Printer cable USB cable Program file abnormality Printer cable USB cable Program transferred board Printer control program
E80-31
E80-32
E80-40
V CODE LIST
5-36
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
3. ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION

In the event of following abnormalities, the failed unit can be isolated so that other functions may be temporarily operated. If any abnormality code is issued, press the Auto Reset key and turn OFF and ON the SW2 (auxiliary power switch). The unit subjected to abnormality is isolated in the software system and other functions can be operated. If SW2 is turned OFF or ON without correcting the faulty unit, the abnormality is detected and the abnormality code is indicated again (a function effective only one time).
Error code 18-01 18-02 18-03 18-05 13-02 46-40 to 43 77-22, 25, 26 77-31, 37 77-41, 42, 43 77-44, 47, 55
Error Error in paper feed tray /1 up Error in paper feed tray /2 up Error in paper feed tray /3 up Error in LT tray up LT paper feed motor abnormality HDD abnormality Folding drive abnormality Cutting drive abnormality CF tray drive abnormality Punch rocking motor abnormality
Unit to be cut off Paper feed tray /1 Paper feed tray /2 Paper feed tray /3 LT tray HDD Folding machine TMG-3 Cover Inserter D PK-5
Remarks Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. Tray can not be selected. HDD can not be used. Folding mode, stitch-andfold mode, and cutting mode can not be selected. Cover sheet mode can not be selected. Punch mode can not be selected.
5-37
V CODE LIST
ABOUT ABNORMAL UNIT ISOLATION
Blank page
V CODE LIST
5-38
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
VI DIAGRAMS
1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1 CF5001 parts layout drawing
A. Switches and sensors (1) Rear of the main body
[11]
[12]
[10]
[9]
[8] [7] [6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6600
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Encoder sensor /Y1 (PS60) Encoder sensor /M1 (PS62) Encoder sensor /C1 (PS64) Encoder sensor /K1 (PS66) Encoder sensor /Y2 (PS61) Encoder sensor /M2 (PS63)
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
Encoder sensor /C2 (PS65) Encoder sensor /K2 (PS67) Waste toner full sensor (PS52) Waste toner door sensor (PS53) Encoder sensor/belt 2 (PS68) Encoder sensor/belt 1 (PS69)
6-1
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (2) Top of the main body
[5]
[6]
[1]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] DF reset switch (RS1)
[3]
[4] [5] [6]
[2]
APS sensor /S (PS3) Scanner HP sensor (PS1) AAPS timing sensor (PS2)
8050fs6601
Toner supply unit open/close sensor (PS14) APS sensor /L (PS4)
(3) Front of the main body
[3]
[4]
[2] VI DIAGRAMS
[1] [2] Front door open/close sensor (PS18) Front door interlock switch (MS1) [3] [4]
[1]
8050fs6602
Main switch (SW2) Reset switch (SW1)
6-2
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (4) Right side of the main body
[1]
[1] Temp/humidity sensor (TEMP/HUM)
8050fs6603
(5) Front side of the main body
[1]
[1] 1st transfer HP sensor (PS15)
8050fs6604
6-3
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (6) Write unit
[5] [6] [7]
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Index sensor board /Y (INDX SB Y) Index sensor board /M (INDX SB M) Index sensor board /C (INDX SB C) Index sensor board /K (INDX SB K) [5] [6] [7]
8050fs6605
Laser correction HP sensor /Y (PS5)* Laser correction HP sensor /M (PS6)* Laser correction HP sensor /C (PS7)*
* Laser correction HP sensor does not attached to write unit /K. (7) Process unit
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[1] [2] Drum potential sensor /K (DRPS K) Drum potential sensor /C (DRPS C) [3] [4]
8050fs6606
Drum potential sensor /M (DRPS M) Drum potential sensor /Y (DRPS Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-4
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (8) Developing unit
[4]
[1] [2]
[3] [2]
[1]
[3] [4] Toner density sensor /M (TDS M) Toner density sensor /Y (TDS Y)
8050fs6607
Toner density sensor /K (TDS K) Toner density sensor /C (TDS C)
(9) Image correction unit
[2]
[3]
[1]
[1] [2] Gamma sensor (PS11) Color registration sensor /F (PS8) [3]
8050fs6608
Color registration sensor /R (PS9)
6-5
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (10) Toner supply unit
[4]
[5]
[6]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] Toner level detection sensor /K (TLD K) Toner level detection sensor /C (TLD C) Toner supply interlock switch (MS2)
[2]
[4] [5] [6]
[1]
8050fs6609
Toner supply door open/close sensor (PS54) Toner level detection sensor /M (TLD M) Toner level detection sensor /Y (TLD Y)
(11) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[4] [5] [6]
[9] [8] [7] [3] [2] [1] [18] [17] [16]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
[15] [14] [13]
[12] [11] [10]

[10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] Paper size VR/1 (VR1) Paper size VR/2 (VR2) Paper size VR/3 (VR3) Paper size /S1 (PS33) Paper size /S2 (PS39) Paper size /S3 (PS45) Paper size /L1 (PS34) Paper size /L2 (PS40) Paper size /L3 (PS46)
8050fs6630
Pre-registration sensor /1 (PS29) Pre-registration sensor /2 (PS35) Pre-registration sensor /3 (PS41) No paper sensor /1 (PS31) No paper sensor /2 (PS37) No paper sensor /3 (PS44) Tray upper limit sensor /1 (PS30) Tray upper limit sensor /2 (PS36) Tray upper limit sensor /3 (PS42)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-6
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (12) By-pass feed unit
[4]
[1] [2] Paper size /LBP (PS49) No paper sensor /BP (PS47)
[3]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
Paper size VR/BP (VR4) Paper size /SBP (PS48)
8050fs6610
(13) Vertical conveyance unit
[2]
[1]
8050fs6631
[1]
Vertical conveyance door sensor (PS51)
[2]
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS50)
6-7
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (14) ADU
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10] [11]
[5]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1]
ADU conveyance sensor (PS20) ADU reverse sensor (PS21) Registration sensor (PS22)
8050fs6611
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 (PS27) Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 (PS28) ADU pre-registration sensor (PS23) 2nd transfer HP sensor (PS24) Conveyance lever sensor (PS55) Reverse/exit sensor (PS19)
By-pass conveyance sensor (PS26) Tray upper limit sensor (PS25)
(15) Paper exit section (left side of the main body)
[2]
[1]
8050fs6612
[1]
Paper exit sensor (PS13)
[2]
Paper exit full sensor (PS12)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-8
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (16) Fixing unit
[8] [7]
[1]
[2] [6]
[5] [3]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Fixing temperature sensor /3 (TH3) Fixing temperature sensor /1 (TH1) Thermostat /1 (TS1) Fixing pressure/release sensor (PS16) [5] [6] [7] [8]
8050fs6632
Thermostat /2 (TS2) Fixing temperature sensor /2 (TH2) Fixing paper exit sensor (PS17) Fixing temperature sensor /4 (TH4)
6-9
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING B. Loads (1) Rear of the main body
[12]
[13]
[14] [15] [16] [17]
[18]
[19] [20] [21] [22]
[23]
[5] [4] [3] [2] [11]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[1]
8050fs6613
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23]
[6]
DCPS cooling fan (M42) Developing motor /K (M23) Developing motor /C (M22) Developing motor /M (M21) Scanner motor (M1) Developing motor /Y (M20) Drum cooling fan /2 (M13) Drum cooling fan /1 (M12) Fixing cooling fan /3 (M36) Fixing cooling fan /2 (M37) Transfer belt motor (M18)
1st transfer pressure/release motor (M19) Drum motor /Y (M14) Drum motor /M (M15) Drum motor /C (M16) Drum motor /K (M17) Fixing cooling fan /1 (M10) IP cooling fan (M24) IPB cooling fan (M25) Tray up drive motor /1 (M40) Tray up drive motor /2 (M39) Tray up drive motor /3 (M38) Paper feed motor (M41)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-10
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) Top of the main body
[1]
[2]
[1] Scanner cooling fan (M2) [2] Exposure lamp (L1)
8050fs6614
[1]
[1] Transfer belt cooling fan (M11)
8050fs6615
6-11
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (4) Right side of the main body
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[3]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Writing exhaust fan /2 (M46) Heater /1 (HTR1) Heater /2 (HTR2) Writing intake fan /2 (M44) [5] [6] [7]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6616
Writing intake fan /1 (M43) Writing exhaust fan /1 (M45) Drum unit fan (M47)
(5) Left side of the main body
[3]
[1] [2] Paper exit fan /F (M28) Paper exit fan /M (M27)
[2]
[1]
[3] Paper exit fan /R (M26)
8050fs6617
VI DIAGRAMS
6-12
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (6) Write unit
[7] [6] [5]

[1] [2] [3] [4] Polygon motor /Y (M3) Polygon motor /M (M4) Polygon motor /C (M5) Polygon motor /K (M6)
[4] [3] [2] [1]

[5] [6] [7] Laser correction motor /Y (M7)* Laser correction motor /M (M8)* Laser correction motor /C (M9)*
8050fs6618
* Laser correction motor does not attached to write unit /K. (7) Process unit
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6619
[1] [2] [3]
Pre-charging lamp /Y (PCL Y) Pre-charging lamp /M (PCL M) Pre-charging lamp /C (PCL C)
[4] [5]
Pre-charging lamp /K (PCL K) Belt separation claw solenoid (SD1)
6-13
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (8) Image correction unit
[2]
[1] Gamma shutter solenoid (SD3) [2]
[1]
8050fs6620
Color registration shutter solenoid (SD2)
(9) Toner supply unit
[9]
[10]
[1]
[2]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Toner bottle clutch /M (MC15) Toner bottle motor (M53) Toner bottle clutch /C (MC16) Toner bottle clutch /K (MC17) Toner supply motor /K (M52)
[7] [6] [5]

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[4] [3]
Toner supply motor /C (M51) Toner supply motor /M (M50) Charger intake fan (M48) Toner supply motor /Y (M49) Toner bottle clutch /Y (MC14)
8050fs6621
VI DIAGRAMS
6-14
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (10) Paper feed tray 1 to 3
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

8050fs6633
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
Pick up solenoid /1 (SD7) Pick up solenoid /2 (SD8) Pick up solenoid /3 (SD9) Paper feed clutch /1 (MC7) Paper feed clutch /2 (MC9)
[6] [7] [8] [9]
Paper feed clutch /3 (MC11) Pre-registration clutch /1 (MC8) Pre-registration clutch /2 (MC10) Pre-registration clutch /3 (MC12)
(11) Vertical conveyance unit
[1]
[1] Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 (MC13)
8050fs6634
6-15
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (12) ADU
[9]
[10] [11] [12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[7]
[6] [5]
[4] [3] [2]

[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
[1]
8050fs6622
Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 (MC4) Intermediate conveyance clutch /3 (MC5) ADU lock solenoid (SD6) ADU pre-registration clutch (MC3) ADU conveyance clutch /2 (MC1) Reverse/exit motor (M33) ADU conveyance clutch /1 (MC2) Reverse/exit solenoid (SD4)
ADU reverse motor (M32) 2nd transfer pressure/release motor (M34) Registration motor (M30) Loop roller motor (M31) Pick up solenoid /BP (SD5) Paper feed clutch /BP (MC6) Tray up drive motor /BP (M35)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-16
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (13) Fixing unit
[1]
[5] [2]
[3] [4]
8050fs6635
[1] [2] [3]
Fixing upper lamp /1 (L2) Fixing upper lamp /2 (L3) Web motor (M54)
[4] [5]
Fixing motor (M29) Fixing lower lamp (L4)
6-17
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING C. PCBs and others (1) Rear of the main body
[17]
[18] [19]
[20]
[21]
[22] [23]
[24]
[9] [10] [11] [12]
[8] [16]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] [1]
[15]
AC drive board (ACDB) Noise filter (NF) Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[14]
[13]
[13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24]
8050fs6623
HDD: option (HDD-7) HDD I/F board: option (HDD IFB) Extended memory: option Memory board (MB) High voltage unit /1 (HV1) Overall control board (OACB) Image processing board (IPB) Scanner drive board (SCDB) DC power supply unit /4:Option (DCPS4) High voltage unit /2 (HV2) Printer control board (PRCB) Fixing heater control board : only in EU (FHCB)
Transformer /LCT (TRNS2) Transformer /main body (TRNS1) DC power supply unit /2 (DCPS2) DC power supply unit /1 (DCPS1) Drum drive board /Y (DRDB Y) Drum drive board /M (DRDB M) Drum drive board /C (DRDB C) Drum drive board /K (DRDB K)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-18
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (2) Top of the main body
[3]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6624
[1] [2]
CCD board (CCDB) Key counter (C (K))
[3]
L1 inverter board (L1 INVB)
[3]
[4]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Black counter (C (BK)) Total counter (C (T)) Operation board /2 (OB2) Operation board /3 (OB3)
[1]
[5] [6] [7] [8] OB inverter board (OB INVB) LCD board (LCDB) Operation board /1 (OB1) Touch panel board
8050fs6625
6-19
VI DIAGRAMS
PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING (4) Write unit
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1]
[1] [2] Temp detection board (TDB) (attached to write unit /K only) Laser drive board /Y (LDB Y) [3] [4] [5] Laser drive board /M (LDB M) Laser drive board /C (LDB C) Laser drive board /K (LDB K)
8050fs6626
(5) Process unit
[4]
[1] [2] Drum potential sensor board /K (DRSPSB K) Drum potential sensor board /C (DRSPSB C)
[3]
[2]
[3] [4]
[1]
8050fs6627
Drum potential sensor board /M (DRSPSB M) Drum potential sensor board /Y (DRSPSB Y)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-20
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 (6) Toner supply section
[1]
[1] Toner supply drive board (TSDB)
8050fs6628
(7) ADU
[1]
[1] Conveyance drive board (CVDB)
8050fs6629
6-21
VI DIAGRAMS
1.2
AFR-20 parts layout drawing

[18] [2] [7] [15] [1] [3] [11] [10] [9]
[16] [5] [6] [8]

[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Paper feed motor (M301) Conveyance motor (M302) Reverse/exit motor (M303) Registration clutch (MC301) Registration sensor (PS301) Timing sensor (PS302) Paper feed cover sensor (PS303) No paper sensor (PS304) Reverse sensor (PS305) Paper exit sensor (PS306)
[17]
[4]
[12]
[11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19]
[13]
[14]
8050fs6031
Paper exit cover sensor (PS307) Tray open/close sensor (PS308) Size sensor /S (PS309) Size sensor /L (PS310) Paper exit solenoid (SD301) Reverse solenoid (SD302) Size VR (VR301) RADF control board (DFCB) Size sensor board (SSB)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-22
1.3
C-208 parts layout drawing

[13] [14] [15] SW100 SD100 [1]
FRONT
[2] [3] [12] [11] [10] [4]
[9]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
M100
[8]
M101 [16]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[7]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6700
Front door interlock switch (MS101) Paper mis-centering sensor (PS120) No paper sensor (PS108) Paper feed sensor (PS107) Feed sensor (PS106) Upper limit sensor (PS109) Pre-registration clutch (MC102) Lower limit sensor (PS101)
Remaining paper sensor /4 (PS105) Remaining paper sensor /3 (PS104) Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS103) Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS102) Top cover interlock switch (MS102) Top cover open/close sensor (PS100) Paper feed clutch (MC101) LT drive board (LTDB)
6-23
VI DIAGRAMS
1.4
FN-120/FN-9 parts layout drawing

[26] [27]
[25] [24] [23] [21] [20] [19] [18] [17] [16] [22]
[1] [2]
[3]
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] FRONT [15] [14] [13]
8050fs6701
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12]
Sub-tray paper exit sensor (PS701) Paper exit opening HP sensor (PS712) Gate HP sensor (PS716) FNS inlet sensor (PS704) Stapler movement motor (M711) FNS interlock switch (MS701) Clincher rotation motor (M704) Alignment HP sensor/L (PS724) (FN-9 only) Alignment motor/L (M716) (FN-9 only) Folding knife HP sensor (PS722) (FN-9 only) Folding knife motor (M719) (FN-9 only) Stopper motor (M718) (FN-9 only) Clincher rotation HP sensor(PS714) Folding passage sensor (PS726) (FN-9 only)
[15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [26] [27]
Stopper HP sensor (PS723) (FN-9 only) Stacker inlet sensor (PS705) Stacker no paper sensor (PS720) Stacker auxiliary solenoid (SD702) Stack auxiliary motor (M722) Alignment HP sensor/U (PS708) Paper exit belt HP sensor (PS709) Stacker inlet motor (M713) Shift HP sensor (PS718) Shift motor (M702) Main tray paper exit sensor (PS706) Sub-tray full sensor (PS719) Paper exit opening solenoid (SD704)
VI DIAGRAMS
[13] [14]
6-24
[12] [11]
[13] [14]
[10]
[1] [2]
[9]
[3] [4]
[8] [5] [7] [6]
8050fs6702
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor (PS707) Tray upper limit sensor (PS702) Counter rest sensor (PS715) By-pass gate solenoid (SD705) Tray lower limit sensor (PS703) Tray up/down motor (M703) Folding conveyance motor (M720) (FN-9 only)
[8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
Relay board (RB) FNS control board (FNSCB) Gate drive motor (M712) FNS conveyance motor (M701) Paper exit opening motor (M708) Sub-tray paper exit motor (M721) Paper exit opening roller motor (M707)
6-25
VI DIAGRAMS
[8] [7] [6]
[5]
[4]
[1] [2] [3] [4] Folding paper exit sensor (PS725) (FN-9 only) Folding full LED (LED729) (FN-9 only) Folding full sensor (PS729) (FN-9 only) Stapler rotation HP sensor (PS713)
[3]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[1]
8050fs6703
Three-folding gate solenoid (SD706) (FN-9 only) Stapler rotation motor (M706) Stapler movement HP sensor (PS711) Alignment motor/U (M705)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-26
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

8050fs6704
[1]
Clincher motor/R (M710) Clincher motor/F (M715)
[4]
Stapler HP sensor/R (PS730) Stapler HP sensor/F (PS731)
[2]
Clincher HP sensor/R (PS732) Clincher HP sensor/F (PS733)
[5]
Cartridge switch/R (SW701) Cartridge switch/F (SW703)
[3]
Stapler motor/R (M709) Stapler motor/F (M714)
[6]
Stapler switch/R (SW702) Stapler switch/F (SW704)
6-27
VI DIAGRAMS
1.5
TMG-3 parts layout drawing

[11] [10] [1]
[2]
[3] [9] [8] [4] [6]

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[7]
[5]
8050fs6705
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Upper limit sensor (PS110) DC power unit (DCPS) Lower limit sensor (PS111) Holder motor (M106) Circuit breaker (CBR) Relay 1 (RL1)
Relay 2 (RL28) Coil (COL) Scrap box detection sensor (PS107) Conveyance motor (M101) TU drive board (TUDB)
VI DIAGRAMS
6-28
[13] [12]
[14]
[15]
[16] [1] [2]
[3]
[4]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[6]
[5]
8050fs6706
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
Scrap removal fan motor (M108) Scrap full LED (LED101) Scrap full sensor (PS109) Entrance sensor (PS101) Trimmer motor (M102) Trimmer HP sensor (PS106) Press HP sensor (PS105) Press motor (M105)
Front door MS2 (MS2) Paper exit sensor (PS108) Stacker S3 (MS3) Stacker door sensor (PS114) Stacker MS4 (MS4) Stacker full sensor (PS113) Pusher HP sensor(PS112) Pusher motor (M107)
[1]
[5]
[2]
[4]
[3]
8050fs6707
[1] [2] [3]
Stopper movement motor(M103) Conveyance sensor (PS102) Stopper release HP sensor (PS104)
[4] [5]
Stopper release motor (M104) Stopper HP sensor (PS103)
6-29
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 Main Body connector layout drawing
A. Printer control board

650 (W : 20 pin) 357 (W : 9 pin) 360 (W : 40 pin) 391 (GY : 18 pin) 651 (W : 20 pin) 384 (W : 30 pin)
340 (W : 28 pin) 572 (W : 4 pin) 376 (W : 28 pin) 620 (BN : 7 pin) 600 (BN : 20 pin) 300 (BN : 18 pin) 303 (W : 2 pin) 302 (W : 6 pin) 574 (W : 3 pin) 564 (W : 2 pin) 393 (W : 24 pin) 573 (W : 3 pin)
700 (W : 26 pin)
309 (W : 36 pin)
353 (BN : 12 pin)
500 (BN : 34 pin) 467 (BN : 6 pin)
400 (BN : 32 pin) 2 (N.C.) 4 (N.C.) 414 (B : 32 pin) 459 (W : 10 pin) 151 (GY : 8 pin) 36 (N.C.) 730 (W : 32 pin) 301 (W : 4 pin) 1 (N.C.)
428 (BN : 30 pin)
464 (BN : 19 pin) 736 (W : 24 pin) 442 (W : 34 pin) 150 (GY : 24 pin) 37 (N.C.)
8050fs6033
VI DIAGRAMS
6-30
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 B. AC drive board
120 (W : 5 pin)
152 (W : 11 pin)
156 (W : 5 pin) 153 (W : 4 pin)
121 (W : 8 pin)
155 (W : 5 pin)
157 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6034
C. CCD drive board
511 (W : 50 pin)
8050fs6035
D. Conveyance drive board

534 (W : 12 pin) 536 (W : 6 pin) 3 (N.C.) 5 (N.C.) 539 (W : 22 pin)
524 (W : 7 pin) 518 (W : 15 pin) 569 (B : 4 pin) 513 (W : 6 pin)
548 (W : 6 pin)
507 (W : 6 pin)
527 (W : 15 pin)
1 (N.C.)
503 (W : 34 pin)
510 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6036
6-31
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING E. DC power unit/1
102 (W : 4 pin) 103 (W : 6 pin) 108 (W : 4 pin) 101 (W : 3 pin) 106 (W : 8 pin) 107 (W : 7 pin) 104 (W : 10 pin) 105 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6037
F.
DC power unit/2
111 (W : 12 pin) 110 (W : 4 pin) 112 (W : 6 pin) 113 (W : 4 pin) 114 (W : 9 pin) 115 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6038
G. DC power unit/3
109 (W : 6 pin)
8050fs6100
VI DIAGRAMS
6-32
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 H. Drum drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
316,323,330,337 (W : 3 pin)
313,320,327,334 (W : 6 pin)
312,319,326,333 (W : 2 pin)
311,318,325,332 (W : 9 pin)
8050fs6039
I.
Fixing heater control board
158 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6040
J.
High voltage unit/1
731 (W : 8 pin)
732 (W : 8 pin)
735 (W : 3 pin)
733 (W : 8 pin)
734 (W : 8 pin)
8050fs6041
6-33
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING K. High voltage unit/2
737 (W : 12 pin) 739 (W : 3 pin) 738 (W : 10 pin) 740 (N.C.)

8050fs6042
L.
Image processing board

271 (W : 6 pin)
270 (BK : 60 pin) 260 (W : 68 pin)
253 (BK : 100 pin)
272 (W : 34 pin)
220 (W : 120 pin)
254 (BK : 120 pin)
280 (B : 34 pin)
9 (N.C.) 8 (N.C.)
8050fs6043
VI DIAGRAMS
6-34
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 M. Index sensor/Y,/M,/C,/K
274,278,282,286 (GY : 5 pin)
8050fs6044
N. L1 inverter board
606 (W : 3 pin)
?? (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6045
O. Laser drive board/Y, /M, /C, /K
275,279,283,287 (W : 12 pin)
8050fs6046
P.
Memory board
141 (W : 40 pin)
142 (W : 20 pin)
8050fs6047
6-35
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING Q. Overall control board

250 (W : 18 pin) 217 (BN : 50 pin)
258 (N.C.)
13 (N.C.) 251 (W : 16 pin) 270 (W : 60 pin) 12 (N.C.) 252 (W : 4 pin) 9 (N.C.)
257 (BK : 9 pin)
253 (W : 100 pin)
10 (N.C.)
256 (BK : 36 pin)
259 (BK : 4 pin) 254 (W : 120 pin) 11 (N.C.) 6 (N.C.) 7 (N.C.) 255 (BK : 8 pin)
5 (N.C.)
14 (N.C.)
8 (N.C.)
8050fs6048
R. OB inverter board
166 (W : 4 pin)
165 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6049
VI DIAGRAMS
6-36
CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003 S. Operation board/1

176 (W : 6 pin) 173 (W : 6 pin)
172 (W : 12 pin)
175 (W : 4 pin) 174 (W : 14 pin)
8050fs6050
T.
Operation board/2
162 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6051
U. Operation board/3
158 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6101
6-37
VI DIAGRAMS
CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING V. Scanner drive board

607 (W : 3 pin) 609 (W : 14 pin)
1 (N.C.)
601 (W : 20 pin) 603 (W : 3 pin)
602 (W : 4 pin) 605 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6052
W. Temperature detection board
670 (W : 3 pin)
8050fs6053
X. Toner supply drive board

704 (W : 6 pin) 724 (W : 18 pin)
702 (W : 26 pin) 726 (W : 12 pin) 706 (W : 6 pin) 711 (W : 8 pin)
705 (W : 7 pin)
708 (W : 11 pin)
8050fs6054
Y.
Gamma sensor
558 (W : 5 pin)
8050fs6055
VI DIAGRAMS
6-38
2.2
AFR-20 connector layout drawing
A. DF drive board
14 (W : 9 pin)
13 (W : 15 pin)
3 (W : 7 pin) 12 (W : 5 pin) 1 (N.C.) 5 (W : 5 pin) 8 (N.C.) 2 (W : 6 pin)
4 (W : 6 pin)
7 (W : 9 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin)
6 (W : 2 pin)
8050fs6102
2.3
C-208 connector layout drawing

802 (W : 10 pin) 807 (W : 14 pin)
5 (N.C.) 804 (W : 12 pin) 4 (N.C.)
805 (W : 11 pin)
800 (W : 6 pin) 808 (W : 2 pin) 803 (W : 6 pin) 3 (N.C.) 801 (W : 11 pin)
806 (W : 15 pin)
2 (N.C.) 1 (N.C.)
8050fs6103
6-39
VI DIAGRAMS
2.4
FN-120/FN-9 connector layout drawing
A. FNS control board

61 (W : 2 pin) 51 (W : 32 pin) 33 (W : 38 pin)
12 (W : 24 pin) 1 (W : 18 pin) 10 (W : 4 pin) 11 (W : 9 pin) 7 (W: 6 pin) 5 (W : 22 pin) 6 (W : 5 pin) 41 (GY : 30 pin) FS-215 only 62 (W : 40 pin) 8 (W : 8 pin) 52 (W : 6 pin)
43 (W : 8 pin) FS-215 only 42 (W : 5 pin) FS-215 only
9 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only 4 (W : 40 pin) 2 (W : 5 pin) 3 (W : 11 pin)

8050fs6104
B. Relay board
6 (W : 30 pin) 5 (W : 30 pin)
10 (W : 8 pin) 4 (W : 24 pin) FS-215 only 8 (W : 34 pin) 9 (W : 2 pin) FS-215 only 1 (W : 40 pin) 7 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
2 (W : 22 pin) 3 (W : 28 pin) FS-215 only
8050fs6105
VI DIAGRAMS
6-40
2.5
TMG-3 connector layout drawing

402 (GY : 28 pin) 404 (GY : 18 pin) 406 (GY : 20 pin)
403 (W : 5 pin) 401 (GY : 40 pin) 405 (W : 4 pin) 408 (W : 3 pin) 407 (W : 2 pin)
409 (W : 4 pin)
8050fs6106
6-41
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
3.1
TIMING CHART
Chart 1/2
Item
Time (sec)
Code M41 SD7 MC7 MC8 PS29 PS27 PS28 PS22 MC13 MC4 MC5
Paper feed motor Pick up solenoid /1 Paper feed clutch /1 Pre-registration clutch /1
3. TIMING CHART
Pre-registration sensor /1 Intermediate conveyance sensor /1 Intermediate conveyance sensor /2 Registration sensor
Main Body timing chart
Intermediate conveyance clutch /1 Intermediate conveyance clutch /2 Intermediate conveyance clutch /3
V_TOP M31 M30 F M29 R PS17 PS13 PS19 PS21 PS20 PS23 M19 M34
Loop roller motor Register out roller motor
ument of 2 copies, paper feed tray /1 paper feed
A. Full color, life size, ADF single sided original document of 2 sheets, double sided original doc-
6-42
F M33 R F M32 R SD4 MC2 MC1 MC3
Fixing motor
Fixing paper exit sensor Paper exit sensor Reverse/exit sensor ADU reverse sensor ADU conveyance ADU pre-registration sensor
1st transfer pressure/release motor 2nd transfer pressure/release motor
Reverse/exit motor
ADU reverse motor
Reverse/exit solenoid ADU conveyance clutch /1 ADU conveyance clutch /2 ADU pre-registration clutch
To chart 2/2
A
4969fs6324a
Item
Time (sec)
Code
Chart 2/2
To chart 1/2
M14 M15 M16 M17 M18
Drum motor /Y Drum motor /M Drum motor /C Drum motor /K Transfer belt motor
Charging /Y Charging /M Charging /C Charging /K Developer bias DC /Y Developer bias DC /M Developer bias DC /C Developer bias DC /K
6-43
SD1
Developer bias AC /Y Developer bias AC /M Developer bias AC /C Developer bias AC /K 1st transfer /Y 1st transfer /M 1st transfer /C 1st transfer /K
2nd transfer Separation AC/DC Transfer Drum separation claw solenoid
4969fs6324b
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
3.2
TIMING CHART
No paper sensor PS304 Registration sensor PS301 Registration clutch MC301 Paper feed motor M301
Paper unloaded Paper loaded Paper unloaded Paper loaded OFF ON CW 300mm/s CW 67mm/s Stop CCW 300mm/s CCW 710mm/s
AFR-20 timing chart
Timing sensor PS302 Conveyance motor M302
Paper unloaded Paper loaded CW 710mm/s
A. A4, life size, single-sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/3)
6-44
Stop CCW 138mm/s CCW 300mm/s CCW 710mm/s
Reverse sensor PS305 Reverse/exit motor M303
Paper unloaded Paper loaded CW 710mm/s CW 400mm/s CW 350mm/s CW 150mm/s Stop CCW 150mm/s CCW 400mm/s CCW 710mm/s CCW 900mm/s
4969fs6310
Paper exit sensor PS306 Reverse solenoid SD302 Paper exit solenoid SD301
Paper unloaded Paper loaded OFF ON OFF ON
Paper unloaded Paper loaded Paper unloaded Paper loaded OFF ON CW CW 67mm/s Stop CCW 300mm/s CCW 710mm/s
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (2/3)
6-45
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
8050fs6311
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Paper unloaded Paper loaded Paper unloaded Paper loaded OFF ON CW 300mm/s CW 67mm/s Stop CCW 300mm/s CCW 710mm/s Paper unloaded Paper loaded CW 710mm/s
Timing sensor PS302 Conveyance motor M302 Stop CCW 138mm/s CCW 300mm/s CCW 710mm/s Paper unloaded Paper loaded CW 710mm/s CW 400mm/s CW 350mm/s CW 150mm/s Stop CCW 150mm/s CCW 400mm/s CCW 710mm/s CCW 900mm/s
A. A4, life size, single sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (3/3)
6-46
4969fs6312
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original document of 3 sheets (1/4)
6-47
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
4969fs6313
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Paper unloaded
Paper loaded CW 710mm/s
6-48
4969fs6314
B. A4, life size, double sided original document, original documents of 3 sheets (3/4)
6-49
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
4969fs6315
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Stop
6-50
CCW 138mm/s
CCW 300mm/s CCW 710mm/s
Paper unloaded Paper loaded CW 710mm/s CW 400mm/s
CW 350mm/s
CW 150mm/s Stop CCW 150mm/s CCW 400mm/s CCW 710mm/s
CCW 900mm/s
Paper unloaded
4969fs6316
Paper loaded OFF ON OFF ON
3.3
Item
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Time (sec) Code
Paper feed motor M101
C-208 timing chart
Paper feed clutch MC101
A. A4, single sided, 2-sheet paper feed
Paper feed solenoid SD100
6-51
MC102 PS107 PS106 PS27 Start button ON
Pre-registration clutch
Paper feed sensor
Feed sensor
Intermediate conveyance sensor /1
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
4969fs6317
VI DIAGRAMS
3.4
TIMING CHART
Item FNS Entrance sensor PS704 M701
Time (sec) Code

0 1 2 3 4
FNS Conveyance motor
670mm/s
400mm/s
M702 PS718 SD704 M707 PS706 PS702 M703
Shift motor Shift HP sensor Paper exit opening solenoid 253mm/s Paper exit roller motor 400mm/s Main tray paper exit sensor
Tray upper limit sensor
FN-120/FN-9 timing chart
Tray up/down motor
UP DOWN FNS operation start signal ON 1-1 1-2
2-1
A. Sort, A4, document of 2 sheets, 3-copy setting, single sided
6-52
6 7 8 9
Time (sec)
Item
Code PS704 M701 Shift motor Shift HP sensor M702 PS718 SD704 M707 PS706 Tray upper limit sensor PS702 UP Tray up/down motor M703 DOWN Paper exit opening solenoid 253mm/s Paper exit roller 400mm/s motor Main tray paper exit sensor FNS Entrance sensor 670mm/s FNS Conveyance 400mm/s motor
Copy - Page
2-2
3-1
3-2
0 2
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Time (sec) Code Item FNS Entrance sensor PS704 M701 FNS Conveyance drive motor By-pass gate solenoid SD705 Stacker entrance sensor PS705 Stacker entrance motor M713 M722 Stack drive motor Stack drive solenoid SD702 Close M705 Alignment motor /U Open M711 Stapler movement motor Stapler, clincher motor /F M714/715 Stapler, clincher motor /R M709/710 Paper exit belt HP sensor PS709 Main tray paper exit sensor PS706 Paper exit opening solenoid SD704 950mm/s 660mm/s M707 Paper exit roller motor 280mm/s Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS707 UP Tray up/down motor M703 DOWN
B. Flat stapling at 2 points, A4, document of 11 sheets, 2-copy setting
6-53
1-1 FNS operation start signal ON
26 30 27 28 29
1-2
1-3
1 - 10
31
1 - 11
32
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
670mm/s
Item Code Time (sec) FNS Entrance sensor PS704 M701 FNS Conveyance drive motor By-pass gate solenoid SD705 Stacker entrance sensor PS705 Stacker entrance motor M713 M722 Stack drive motor Stack drive solenoid SD702 Close Alignment motor /U M705 Open M711 Stapler movement motor Stapler, clincher motor /F M714/715 Stapler, clincher motor /R M709/710 Paper exit belt HP sensor PS709 Main tray paper exit sensor PS706 SD704 Paper exit opening solenoid 950mm/s 660mm/s Paper exit roller motor M707 280mm/s Stapler paper exit upper limit sensor PS707 UP Tray up/down motor M703 DOWN
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
4969fs6319
Copy - Page
2-9
2 - 10
2 -11
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Code PS704 M701 PS705 M713

0 6 8 1 3 4 5 7 9
PS708 M705 PS724 M716 M714/715 M709/710 PS723 M718 M720 PS725 M719 PS722 PS726 PS712 M706
A
Time (sec) Item FNS Entrance sensor FNS Conveyance drive motor Stacker Entrance sensor 670mm/s Stacker entrance motor 500mm/s Alignment HP sensor /U Close Alignment motor /U Open Alignment HP sensor /L Close Alignment motor /L Open Stapler motor, clincher motor /F Stapler motor, clincher motor /R Stopper HP sensor Down Stopper motor Up 670mm/s Folding conveyance motor 500mm/s Folding conveyance sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor Folding passage sensor Paper exit opening HP sensor Paper exit opening motor
C. Stitch and fold, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
6-54
1-1
12 13 14 15 16 17
FNS Operation Open start signal ON

11
1-2
1-3
Code PS704 M701 PS705 M713 PS708 M705 PS724 M716 M714/715 M709/710 PS723 M718 M720 PS725 M719 PS722 PS726 PS712 M706
10
Time (sec) Item FNS Entrance sensor FNS Conveyance drive motor Stacker Entrance sensor 670mm/s Stacker entrance motor 500mm/s Alignment HP sensor /U Close Alignment motor /U Open Alignment HP sensor /L Close Alignment motor /L Open Stapler motor, clincher motor /F Stapler motor, clincher motor /R Stopper HP sensor Down Stopper motor Up 670mm/s Folding conveyance motor 500mm/s Folding conveyance sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor Folding passage sensor Paper exit opening HP sensor Paper exit opening motor
4969fs6320
2-1
2-2
2-3
Copy - Page
Code
0 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14
M707 PS709 PS704 M712 M705 M716 PS705 M713 PS726 M719 PS722 M701 M718 SD706 M720 PS725
16 17 18 19 20
Time (sec) Item Paper exit roller motor Paper exit belt HP senFNS Entrance sensor Gate drive motor Close Alignment motor /U Open Close Alignment motor /L Open Stacker Entrance sensor Stacker entrance motor 670mm/s 500mm/s Folding passage sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor FNS Conveyance motor Down Stopper motor Up Three-folding gate solenoid Folding Conveyance motor Folding exit sensor
A
D. Three-folding, A4R, original document of 3 sheets, 2-copy setting, single sided
6-55
FNS operation start signal ON
A
Time (sec)
Code M707 PS709 PS704 M712 M705 M716 PS705 M713 PS726 M719 PS722 M701 M718 SD706 M720 PS725 Item Paper exit roller motor Paper exit belt HP sensor FNS Entrance sensor Gate drive motor Close Alignment motor /U Open Close Alignment motor /L Open Stacker Entrance sensor 670mm/s 500mm/s Stacker entrance motor Folding passage sensor Folding knife motor Folding knife HP sensor FNS Conveyance motor Down Stopper motor Up Three-folding gate solenoid Folding Conveyance motor Folding exit sensor
TIMING CHART
VI DIAGRAMS
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
3.5
TMG-3 timing chart
A. Cutting mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
Item
-52 -51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89
Time (sec) Code
90
91
92
93
6-56
Copy 1
Folding Conveyance motor (FNS) Conveyance motor Entrance sensor Stopper motor Conveyance sensor Press motor Cutter motor Stopper clear motor Holder motor Pressure motor Paper exit sensor Copy 2
M720 M101 PS101 M103 PS102 M105 M102 M104 M106 M107 PS108
4969fs6322
B. Through mode, A3, 16 sheets, 2 copies
Item
-52 -51 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 82 83 84
Time (sec) Code
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
6-57
Copy 1
Folding Conveyance motor (FNS) Conveyance motor Entrance sensor Stopper motor Conveyance sensor Press motor Cutter motor Stopper clear motor Holder motor Pressure motor Paper exit sensor
M720 M101 PS101 M103 PS102 M105 M102 M104 M106 M107 PS108 Copy 2
TIMING CHART
4969fs6323
VI DIAGRAMS
TIMING CHART
Blank Page
VI DIAGRAMS
6-58
Copyright 2003 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. Printed in Japan Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid disclosure of confidential information.
7662-4969-11 0309xxxx

KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual (Field Service)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KONICA MINOLTA C500 CF5001 Service Manual (Field Service)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

SAFETY CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-11 INDICATION OF WARNING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-13

4.10 Replacing the transfer belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39

III SERVICE TOOL

IMPORTANT INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-10

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

4.14 Removing and reinstalling the drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44

6. PAPER FEED TRAYS /1 to /3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

III SERVICE TOOL

9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7 9.8

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

3. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129

2. PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139

Removing and reinstalling the front cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-135

III SERVICE TOOL

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

III SERVICE TOOL

Replacing the clincher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-180 Replacing the stapler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-182

Cover Inserter D DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

Telephone number setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

ACS adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90 Density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91 v

Contrast adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88 Image judge adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

III SERVICE TOOL

Password setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48

Wide paper setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Running test mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-95

7.8.3 7.8.4 7.8.5 7.8.6 7.8.7 7.9

List output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106

8. 47 MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107 8.1 47 mode/multi mode setting method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-107

III SERVICE TOOL

8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5

9. OTHER ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-131

9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

III SERVICE TOOL

2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2 2.3 2.4

Connecting to the ISW connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22

III SERVICE TOOL

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

Internet ISW using E-Mail remote notification system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 3.5.1

3.6.1 3.6.2 3.7

Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 How to use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

III SERVICE TOOL

1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9

3. SERVICE MATERIAL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 4. CE TOOLS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30

4. OVERALL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59

III SERVICE TOOL

AFR-20 parts layout drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

III SERVICE TOOL II ADJUSTMENT I DIS./ASSEMBLY

CF5001 Field Service Ver.1.0 Sep 2003

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION

Do not touch with wet hand

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

DANGER : PROHIBITED ACTIONS

Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

Making any modification to the copier unless instructed by Minolta.

Using parts not specified by Minolta.